CA Roscoe Ver6

CA-Roscoe
User Guide
6.0
SP3
This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the “Documentation”) is for
the end user’s informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by Computer Associates
International, Inc. (“CA”) at any time.
This documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed or duplicated, in whole or in part, without
the prior written consent of CA. This documentation is proprietary information of CA and protected by the copyright
laws of the United States and international treaties.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this documentation for
their own internal use, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy. Only
authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the confidentiality provisions of the
license for the software are permitted to have access to such copies.
This right to print copies is limited to the period during which the license for the product remains in full force and
effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it shall be the user’s responsibility to return to CA the reproduced
copies or to certify to CA that same have been destroyed.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation “as is” without warranty of any kind,
including without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or
noninfringement. In no event will CA be liable to the end user or any third party for any loss or damage, direct or
indirect, from the use of this documentation, including without limitation, lost profits, business interruption,
goodwill, or lost data, even if CA is expressly advised of such loss or damage.
The use of any product referenced in this documentation and this documentation is governed by the end user’s
applicable license agreement.
The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc.
Provided with “Restricted Rights” as set forth in 48 C.F.R. Section 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Sections 52.227-19(c)(1) and (2) or
DFARS Section 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) or applicable successor provisions.
 2001 Computer Associates International, Inc.
All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.
Contents
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Part I. Getting Started (General Information)
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2.1 String Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays . . . . . 2-12
2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Contents iii
4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display . . . . 5-4
5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
iv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 The System Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.1.3.1 CA-Roscoe From CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.1.3.2 CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.3.3 CA-Roscoe From TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Contents v
12.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.8 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.1.1.1 To copy a single line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.1.2 To copy a range of lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.1.3 To duplicate the copied lines at the destination: . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
vi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . . . 17-1
Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . . 18-1

18.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
18.2.2.2 Using Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
19.2.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
19.5.1.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-15
Contents vii
19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
19.5.2.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13
Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

21.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT . . 22-3
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . . 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets)
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC Selection
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10
24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12
24.3.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13
viii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-15
Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal . . . 25-1
25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
25.1.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
25.1.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
25.2.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
25.4.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
25.4.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
25.5.3.3 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-21
25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
25.5.3.7 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-24
25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-26
25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-28
25.7.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-31
25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-33
Contents ix
25.8.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-36
25.9 Selecting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-38
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
26.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
26.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String . . . . . 26-6
26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . . . 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
27.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-4
27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-7
27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
27.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-14
27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-15
27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-21
27.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22
27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25
27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-28
27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-33
27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-36
27.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-40
27.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-44
27.10.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-44
x CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-45
27.10.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-46
27.10.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-51
27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-52
27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-53
27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-57
27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-57
27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-58
27.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-59
Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6
28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
28.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-12
28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-13
28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
29.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job? . . . . . . . . 30-6
30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Contents xi
30.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . 30-9
30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17
30.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17
30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data)
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
31.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . . 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
32.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
32.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6
xii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
32.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12
Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
33.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . . 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7
34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14
34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
34.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-17
34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-22
Contents xiii
Part VI. Additional Facilities
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.1.1 What can you do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
35.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-5
35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-6
35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-8
35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11
35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
35.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
35.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18
35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-21
35.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-22
35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-24
35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-25
35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-27
35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface . . . . 35-28
Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3
38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5
38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5
38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
38.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8
38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-9
38.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-10
Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
Appendixes
xiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Contents xv
xvi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide
About This Guide
This CA-Roscoe User Guide provides a task-oriented description of CA-Roscoe. It

describes how you can use CA-Roscoe commands and facilities to perform a variety of
activities.
About This Guide xvii

Organization
Chapter Description
1 Introduces CA-Roscoe.
2 Provides general information about CA-Roscoe commands.
3 Describes how to control character recognition.
4 Describes how to define column boundaries.
5 Describes how to define the display format.
6 Describes how to display and change the display and
column boundaries and session attributes. Also describes
how to display site-defined attribute values, the time, and
the date.
7 Describes how to print data at a system or 328x-type printer.
8 Describes the CA-Roscoe screen format, how to split the
screen, change screen sizes and lock the screen.
9 Describes how to send and receive messages.
10 Describes how sign on and off CA-Roscoe.
11 Describes how to use and customize PF and PA key
assignments.
12 Describes how to obtain additional information about
CA-Roscoe.
13 Introduces the AWS and describes how to attach, change,
create, detach, discard, position, and reattach an AWS.
14 Describes how to change data within an AWS by adding or
changing character strings.
15 Describes how to copy data within and into an AWS.
16 Describes how to delete data from an AWS.
17 Describes how to display and change AWS information.
18 Describes how to enter data into an AWS and format that
data.
19 Describes how to format text within the AWS.
20 Describes how to locate all or specific occurrences of data
within an AWS.
21 Describes how to move data within an AWS.
22 Describes how to renumber the contents of an AWS.
23 Describes how to save and update data as a library member.
24 Introduces the Data Set Facility.
xviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter Description
25 Describes how to attach data or a Selection List.
26 Describes how to locate data, position the display, detach a
data set object, and then reattach it.
27 Describes how to perform a variety of data management
tasks. These tasks include allocating, cataloging, copying,
compressing, deleting, inquiring, printing, releasing,
renaming, uncataloging, and writing data.
28 Introduces the job output facilities and describes how to
syntax check and submit jobs for execution.
29 Describes how to display job execution status,
class/destination status, initiator status, and job queue status.
30 Describes how to attach job output, browse the job, and
perform such tasks as altering file attributes, copying output,
displaying file attributes and printing the job at a system or
328x-type printer.
31 Introduces the Library Facility.
32 Describes how to attach data or a Selection List.
33 Describes how to locate data, position the display, detach
data, and then reattach it.
34 Describes how to perform such library management tasks as
altering attributes, copying, deleting, inquiring, printing, and
renaming members.
35 Introduces the BulletinBoard System.
36 Introduces CA-Roscoe/DB2.
37 Introduces the Dialog Management Facility.
38 Introduces the Extended Time Sharing Option (ETSO).
39 Introduces the ROSCOE Programming Facility (RPF).
40 Introduces SKETCH.
APPENDIX A Describes how to use typewriter devices with CA-Roscoe.
About This Guide xix

Summary of Revisions in this Edition
CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2.
See Chapter 29, “Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information” on page 29-1 and 30.1.1,
“Using a Primary Command” on page 30-2 for more information.
xx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Summary of Revisions
■ Displaying Session Attributes/Information:
The STATUS SESSION display now includes the new field:
SPLIT Contains current split screen setting.
■ The Job Facility:
CA-Roscoe 6.0 contains a panel-driven RPF system to facilitate job processing. It
is invoked using the AJOB command, and is referred to as the Job Facility. The
Job Facility can be used to:
– attach jobs
– display a job's execution status
– display job-related information
– alter file attributes
– copy jobs
– print jobs
– cancel jobs
About This Guide xxi

CA-Roscoe Publications
The following publications are supplied with CA-Roscoe. They are divided into a
User Series and a System Series.
User Series Contents

Name
Command Reference Describes all CA-Roscoe primary and line commands
Guide and Monitor commands.
Extended Development Describes how: 1) the Application Programming
Tools Guide Interface (API) can be used by applications executing
under ETSO to take advantage of CA-Roscoe
facilities, and 2) the interactive facilities provided by
SKETCH can be used to generate and maintain panels
used in programs running under CICS or IMS.
Getting Started Guide Introduces CA-Roscoe to non-programmers.
Reference Summary Summarizes all CA-Roscoe primary and line
commands and Monitor commands.
Reference Summary (for Summarizes all Roscoe Programming Facility (RPF)
RPF) commands, functions, expressions and variables.
Release Guide Provides a summary of the enhancements included in
this release.
RPF Language Guide Describes all components of the RPF language and
how to write RPF programs. It also describes the
Dialog Management Facility (DMF) which can be
used to develop, maintain and execute panel-driven
RPF applications.
User Guide Provides task-oriented descriptions of how to use
CA-Roscoe.
xxii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

System Series Contents
Name
CA-ACTIVATOR 2.1 Presents CA-ACTIVATOR installation procedures.
Supplement
Extended Facilities for Describes how sites can make extensions to their
System Programmers CA-Roscoe system. This includes creating site-written
Guide Monitor routines and customizing security and other
online exits.
Installation Guide Describes the steps to follow when installing or
upgrading CA-Roscoe.
Messages and Codes Explains all messages that might be received by
Guide individuals using CA-Roscoe and/or by the individual
responsible for maintaining CA-Roscoe.
Programs and Utilities Describes CA-Roscoe execution requirements. Also
Guide describes maintenance and reporting programs for the
accounting facility, Active Work Space (AWS), library
system, and user profile system.
Security Administration Describes implementation of internal and external
Guide security to protect your CA-Roscoe system.
System Commands Describes commands used to control and monitor
Guide CA-Roscoe and to obtain performance information
about that execution.
System Reference Guide Intended for the individual responsible for maintaining
CA-Roscoe. It describes CA-Roscoe and its
components.
About This Guide xxiii

Related Publications
The following manuals are included in the CA90s Services Documentation set:
Title Contents
CA90s Services Reference Guide Operating Instructions for the CA90s
Services.
CA90s Services Installation and Installation procedure and installation
Maintenance Guide JCL for CA90s Services.
CA90s Services Message Guide Messages and codes for CA90s
Services.
CA90s Services CA-ACTIVATOR 2.1 Proceduresa for using
Supplement CA-ACTIVATOR to install and
maintain CA90s Services.
CA90s Services CA-ACTIVATOR Installation and upgrade instructions,
Implementation and User Guide and operating instructions for
CA-ACTIVATOR.
CA-ViewPoint User Guide Contains information and examples for
implementing and using ViewPoint.
The following manuals relate to CA-Roscoe and are available from Computer
Associates.
Title Contents
CA-Earl Reference Guide Contains detailed information about
CA-Earl statements, parameters, and
coding rules. Also explains the
CA-Earl Reporting Service.
CA-Earl User Guide Designed for users interested in
learning about CA-Earl. It presents an
introduction to CA-Earl features and
capabilities.
CA-Earl Systems Programmer Guide Lists the installation options for
CA-Earl and instructions for modifying
them. Also describes size
requirements and program execution.
CA-Earl Examples Guide Contains sample programs that show a
variety of common applications.
xxiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

CA90s Services
CA90s Services are a common set of services that may be used by any MVS
Computer Associates product. These services are maintained separately from the
product and are documented and installed separately as well. CA-Roscoe uses
CAIRIM for installation services and security.
Licensing Management Program (LMP)
CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine product licensing

authorization.
About This Guide xxv

Reading Syntax Diagrams
The formats of all statements and some basic language elements are illustrated using
syntax diagrams. Read syntax diagrams from left to right and top to bottom.
The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax diagrams.
Keywords: Appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM.

These words must be entered exactly as shown.
Variables: Appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, variable.
Required Keywords and Variables: Appear on a main line.
Optional Keywords and Variables: Appear below a main line.
Default Keywords and Variables: Appear above a main line.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate the beginning of a

statement.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: Indicate the end of a statement.
Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate a portion of a statement, or

that the statement continues in another diagram.
Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or arithmetic

symbols are shown with a keyword or variable, they must be entered as part of the
statement or command. Punctuation marks and arithmetic symbols can include:
, comma > greater than symbol

. period < less than symbol
( open parenthesis = equal sign
) close parenthesis ¬ not sign
+ addition − subtraction
* multiplication / division
The following is an example of a statement without parameters.
Statement Without Parameters

──COMMAND─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
You must write:
COMMAND
xxvi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line (the main path of the diagram)
as the command or statement. The parameters must be separated by one or more
blanks.
Statement With Required Parameters

──COMMAND──PARM1──PARM2───────────────────────────────────────
You must write:
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2
Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included.
Delimiters Around Parameters

──COMMAND──(PARM1)──PARM2='variable'──────────────────────────
If the word “variable” is a valid entry, you must write:
COMMAND (PARM1) PARM2='variable'
Where you see a vertical list of parameters as shown in the following example, you
must choose one of the parameters. This indicates that one entry is required and only
one of the displayed parameters is allowed in the statement.
Choice of Required Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─PARM1─┬──────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM2─┤
└─PARM3─┘
You can choose one of the parameters from the vertical list, such as in the following
examples:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2
COMMAND PARM3
A single optional parameter appears below the horizontal line that marks the main
path. When a required parameter in a syntax diagram has a default value, it indicates
the value for the parameter if the command is not specified. If you specify the
command, you must code the parameter and specify one of the displayed values.
Default Value for a Required Parameter

┌─YES─┐
──COMMAND──PARM1=─┴─NO──┴───PARM2─────────────────────────────
If you specify the command, you must write one of the following:
About This Guide xxvii

COMMAND PARM1=NO PARM2
COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2
Optional Parameter
──COMMAND──┬───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─PARAMETER─┘
You can choose (or not) to use the optional parameter, as shown in the following
examples:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARAMETER
If you have a choice of more than one optional parameter, the parameters appear in a
vertical list below the main path.
Choice of Optional Parameters

──COMMAND──┬───────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM1─┤
└─PARM2─┘
You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, or you can write the
statement without an optional parameter, such as in the following examples:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2
For some statements, you can specify a single parameter more than once. A repeat
symbol (a backward-pointing arrow above the main horizontal line) indicates that you
can specify multiple parameters. The following examples include the repeat symbol.
Repeatable Variable Parameter

┌──
──────────┐
!─variable─┴───────────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND───
In the above example, the word “variable” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is a
value you supply, but it is also on the main path, which means that you are required to
specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify a
parameter more than once. Assume that you have three values named VALUEX,
VALUEY, and VALUEZ for the variable. Some of your choices are:
COMMAND VALUEX
COMMAND VALUEX VALUEY
COMMAND VALUEX VALUEX VALUEZ
xxviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

If the repeat symbol contains punctuation such as a comma, you must separate
multiple parameters with the punctuation. The following example includes the repeat
symbol, a comma, and parentheses.
Separator with Repeatable Variable and Delimiter

┌─,────────┐
!─variable─┴──)─────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND──(───
In the above example, the word “variable” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is a
value you supply. It is also on the main path, which means that you must specify at
least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify more than one
variable and that you must separate the entries with commas. The parentheses indicate
that the group of entries must be enclosed within parentheses. Assume that you have
three values named VALUEA, VALUEB, and VALUEC for the variable. Some of
your choices are:
COMMAND (VALUEC)
COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEC)
COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEA)
COMMAND (VALUEA,VALUEB,VALUEC)
The following example shows a list of parameters with the repeat symbol.
Optional Repeatable Parameters

┌──
─────────┐ ┌──
─────────┐ ┌──
─────────┐
!┬───────┬┴───
──COMMAND─── !┬───────┬┴───
!┬───────┬┴──────────────
└─PARM1─┘ └─PARM2─┘ └─PARM3─┘
Some choices you can make include:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 PARM3
COMMAND PARM1 PARM1 PARM3
When a parameter in a syntax diagram is above the line, for example, YES in the
following diagram, its special treatment indicates it is the default value for the
parameter. If you do not include the parameter when you write the statement, the
result is the same as if you had actually specified the parameter with the default value.
Default Value for a Parameter

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────┬──PARM2─────────────────────────
│ ┌─YES─┐ │
└─PARM1=─┴─NO──┴──┘
Because YES is the default in the example above, if you write:
COMMAND PARM2
About This Guide xxix

you have written the equivalent of:
COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2
In some syntax diagrams, a set of several parameters is represented by a single

reference, as in this example:
Variables Representing Several Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────────┬────────────────────────────
├─PARM1───────────────┤
└─┤ parameter-block ├─┘
parameter-block:
├──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─PARM2────────────┤
└─PARM3─┬───────┬──┘
├─PARM4─┤
└─PARM5─┘
The “parameter-block” can be displayed in a separate syntax diagram.
Choices you can make from this syntax diagram therefore include (but are not limited
to) the following:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM3
COMMAND PARM3 PARM4
Note: Before you can specify PARM4 or PARM5 in this command, you must specify
PARM3.
A note in a syntax diagram is similar to a footnote except that the note appears at the
bottom of the diagram box.
──COMMAND──┬─────────┬────────────────────────────────────────
(1)
└─PARM1─── ┘
Note:
1 This is a note about the item.
xxx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part I. Getting Started (General Information)
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 The System Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Chapter 1. Introduction
CA-Roscoe is an online program development system that you can use to perform
tasks such as:
■ Entering and editing data,
■ Saving the data in the CA-Roscoe library or an OS data set for later use,
■ Submitting the data as a jobstream for background execution,
■ Viewing the files comprising a job, and
■ Browsing and maintaining OS data sets.
CA-Roscoe can be used at any 3270-type terminal (such as the IBM 3278 or 3290)
and at typewriter devices (such as the IBM 3767 or any device that operates in a
manner similar to a teletype terminal).
The sample screen displays used in this manual assume that you are using a 3270-type
terminal. While the content of the displays is accurate, the width of the displays has
been modified so that they will fit within the margins of this manual.
If you are using a typewriter device, refer to Appendix A for additional information
about using that device with CA-Roscoe.
Chapter 1. Introduction 1-1

1-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components
This chapter describes:

■ The types of commands supported by CA-Roscoe (line commands and primary
commands).
■ Conventions for using CA-Roscoe commands. This includes:
– Using reserved characters.
– Using reserved words.
– Using a string operand with a command (like how the string may be specified
and, if necessary, what characters to use as string delimiters).
– The execution hierarchy used to evaluate commands.
– How to correct invalid and incomplete commands.
– How to redisplay previously executed commands.
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-1

2.1 Command Types
2.1 Command Types

CA-Roscoe supports both primary commands and line commands.
Primary Commands Entered in the Command Area of the screen. Monitor
commands and RPF program names are also entered in the
Command Area.
Line Commands Entered in the sequence number field of the Execution Area to
modify the contents of the active AWS. To use line
commands, the screen display format must have an
unprotected sequence number field. You can establish this
format by changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen
or by entering:
SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX
If you use line commands frequently, you may want to add
this command to your sign-on program.
The following example shows a screen where SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX is in
effect. Here, primary and line commands are used together. When the ENTER key is
pressed, a line for data entry will be inserted after line 3600, and then all occurrences
of PRT will be changed to PART.
SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX Display Format
7 EDIT /PRT/PART/
8
>
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
==34== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
==35== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED
I=36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
==37== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
==38== =5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X.
==39== =5 FILLER PIC X(9).
2.1.1 Primary Commands

You can enter one or more primary commands on each line of the Command Area.
When entering multiple commands on a line, you must remember that:
1. Each command must be complete within the line (for example, commands cannot
be continued).
2. When multiple commands are typed on a line, they must be separated by a
command delimiter. The default delimiter is usually the ampersand (&). The
following illustrates how the ampersand is used to separate commands on a line.

2.1 Command Types
Using the Command Delimiter
7 RENUMBER & UPDATE INVLIST_

8
>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P ==============
===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
2.1.2 Line Commands

You may enter one line command in any of the lines comprising the sequence number
field. Note that at the top and bottom of an AWS, the sequence number field contains
'......'. These periods are unprotected, and allow you to enter a line command before the
first line of that AWS or after the last line of that AWS.
Line commands can have numeric or string operands.

■ A numeric operand is entered with the command in the sequence number field. It
indicates the number of times an operation is to occur (for example, D3, in the
following example deletes lines 3400 through 3600).
■ A string operand is entered in the data portion of the line containing the
command. It must always be delimited. When the command is executed, the
original data are restored. (INCL, in the following example displays every
occurrence of the string DIVISION, from line 3700 through the end of that AWS.)
Placement of Line Command Operands
7 8
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
D3 4== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
==36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
INCL== /DIVISION/TORY-REPORT-LINE.
When using a string operand, the line command can be placed anywhere within the
sequence number field.

2.1 Command Types
When using a numeric operand, the following evaluation hierarchy is performed:

■ If all or part of the sequence number field following the command is deleted, the
command is interpreted as entered. (See lines 200 and 300 in the following
example.)
■ If the sequence number field following the command is not deleted, the position
of the cursor affects command interpretation.
– If the cursor is in the sequence number field, all numeric values up to the
cursor are treated as part of the command. (See lines 500 and 600 in the
following example.)
– If the cursor is in the first displayed position within the data portion of the
line, all numeric values following the command within the sequence number
field are treated as part of the command. (See lines 800 and 900 in the
following example.)
– If the cursor is in any other position within the data portion of the line, only
those numeric values that differ from those originally displayed in the
sequence number field are treated as part of the command. (See lines 1100
and 1200 in the following example.)
The first two examples shown below indicate how the deletion of all or part of the
sequence number field following a line command eliminates the concern about cursor
positioning. The remaining examples show how the cursor position can affect
command interpretation.
Using Line Commands With Numeric Operands
7 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
8
...... ============================= T O P =================
===1==
D2_ Cmd is D2; 2 lines deleted
==D3 = _ Cmd is D3; 3 lines deleted
===4==
D5=5== Cmd is D5; 5 lines deleted (cursor after
D5=6== Cmd is D5; 5= lines deleted (cursor one
===7== forward from cmd)
===8D9 _ Cmd is D9; 9 lines deleted
==D9== _ Cmd is D9; 9== lines deleted
==1===
=D11== _ Cmd is D; 1 line deleted
D212== _ Cmd is D2; 1 line deleted

2.2 Command Conventions

This section describes the characters that can be used in CA-Roscoe commands. It
also discusses how to:
■ Use the special CA-Roscoe reserved characters.
■ Use CA-Roscoe reserved words.
■ Specify a string operand with a command.
The characters that may be used in CA-Roscoe commands fall into the categories
shown in the following table.
Type Characters Included

Alphabetic Uppercase and lowercase character plus the national
currency symbols. (See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character
Recognition.”)
Numeric 0-9
Special All characters appearing on a standard terminal keyboard,
except the alphabetic and numeric characters and the
comma, asterisk and space.
Binary All EBCDIC bit combinations that cannot be entered from a
standard keyboard.
Separator Space. A space is used to separate a command from its first
operand and to separate operands from each other.
Reserved Double comma (,,), asterisk (*), minus sign (-) and the plus
sign (+). (See the next section, 2.2.1, “Using Reserved
Characters.”)
2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters

This section describes the special functions provided by the reserved characters ,,
(double comma), * (asterisk), - (minus sign) and + (plus sign).
2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,)
The double comma can be used in a command to represent the last line of the active
AWS, library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. For
example, to display line 500 through the end of the active AWS, you would enter:
ATTACH 5== ,,

To copy lines 800 through the end of the library member INVLIST to the bottom of
the active AWS, you would enter:
COPY INVLIST 8== ,, B
2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*)
The asterisk can be used to indicate:

■ The name of the last fetched, saved or updated library member. For example, to
update the contents of the last fetched member, you would enter:
UPDATE Q
■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned in an AWS, library member
or attached job output file. For example, to display the contents of the active AWS
beginning with the line at which the pointer is currently positioned, enter:
ATTACH Q ,,
■ The last display of attached data when used with the keywords AWS, JOB or LIB.
For example, if you have been viewing job output, you can reattach the active
AWS and begin the display with the last displayed screen by entering:
ATTACH AWS Q
■ Command deferral. Any primary command, Monitor command, or RPF program

that follows an asterisk is not executed until the asterisk is deleted. For example,
assume you want to copy lines 500 through 800 to a specific location within the
active AWS, but you do not know the line number of that location. By preceding
the command with an asterisk, as in:
Q COPY 5== 8==
you can type the line numbers you know and then scroll through the active AWS
to determine the destination line number. The command preceded by the asterisk
and any subsequent commands will not be executed until you remove the asterisk.
2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-)
Use the minus sign to reexecute the last executed primary command, Monitor
command or RPF program. For example, if you have just issued the command
DISPLAY ROS+ to see the status of all jobs whose names begin with ROS, enter:
to reexecute the same command.

2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+)
Use the plus sign to redisplay one or more previously executed primary commands,
Monitor commands, or RPF program names. For example, assume the last command
you executed was:
ATTACH DSN ROSCOE.TEST(SOURCE1)
To redisplay this command so that you can modify it, all you need enter is:
+
Optionally, you may include a number with the + to specify which previously executed
command you want displayed. For additional information about using the plus sign,
see the section, 2.5, “Displaying Previously Executed Commands” on page 2-13.
2.2.2 Using String Operands

Many of the CA-Roscoe primary and line commands have string operands. The
notation conventions show this operand as:
charstr Any sequence of printable entities specified in character format, or
string Any sequence of entities specified in either character format or its
hexadecimal representation.
If the syntax of a command shows the operand as either /charstr/ or /string/, it must be
bound by a special character that delimits the operand.

2.2.2.1 String Delimiters
The special character used to delimit the operand and the special character used as the
command delimiter cannot be used within the string.
For consistency, the CA-Roscoe documentation uses the slash (/) as a string delimiter.
Other valid characters include:
| vertical bar
'%' percent sign
¬ logical not - if not used as the default tab character
& ampersand - if not used as the default command delimiter
( left parentheses
) right parentheses
_ underscore
- dash or minus sign
+ plus sign
= equal sign
! exclamation point
¢ cent sign
: colon
' '
semi-colon
" quotation mark
' apostrophe
} right brace
{ left brace
? question mark
< less than sign
> greater than sign
. period

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy
2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy

When the ENTER key is pressed, the Execution Area is examined first.
■ If line commands have not been entered, all changes made to the data displayed in
the Execution Area are recorded.
■ If line commands have been entered, they are validated. If any error is
encountered, execution halts until the error is corrected, no changes made to the
displayed data are recorded and no line or primary commands are executed.
If the line commands are all valid, changes made to the displayed data are
recorded and the line commands are executed.
The contents of the Command Area is then examined.
As each word is encountered, it is evaluated according to the hierarchy shown in the

following example.
Primary Command Evaluation Hierarchy
7 8
--<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH A PRIMARY COMMAND OR COMMAND ->--
| NO ABBREVIATION? YES |
| |
|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE FIRST THREE CHARACTERS -->-|
| NO OF A MONITOR COMMAND NAME? YES |
| |
|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-|
| NO USER'S LIBRARY? YES |
| |
|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-|
| NO SITE/USER EXECUTION LIBRARY? YES |
| |
ß ß
DISPLAY EXECUTE
ERROR MESSAGE
U V
Note: If you press a PF/PA key instead of the ENTER key, the PF/PA key is
evaluated before any other action is taken. See Chapter 11,
“Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys” for additional information.

2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands

This section describes how to handle erroneous line commands and primary
commands. Notice that the following example contains an invalid line command (like
INCX) and an incomplete primary command (like FETCH with no member name).
Invalid/Incomplete Commands
7 FETCH & ATTACH

8
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.
DD=3==
DD=4==
INCX /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH/
2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands
Line commands are evaluated before primary commands. Also, all line commands are
evaluated before any is executed. If one or more errors are found, a message is
displayed in the data portion of the affected line(s) and halts processing. No changes
to the data are applied; no line commands are executed; no primary commands are
executed. The following example illustrates the type of message displayed when an
invalid command is encountered.
Invalid Line Command Message
7 FETCH & ATTACH

8
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
DD=3==
DD=4==
INCX <<< ATX!1 INVALID COMMAND >>>
-
To correct a line command, you can:

1. Overtype it with a valid command. (In the previous figure, you could overtype
INCX with INCL.)
When the ENTER key is pressed, any changes made to the displayed data are
recorded and the line commands are executed.

2. Blank out the sequence number field using the DELETE key, the ERASE EOF
key or the space bar.
When the ENTER key is pressed, the line containing the error is restored, changes
made to the displayed data are recorded and any other line commands are
executed.
3. Use the RESET line command.
RESET causes all outstanding line commands (both valid and invalid) and all
changes made to the currently displayed data to be ignored.
2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands
After evaluating and executing any line commands that may have been entered, each
primary command is evaluated before it is executed. If no errors are found, the
commands are executed in the order in which they are encountered.
If an invalid or incomplete command is found, the command containing the error and
any subsequent commands are not executed. As illustrated in the following example a
message is displayed and the cursor is positioned to the beginning of the command in
error. (Valid commands preceding the command in error are executed, and are no
longer displayed.)
Sample Incomplete Primary Command
7 FETCH & ATTACH

8
> CMD13 INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF OPERANDS SPECIFIED
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
You can now correct that command. You can also add, delete or change any command
that is displayed. You can even insert commands ahead of the corrected command.
When you press the ENTER key, the commands are executed.
2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment
If a PF/PA key assignment is invalid, the commands comprising the assignment, plus
any others entered in the Command Area, are displayed. For example, if PF1 is
assigned:
SET DISPLAY XXX
that command is displayed when you press PF1. (A message explaining the error is
displayed on the Response Line.)

To continue execution, you can correct the displayed command and press the ENTER
key. (You should correct the PF key assignment as soon as possible.)
Note that if the length of the unexecuted commands exceeds the length of a line in the
Command Area and the Command Area is comprised of:
■ One Line: unexecuted commands that do not fit on that line are truncated.
■ Two or Three Lines: unexecuted commands that do not fit on the first line are
displayed on the second and subsequent lines.
2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays
Some CA-Roscoe commands write confirmation messages (like SUBMIT) or display

information (like ATTACH). When one of these commands is encountered in a series
of commands, execution halts when that command is executed.
To execute any remaining commands, press the ENTER key again.

2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands

You can display a list of the most recently executed commands by issuing the
command:
STATUS COMMAND
For example, assume that you have just executed the following series of commands:
IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1)
RENUMBER 1= 1=
SAVE WIDGET
EDIT /AAA/BBB/
UPDATE Q
The following example illustrates the display that might be produced if you now
entered the command STATUS COMMAND.
STATUS COMMAND: Sample Display
7 _
8
>
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
COMMAND BUFFER IS 256 BYTES AND CONTAINS 8 COMMANDS
1 STATUS COMMAND
2 UPDATE Q
3 EDIT /AAA/BBB/
4 SAVE WIDGET
5 RENUMBER 1= 1=
6 IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1)
7 rpf-program-name
8 EXEC pfx.rpf-program-name
U V
The executed commands are stored in a command buffer. (The size of the buffer is
defined by site management.) When the contents of the buffer are displayed, it begins
with the most recently executed command (like STATUS COMMAND), and includes
all of the commands that are currently stored within the buffer area.
This list of commands is useful when, for example, you want to redisplay or reexecute
a previously executed command.
To redisplay:
■ The last executed primary command, Monitor command, or RPF program:
Use the plus sign (+), as in:

You then have the option of modifying or reexecuting the command by entering
the minus sign (-). (See 2.2.1, “Using Reserved Characters” on page 2-5 for
additional information.) For example, if the last executed command was SUBMIT
ABC, you can use the plus sign to redisplay the command, modify it and then
press the ENTER key to submit another job.
■ A series of commands: repeatedly execute the + to scroll back through the
previous commands.
■ A specific command:
Specify a value with the +, where the value is the relative number of the
previously executed command.
If you do not remember the position of the command in a command series, enter
STATUS COMMAND to display a list of the most recently executed commands.
Using the series of commands shown in the previous figure, you can redisplay the
IMPORT command by entering:
+6
Optionally, you can display a maximum of three previously executed commands,
as in:
+6,3

2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands
| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands

| Optionally, you can indicate to CA-Roscoe to save or not save the command in the
| command recall buffer if the command is equal to the previous command. This option
| called "DUPCR" can be set as a system wide variable and defaults that duplicate
| commands will always be saved.
| Users can designate that duplicate commands not be saved by entering:

| SET DUPCR NO
| To save duplicate commands, enter:

| SET DUPCR YES

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition
This chapter describes how to:

■ Change the language character set you are using.
■ Control uppercase/lowercase character recognition and treatment.
■ Control the translation of non-displayable characters.
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set
3.1 Defining the Language Character Set

As distributed, it is assumed that you will be entering, editing and displaying data that
conforms to the U.S. English character set. (U.S. English characters include uppercase
A through Z, lowercase a through z, plus the symbols @, # and $.)
If the terminals at your site support a different language character set, your site
management will have established that language character set as the default.
If your site management has designated that multiple character sets may be used, you
will be told which ones are supported. To change from one character set to another,
you can use either:
■ The SET CHARSET command, or
■ The modifiable displays provided by the STATUS SESSION and STATUS AWS
commands.

3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment
3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment

You can use the SET MODE command or the modifiable screen provided by the
STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command to define how CA-Roscoe is to
recognize and translate:
■ Data that you enter or edit in an AWS.
■ Character strings specified with commands such as EDIT, FIRST, INCL, and so
on.
3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data

To control character translation, you can set the mode to:
BASIC All alphabetic data that you enter or edit will be translated to
uppercase characters. This is normally the default when you sign
on.
XTENDED All alphabetic data that you enter or edit will be retained exactly as
you entered it (it can contain a combination of uppercase and
lowercase characters).
STANDARD Resets the translation mode to your company's default.
Data that is in an AWS may be retranslated using a variety of primary or line

commands. See Chapter 19, “AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS” for additional
information.
3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands

The current translation mode setting also affects how characters strings specified with
CA-Roscoe commands are treated. For example, if you enter the command:
first division
and the current setting is:

■ BASIC - the string is treated as though it was entered in all uppercase characters
(the search is for the first occurrence of the string DIVISION).
■ XTENDED - the string is not translated (the search is for the string division).
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-3

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation
3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

You can also use the SET MODE command to define how CA-Roscoe is to translate
non-displayable characters.
By default, non-displayable characters are translated to blanks when data on the same
line is typed or changed. To control this translation, you can set the mode to:
NOPRESERVE Non-displayable characters will be translated to blanks when
other data on the same line is typed. This is the default when
you sign on.
PRESERVE Non-displayable characters will not be translated to blanks when
other data on the same line is typed.

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries
This chapter describes how you can change column boundaries for:
■ The execution of a single command, or
■ The remainder of your terminal session. When you alter the boundaries for your
session, you can use:
– The modifiable displays provided by the STATUS DISPLAY command and
STATUS AWS commands, or
– The SET BOUNDS primary command, or
– The BOUNDS line command, when an AWS is attached.
By default, the operation of primary and line commands that edit, locate or shift data
extends the full width of the line. Thus, if you enter:
FIRST PROCEDURE
the full width of every line is searched until either: 1) the string is found, or 2) the
end of the data or the search limit is reached.
Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries
4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries

You can change the default boundaries for the execution of a single primary command.
To do so, specify the appropriate column numbers with the command. For example,
FIRST 2= 3= FILLER
displays the first occurrence of FILLER within columns 20 through 30 of the currently
attached data. After the command is executed, the previously established or default
boundaries are reestablished.
Note: Once a character string has been specified with the commands EXCL, FIRST,
INCL, LAST, NEXT and PREV, the string is remembered until you change it.
For example, if you issued the command:
FIRST FILLER
and you now want to find the next occurrence of the same string within
columns 50 through 70, all you need enter is:
NEXT 5= 7=
The display will begin with the next line containing

FILLER
within columns 50 and 70 and the previously established or default boundaries

are reestablished.

4.2 Setting Session Boundaries

To change column boundaries for your terminal session, you can use:
■ The modifiable display produced by the STATUS DISPLAY command,
■ The SET BOUNDS command or
■ The BOUNDS line command (when an AWS is attached).
Once set, they will remain in effect until you change them or end your session.
4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS

Both STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS provide modifiable screens which can
be used to change column boundaries.
4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY
The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display formats
used when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library member is
attached.
To change a column boundary, position the cursor to the appropriate LEFT BOUNDS
or RIGHT BOUNDS field. Then, overtype the displayed value with the appropriate
column number.
For example, suppose the boundary settings for the active AWS are 10 and 72. To
changes these values to 1 and 80, respectively, type 1 in the LEFT BOUNDS field,
and then position the cursor to the RIGHT BOUNDS field and type 80 there. (When
STATUS DISPLAY is issued, the cursor is automatically placed in the LEFT
BOUNDS field for AWS.) The next time you attach the contents of the active AWS,
your column boundaries will be set to 1 and 80.
4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS
When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command to
display information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are using. In
addition to the current display format information, this modifiable display provides
information about all attributes associated with the AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS:
Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.

4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command

To change column boundaries:
■ For the currently attached data:
Enter the SET BOUNDS command with the appropriate left and right column
boundary values, as in:
SET BOUNDS 5= 8=
In this example, the action of subsequent commands that edit, locate and shift data
affect only the contents of columns 50 through 80.
■ For a particular type of attached data:
Include the AWS, DSN, JOB, or LIB keyword(s) with the SET BOUNDS
commands. In the following example, the first SET BOUNDS command changes
the boundaries for data in the active AWS or an attached library member; the
second command changes the boundaries for an attached data set object:
SET BOUNDS AWS LIB 1 8=
SET BOUNDS DSN 2== 25=
To reset column boundaries:

■ For the currently attached data, enter:
SET BOUNDS or SET BOUNDS OFF
■ For data that is not currently attached, you must include the appropriate keyword,
as in:
SET BOUNDS LIB OFF
To set or reset the column boundaries for all forms of attached data, use the ALL
keyword with the command, as in:
SET BOUNDS ALL 9= 12= or SET BOUNDS ALL OFF
To illustrate the use of temporary and session boundaries, assume you have attached
an AWS and are currently editing its contents. If you enter the commands:
SET BOUNDS 1= 5= & EDIT /ABC/XYZ/
FILL 1 6 /XXXXXX/ & FIRST AAA
then SET BOUNDS sets the boundaries to columns 10 through 50. EDIT changes
every occurrence of ABC within those columns to XYZ. FILL temporarily overrides
the boundaries so that the string XXXXXX can be placed in columns 1 through 6.
Finally, FIRST uses the session boundaries (columns 10 through 50) to locate the first
occurrence of the string AAA.

4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command

When setting column boundaries for the active AWS, you can use the BOUNDS line
command. To do this,
■ Type BOUNDS in the sequence number field of a line.
■ Then place the special characters < and > in the data portion of the same line at
the positions where the boundaries are to be set.
The following example shows how you would set the boundaries to columns 9 and 43,
respectively.
BOUNDS Line Command: Setting Column Boundaries
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
BOUNDS ID<NTIFICATION DIVISION. >
BOUNDS Line Command: Resulting Column Boundaries
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4..>.+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
When positioning the characters < and >:

■ If the desired location contains data, overtype the character with the appropriate
special character. The character will be redisplayed when the command is
executed.
■ If no data appear in the appropriate location (the character is to be placed on a
blank line or after the last character of a line containing data), use the space bar to
position to the appropriate location. (The data in the Execution Area is evaluated
prior to the execution of any line command and null spaces are deleted.)
The Scale Line in the previous example reflects the designated column boundary
locations (the < and > are displayed in the appropriate positions on the Scale Line).
When the display is invoked by SET DISPLAY NUMX, the Scale Line always reflects
the column boundaries, whether they are set by the SET BOUNDS primary command
or the BOUNDS line command.

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format
This chapter describes how you can change:

■ The display margins either temporarily or for the terminal session.
■ The sequence number display.
■ The format in which the data are displayed (for example, character format only, or
character and its hexadecimal representation).
Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format
5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format

You can use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable screen provided by the
STATUS DISPLAY command to perform any of these changes. (When working with
one or more AWSs, you can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS
AWS command.)
When using the SET DISPLAY command, you can include one or more changes with
the command. For example, you could enter:
SET DISPLAY 1= 5= (to change display margins)
SET DISPLAY NUMX (to change sequence number display)
SET DISPLAY CHAR (to change data format display)
or
SET DISPLAY 1= 5= NUMX CHAR
Subsequent sections describe how to change each specific display format component.

5.2 Defining Display Margins

By default, the display margins begin with column one and extend the width of the
terminal screen. You can change these display margins: 1) temporarily, or 2) for the
remainder of your session.
When changing the display margins:

■ The margin values must be between 1 and the maximum line length (for example,
255 for an AWS, library member or job output; the LRECL length for a data set
object).
■ The value of the right margin must be equal to or greater than the value of the left
margin.
The resulting display begins with the right margin and continues until the left margin
or the maximum width of the screen is filled.
5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins

You can temporarily change the display margins by:
1. Pressing the PF key to which the SCROLL RIGHT or SCROLL LEFT function is
assigned, or
2. Replacing either or both of the values in the COLS field on the System
Information Line, where the first value identifies the left margin and the second
field identifies the right margin.
When you specify a new margin setting, leading zeros are not required; if they are
omitted, eliminate the old value so that the field contains only your new margin
setting.
These margins apply only to what is currently attached and remain in effect until the
attachment is changed. For example, if an AWS is currently attached and you press
the PF key to which SCROLL RIGHT is assigned, the new display margins will:
■ Remain in effect while the current AWS contents is displayed.
■ Revert to the previous setting when you:
– Delete or replace the contents of this AWS. The margins revert to the
previously established margins.

– Attach a data set object, job or library member. The margins revert to the: 1)
previous setting if you are reattaching, or 2) default setting if the designated
data was not previously attached.
Note: Operands of the search-related commands (such as FIRST or INCL), allow you
to designate the screen positioning that is to occur when a match is found.
Depending on the positioning requested through the command, your display
margins may change when one of these commands is executed.
5.2.2 Setting Session Margins

You can change the display margins for the remainder of your session by issuing the
SET DISPLAY command or changing the modifiable screen provided by the STATUS
DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.
5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display
Display margins can be changed using the modifiable screen provided by the STATUS
DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.
5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY
The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display formats
used when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library member is
attached.
To change a display margin, position the cursor to the appropriate SET DISPLAY
LEFT or SET DISPLAY RIGHT field. Then, overtype the displayed value with the
appropriate column number.
For example, assume the display margins for the active AWS are 10 and 50. To
change these values to 1 and 72, respectively, type 1 in the SET DISPLAY LEFT field
and type 1; then position the cursor to the SET DISPLAY RIGHT field and type 72.
When you reattach the active AWS, your display margins will be set to 1 and 72.
5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS
When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command display
information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are using. In addition to
the current display format information, this modifiable display provides information
about all attributes associated with the AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS:
Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.

5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command

The SET DISPLAY command can be used to:
■ Change both the left and right margins: Specify two numeric values with the
command, as in:
SET DISPLAY 1= 5=
■ Change only the left display margin: Specify a single numeric value, as in:
SET DISPLAY 1=
The display will begin with column ten and extend the width of the terminal
screen.
■ Change only the right display margin: Specify a numeric value prefixed with a
comma:
SET DISPLAY ,9=
The display will end with column 90 and show as much of the preceding data as
will fit within the width of the line.
■ Reset the display margins to begin with the column 1:
SET DISPLAY
All of the preceding examples affect the data that is currently displayed. To set display
margins for data that is not currently displayed, include the keyword ALL or any
combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB. For example, to set all display
margins to 50 through 80, you would enter:
SET DISPLAY ALL 5= 8=
If you then specified,

SET DISPLAY AWS LIB 7 72
the display margins in effect when you attach the active AWS or a library member
will be set to columns 7 through 72; while the display margins for job output and data
set objects will remain set at columns 50 through 80.

5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display
5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display

You can control the display of sequence numbers using:
■ The modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS
command.
■ The SET DISPLAY command.
In all cases, specify the keywords NUM, NUMX, NONUM and NUM2, with:
NUM Each line begins with a six digit protected sequence number field
that is followed by data.
NUMX Each line begins with a six digit unprotected sequence number field
that is followed by data. NUMX must be in effect if you want to
use line commands to edit the contents of the active AWS.
NONUM Each line contains only data; no sequence numbers are displayed.
NUM2 Two lines are displayed for each data line. The first line contains
the six digit protected sequence number field; the second line
contains only data.
Notes:
■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF key,
you can bounce the display between sequence number display settings. For
example, if you assign PF2 the value:
LET PF2 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP NONUM NUMX'
The display format will change every time you press PF2.
■ You can use ALL or any combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB and LIB
to qualify the scope of the SET DISPLAY command. For example, to enable the
use of line commands when editing the active AWS and to prohibit the display of
sequence numbers with all other forms of attached data, you would enter:
SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX DSN JOB LIB NONUM
Since the display margins and data display operands are not included with these
commands, those that are currently in effect will remain unchanged.

5.4 Defining Data Display

By default, data are displayed in its character format. If the data contain non-printable
characters, they are not displayed.
You can change the data display format to have the data displayed in both its character
format and its hexadecimal representation by:
■ Changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS screen by
overtyping the appropriate field with either CHAR or HEX.
■ Specifying the HEX or CHAR operand with the SET DISPLAY command.
The following example illustrates the display before issuing the SET DISPLAY HEX
command.
Character Display
7 SET DISPLAY HEX_

8
>
> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ============================= T O P ===============
===1== HOWARD THOMAS W
===2== SMITHSON SALLY S
===3== WALTERS JOHN
=============================== B O T T O M ==============
The following example illustrates the display that results after issuing the command
SET DISPLAY HEX. (SET DISPLAY CHAR returns the data to character format.)
Character and Hex Display
7 >
8
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ============================= T O P ===============
===1== HOWARD THOMAS W
4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4!
=866194=======386412====6=1
---------------------------------------------------
===2== SMITHSOM SALLY S
4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4!
=24938265=====21338=====2=2
---------------------------------------------------
===3== WALTERS JOHN
4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444!
=6133592======1685======!=1
---------------------------------------------------

The highlighted areas in the previous example indicate the hexadecimal representation
of the data shown in the upper screen. Notice that columns 27 and 29 contain data
that is not displayable or modifiable in its character format.
When data are displayed in HEX format, the resulting data are:
■ Modifiable when displaying the contents of the active AWS. You can modify:
– Printable characters on the character line. (Non-printable characters are
shown as blanks, which are not modifiable.)
To ensure your changes are properly applied, no character translation occurs
when SET DISPLAY HEX is in effect. This means that even if you have
specified SET MODE BASIC, lowercase characters will not be translated to
uppercase characters.
– Hexadecimal representation on the two vertical hexadecimal lines. These
lines are always modifiable.
Since there can be no confusion about the hexadecimal representation of a
character, lowercase characters are translated to uppercase when SET MODE
BASIC is in effect.
■ Not modifiable when a library member, job output file or data set object is
displayed.
Notes:
■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF key,
you can bounce the display between its character and hexadecimal formats. For
example, if you assign PF1 the value:
LET PF1 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP CHAR'
The display format will change every time you press PF1.
■ As with the other forms of SET DISPLAY, you can use the ALL, AWS, DSN,
JOB and LIB keywords to qualify the scope of the command. These operands are
useful when you want to designate the data display format for data that is not
currently attached.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information
This chapter describes how you can:

■ Display and change screen display and column boundary settings.
■ Display and change session attributes.
■ Display site-specified system attributes.
■ Display the current time and date.
At any time during your session, you can display information about the attributes that
are currently in effect. For example, to display the current column search boundaries
and display margins, you would enter:
STATUS DISPLAY
You can change most of the session attributes using either modifiable displays or
primary commands. (The section, 6.5, “Synopsis of Session Attributes” on page 6-15
contains a list of the primary commands, associated STATUS displays and a brief
description of the attributes affected.)
Changing these attributes allows you to customize your session to meet your own
unique needs. If you find that you always want certain attributes to be in effect, you
can include the appropriate primary commands in a sign-on program. (A sign-on
program is executed every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe or split the screen. See
Chapter 10, “Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe” for additional information.)
Note: For information about displaying and changing AWS attributes, see
Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information.”
Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings

To see information about the display formats and column boundaries that are currently
in effect, enter the command:
STATUS DISPLAY
This display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, include the LIST

operand with the command, as in:
STATUS DISPLAY LIST
The following example illustrates the type of information provided by STATUS

DISPLAY.
STATUS DISPLAY Command: Sample Display
7 >
8
> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 A<name>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
ROSCOE BOUNDS/DISPLAY STATUS
SET CURRENT
BOUNDS DISPLAY DISPLAY
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
AWS: 1 8= 1 72 1 72 NUMX CHAR CJUST
LIB: 1 8= 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST
JOB: 1 255 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST
DSN: 1 32767 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST
MODE ===> BASIC CURSOR ===> INIT
U V
Note: STATUS DISPLAY provides information about the active AWS. When
working with one or more AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command to display
and change the display formats and column boundaries or all existing AWSs.
See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on
page 17-1 for additional information.
See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for information.

BOUNDS Contains: Current or default left and right column boundary settings
to be used by any command that locates, edits or shifts data.
Change: Overtype field BOUNDS LEFT or RIGHT with
appropriate column number; use SET BOUNDS command. (If an
AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command or BOUNDS line
command may be used.) See Chapter 4, “Defining Column
Boundaries” for information.
SET DISPLAY Contains: Left and right display margins established by default, the
last executed SET DISPLAY command, or the last change to this
display.
Change: Overtype SET DISPLAY LEFT or RIGHT with
appropriate column number(s); use SET DISPLAY command. (If an
AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)
CURRENT DISPLAY
Contains: Left and right display margins temporarily set by the last
command locating data outside of the SET DISPLAY boundaries or
by the values typed in the COLS field.
Change: This field is not modifiable.
num Contains: Current or default sequence number display setting.
Change: Overtype field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or NONUM;
use SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, the
STATUS AWS command can be used.)
char Contains: Current or default data display mode.
Change: Overtype field with CHAR or HEX; use SET DISPLAY
command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can
be used.)
cjust Contains: Current or default screen positioning to occur as a result
of executing a FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL, or EXCL
primary command.
Change: Overtype field with CENTERED, LOCKED, JUSTIFIED
or CJUSTIFIED; use SET SEARCH command. (If an AWS is
attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)
MODE Contains: Current or default character translation mode.
Change: Overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or STANDARD;
use SET MODE command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS
AWS command can be used.)
CURSOR Contains: Current or default location at which the cursor is
positioned after a command is executed.
Change: Overtype field with HOME, INIT or DATA; use SET
CURSOR command.

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

To display information about your terminal session, enter the command:
STATUS SESSION
To begin the display with the line containing a specific attribute, include the first one
to four characters of the field name. For example, to begin the display with the line
containing DATE FMT, you could enter:
STATUS SESSION D or
STATUS SESSION DA or
STATUS SESSION DAT or
STATUS SESSION DATE
You can reposition the display by:

■ Using PF keys to scroll the display forward or backward.
■ Placing the cursor at the line containing the desired field and pressing the PF key
assigned to forward or backward scrolling. (To do this, the SCRL field on the
System Information Line must be set to CSR.) The resulting display begins with
the line at which the cursor was positioned.
Finally, you can produce a non-modifiable display by including the LIST operand with
the command, as in:
STATUS SESSION LIST
Unless noted otherwise, an attribute shown in the modifiable display can be changed
using the appropriate SET command or by overtyping the field. (Note that some of the
attributes have site-defined default and maximum values. To display these values, use
the STATUS SYSTEM command.)

The following example illustrates the type of information provided by the STATUS
SESSION command at a 43-line terminal.
STATUS SESSION Command Display
|
7 > APPLID(A=4IROS3) USER(PH,DORDA=2) L PENDING
8
| > AWS(PH.DUPCR) SCRL CSR COLS ====1 ===79 PAU(PH.RAMB) A<AMB>3
| >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7..
| ROSCOE SESSION STATUS
| ATTACH ==> PAUSE

| AUTOFF ==> 24= ON AUTOINDENT ==> OFF
| AUTOINSERT ==> 1 OFF AWS TRANS ==> N
| CHAR SET ==> US ENGLISH CHAR TRANS ==> B
| CMD LINE ==> 3 1 COPYDEST ==> (NONE)
| CURREC ==> N/A DATE FMT ==> AMERICAN SHORT
| DELIMITER ==> & DSNCMLSTL ==> ERROR
| DSNCNT ==> 1===== DSNEMPTY ==> OFF
| DSNRECALL ==> NONE DUPCR ==> YES
| EDITCHNG ==> OFF ESCAPE ==> ..
| EXECPFX ==> DFLT HELPPFX ==> DFLT DFLT
| JOBCNT ==> 1====
| LANGUAGE ==> ENGLISH
| MASTER ==> NONE
| MAXREC ==> NONE MONLEVEL ==> ERROR
| MONTRAP ==> ON MSGLEVEL ==> INFO
| PFKDELIM ==> / RPSDEST ==> USPRNCPK
| RPSNOTIFY ==> OFF SAVE ATTR ==> SHARED
| SEARCH ==> NODBCS SEA MODE ==> NOMIX
| SEND ==> ALL SIGNON ==> PH.SIGX
| SPLIT ==> CSR STATS ==> ON
| STMTCNT ==> 4=96 SUBMIT ==> 8= INC SEQ
| TLOCK ==> 3= OFF LOGOFF WRITECNT ==> 5=
| U V
ATTACH Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
execution is to pause after an ATTACH command is executed.
Change: Overtype field with PAUSE or NOPAUSE; use SET
ATTACH command.
AUTOFF Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the current
number of minutes of inactivity that is allowed before the
terminal is automatically signed off, and the second field
shows the status of the automatic sign-off facility.
Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value not
exceeding your site maximum and the second field with ON or
OFF; use SET AUTOFF command. (STATUS SYSTEM
shows the default and maximum values.)

AUTOINDENT Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether the

cursor is to be automatically positioned under the first
character of the preceding data line when lines are inserted
through the INPUT primary command, the I or IB line
command or the PF key to which the INPUT function is
assigned.
Change: Overtype the field with ON or OFF; use SET
AUTOINDENT command.
AUTOINSERT Contains: Current or default setting indicating the number of
data entry lines to be inserted when all data entry lines
inserted by the I or IB line command have been filled.
Change: When inactive, overtype first field with numeric
value indicating the number of lines to be inserted. When
active, overtype first field with numeric value or OFF.
| AWS TRANS Contains: Current or default setting of the AWS translate
| parameter which determines whether non-displayable
| characters are to be translated to blanks when other data on
| the same line is entered or changed.
| Change: Overtype fields with N, or P; use SET MODE
| PRESERVE.
CHAR SET Contains: Language character code representing the data that
the user can enter and display at the terminal.
Change: Overtype field with a language code defined at your
site; use SET CHARSET command. (If an AWS is attached,
the STATUS AWS command can be used.)
| CHAR TRANS Contains: Current or default setting of the character set
| translate options.
| Change: Overtype field with B(asic), X(tended) or S(tandard);
| use SET MODE B/X command.
CMD LINE Contains: Two fields showing the current or default number
of lines comprising the Command Area in: 1) the current
presentation area, and 2) each presentation area when the
screen is next split.
Change: Overtype field(s) with a numeric value between 1
and 3; use SET CMDLINES command.
COPYDEST Contains: Name of the AWS that is to receive data copied
through :C or (NONE) if no AWS has been designated.
Change: Overtype field with the name of an existing AWS;
use the SET COPYDEST command.
CURREC Contains: Total number of lines that you have saved in the
library, or N/A if you have no library line limit (for example,
MAXREC is NONE).


DATE FMT Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the current
or default format used when dates are displayed at the
terminal, and the second field shows whether the year will be
displayed as two or four digits.
Change: Overtype the first field with AMERICAN,
EUROPEAN or INTERNATIONAL, and the second field with
SHORT or LONG; use SET DATEFORM command.
(STATUS SYSTEM shows the default values).
DELIMITER Contains: Current or default special character used to separate
(for example, delimit) commands when multiple commands
are typed in the Command Area.
Change: Overtype field with any special character or OFF;
use SET command.
DSNCMLST Contains: Current or default setting designating the type of
messages that are to be directed to the member ZZZZZCMP
following COMPRESS requests.
Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SET
DSNCMLST.
DSNCNT Contains: Current or default number of lines to be searched
within an attached data set object.
Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value
indicating the number of lines to be searched; use SET
DSNCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default
and maximum values.)
DSNEMPTY Contains: Current or default setting designating whether the
Data Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets whose DSCB
indicates that they are empty.
Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET
DSNEMPTY command.
DSNRECALL Contains: Current or default setting designating the action to
be taken when an operation is to be performed on data sets
migrated by the IBM program product DFHSM.
Change: Overtype field with WAIT, NOWAIT or NONE; use
SET DSNRECALL command.
| DUPCR Contains: Current or default setting of the retain duplicate
| command option.
| Change: Overtype field with three character field "YES" or
| "NO "; use the SET DUPCR command.
EDITCHNG Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether the
sequence number field of lines affected by an edit operation is
to contain a change indicator.


EDITCHNG command.
ESCAPE Contains: Current or default escape character string used to
exit an application executing under ETSO.
Change: Overtype field with a one- to three-character string;
use SET ESCAPE command.
EXECPFX Contains: Current or default RPF execution library setting(s).
Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE; use
SET EXECPFX command.
HELPPFX Contains: Current or default HELP library setting(s).
Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE; use
SET HELPPFX command.
JOBCNT Contains: Current or default number of lines to be searched
within an attached job output.
Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value not
exceeding your site-defined maximum; use SET JOBCNT
command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and
maximum values.)
LANGUAGE Contains: Language used for displayed messages and HELP
screens.
MASTER Contains: Current or default status of CA-Librarian -INC
statement expansion. It shows NONE if this facility is not
active and no master file is in effect, or ON or OFF and
master file name if this facility is active.
Change: Overtype first field with ON or OFF and second
field with name of CA-Librarian master file (the name may be
changed but not deleted); use SET MASTER command.
MAXREC Contains: Maximum number of lines you may save in the
library, or NONE if there is no limit.
MONLEVEL Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
Monitor command informational messages are to be displayed.
MONLEVEL command.
MONTRAP Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
Monitor command error messages and prompts are to be
displayed.
MONTRAP command.

MSGLEVEL Contains: Current or default setting designating whether

primary command informational messages are to be displayed.
MSGLEVEL command.
PFKDELIM Contains: Default or current special character used to separate
(for example, delimit) commands when multiple commands
are assigned to a PF key.
Change: Overtype field with any special character; use SET
PFKDELIM command.
RPSDEST Contains: Current or default printing location that is to be
used when the PRINT command is issued, or
NO DFLT if no default location is assigned to this
terminal, or
NOT ACT if RPS is not currently active, or
NOT AUTH if this terminal is not authorized to use RPS,
or
NOT AVAL if information cannot be obtained due to site
or RPS restrictions.
Change: Overtype field with any system or 328x-type printer
location; use SET RPSDEST command. (Use the DEST
operand of the PRINT command to change the printing
location for a single execution of the command.)
RPSNOTIFY Contains: Default or current setting designating whether
messages are to be displayed when PRINT requests are
printed.
RPSNOTIFY command.
SAVE ATTR Contains: Current or default access attribute setting used
when you create (for example, SAVE) a library member.
Change: Overtype field with SHARED or RESTRICTED; use
SET SAVEATTR command.
SEARCH Contains: Current or default setting designating the DBCS
format status.
Change: Overtype field with DBCS or NODBCS; use SET
SEARCH command.
| SEA MODE Contains: Current or default setting of the search mode.
| Change: Overtype field with 5-character "MIX " or
| "NOMIX"; use SET MODE MIX/NOMIX command.

SEND Contains: Current or default setting controlling the display of

received SEND messages.
Change: Overtype field with ALL, OPER or NONE; use SET
SEND command.
SIGNON Contains: Current user sign-on RPF.
Change: Overtype field with the correct RPF name.
SPLIT Contains: Current or default split screen setting.
Change: Overtype field with CSR, FULL, or PART; use SET
SPLIT command.
STATS Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether
SPF-type directory information is to be added/updated to the
PDS directory entry for a member.
Change: Overtype field with ON, ASIS or OFF; use SET
STATS command.
STMTCNT Contains: Current or default RPF program loop limit (the
number of RPF statements that can be executed without an
intervening read/write operation).
Change: Overtype field with MAX, RESET or a numeric
value not exceeding 32760; use SET STMTCNT command.
(STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)
SUBMIT Contains: Three fields showing the current or default setting
indicating the: 1) width of the data to be submitted, 2)
expansion of embedded +INC statements, and 3) inclusion of
sequence numbers.
Change: Overtype the first field with CARD, PRT, WIDE or
a numeric value between 8 and 254, the second field with
INCLUDE or NOINCLUDE, and the third field with SEQ or
NOSEQ; use SET SUBMIT command.

TLOCK Contains: Three fields showing: 1) number of minutes of

inactivity allowed before the Terminal Lock screen is
displayed, 2) current or default status of the automatic terminal
lock facility, and 3) whether OFF may be entered from the
Terminal Lock screen.
Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value not
exceeding your site-defined maximum, the second field with
ON or OFF, and the third field with LOGOFF or NOLOG;
use SET TLOCK command. The NOW operand may only be
used with SET TLOCK. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the
default and maximum values.)
WRITECNT Contains: Current or default RPF program terminal write limit
(the number of terminal writes that can be executed without an
intervening read).
Change: Overtype field with numeric value not exceeding
32760; use SET WRITECNT command.

6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values

To produce a non-modifiable display containing site-defined default and maximum
values for specific commands, enter the command:
STATUS SYSTEM
The following example illustrates the resulting display.
STATUS SYSTEM Command: Sample Display
7 _
8
>
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
ROSCOE SYSTEM STATUS
AUTOFF ===> ON AUTTLOCK ===> OFF

AUTOFF DEFAULT ===> 9= AUTTLOCK DEFAULT ===> 5
AUTOFF MAXIMUM ===> 24= AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM ===> 144=
JOBCNT DEFAULT ===> 999999 DSNCNT DEFAULT ===> 1=====

JOBCNT MAXIMUM ===> 999999 DSNCNT MAXIMUM ===> 999999
DATE FORMAT ===> AMERICAN SHORT
STMTCNT DEFAULT ===> 4=96 RCSESCPF ===> PF12

STMTCNT MAXIMUM ===> 3276= RCSESCCH ===> :
U V
AUTOFF Status of the automatic sign-off facility.
AUTOFF DEFAULT Site-defined default time period before the terminal is
signed off.
AUTOFF MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
AUTOFF command.
AUTTLOCK Status of automatic terminal lock facility.
AUTTLOCK DEFAULT Site-defined default time period before the Terminal
Lock screen is displayed.
AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
TLOCK command.

DATE FORMAT Two position field showing:

1. Format for dates displayed at the terminal, and
2. Code indicating the number of digits used to
represent the year.
DSNCNT DEFAULT Site-defined number of lines to be searched within a
data set object if no value is specified with a
search-related command.
DSNCNT MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
DSNCNT command.
JOBCNT DEFAULT Site-defined number of lines to be searched within a job
if no value is specified with a search-related command.
JOBCNT MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
JOBCNT command.
RCSESCCH Site-defined special character used to prefix a
one-character command that is to be used to direct input
to RCS.
RCSESCPF Site-defined PF key that is to be used to indicate direct
input to RCS.
STMTCNT DEFAULT Site-defined default number of RPF statements that can
be executed without an intervening read/write operation.
STMTCNT MAXIMUM The maximum value that can be specified with the SET
STMTCNT command.

6.4 Display Time and Date
6.4 Display Time and Date

At any time during your session you can issue the TIME command. The following
example shows the command itself, and the next example illustrates the information
that is provided by this command.
TIME Command
7 TIME 8
>
> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
============================= T O P =============
=====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION
TIME Command: Sample Display
7 >
8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+..
=9/=6/88 15.3=.27 - ELAPSED =1:29:4= - CPU .34=
The information written to the terminal includes:

■ The current date,
■ The current time,
■ The elapsed time of your session, and
■ The amount of CPU time for for your session.
After viewing this information, you can reattach the data you were working with, or
issue any other CA-Roscoe command.

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes

This table identifies: 1) the primary commands you can use to change your session
attributes, 2) the form of the STATUS command that produces the appropriate
modifiable display, and 3) a brief description of each attribute involved.
Command Status Command Attribute Affected

SET SESSION Special character used as command
delimiter.
SET ATTACH SESSION Pausing of command execution after
an ATTACH command is executed.
SET AUTOFF SESSION Automatic sign-off facility control.
SET SESSION Position of cursor when lines are
AUTOINDENT inserted through the INPUT
command, I or IB line command, or
the PF key assigned to the INPUT
function.
SET SESSION Number of lines to be inserted
AUTOINSERT when lines inserted by I or IB line
command are filled.
SET AWSDSPLY AWS Data protection and highlighting
attributes for active AWS.
SET BOUNDS DISPLAY Default column boundaries to be
and AWS used with commands that edit,
locate and shift data.
SET CHARSET SESSION Language character set representing
and AWS data user can enter and display.
SET CMDLINES SESSION Number of lines comprising the
Command Area of the screen.
SET COPYDEST SESSION Name of the AWS that is to receive
data copied through :C.
SET CURSOR DISPLAY Location at which the cursor is
positioned after a command
executes.
SET DATEFORM SESSION Format of dates displayed at the
terminal.
SET DISPLAY DISPLAY Display format including: 1) display
and AWS margins, 2) sequence number
display and 3) form in which data
are to be displayed.


SET DSNCMLST SESSION Type of messages to be directed to
the library member ZZZZZCMP
when a COMPRESS request is
executed.
SET DSNCNT SESSION Default number of lines to be
searched within a data set object.
SET DSNEMPTY SESSION Data Set Facility attempts to read
data sets whose DSCB indicate they
are empty.
SET SESSION Action to be taken when an
DSNRECALL operation is to be performed on data
sets migrated by IBM DFHSM.
| SET DUPCR SESSION To determine if duplicate
| commands are to be saved in the
| command recall buffer.
SET EDITCHNG SESSION Lines affected by an edit operation
are to be identified.
SET EOF AWS Extent of deletion to occur when
the ERASE EOF key is pressed.
SET ESCAPE SESSION Escape sequence used to exit an
application executing under ETSO.
SET EXECPFX SESSION RPF Execution Libraries.
SET FILL AWS Trailing character to be used with
lines in active AWS.
SET JOBCNT SESSION Default number of lines to be
searched within job output file.
SET MASTER SESSION Expansion of embedded
CA-Librarian -INC statements in
submitted jobs.
SET MODE DISPLAY Character translation mode.
and AWS
SET MONLEVEL SESSION Monitor command information
message display.
SET MONTRAP SESSION Error message and prompts display
issued by Monitor commands
within an RPF program.
SET MSGLEVEL SESSION Primary command informational
message display.


SET PFKDELIM SESSION Special character used to delimit
commands assigned to a PF/PA
key.
SET RPSDEST SESSION Location at which data identified
through the PRINT command is to
print.
SET RPSNOTIFY SESSION Display of notification messages
when a PRINT request completes.
SET SAVEATTR SESSION Default access attribute used when
creating a library member.
SET SCROLL N/A SCRL field setting.
SET SEARCH DISPLAY Screen positioning when FIRST,
and AWS LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or
EXCL are executed. Data in DBCS
format.
SET SEND SESSION Display of received SEND message.
SET STATS SESSION SPF-type directory information to
be added/updated.
SET STMTCNT SESSION RPF program loop limit.
SET SUBMIT SESSION Characteristics of submitted data,
including inclusion of sequence
numbers, expansion of +INC
statements, and width of data.
SET SYSID N/A Display of CA-Roscoe ID.
SET TLOCK SESSION Automatic Terminal Lock facility.
SET USERID N/A Display of user ID.
SET WRITECNT SESSION RPF program terminal write limit.

Chapter 7. Printing Data
This chapter describes how you can print data at a system or 328x (or compatible)
printer. The descriptions cover how to:
■ Identify the data you want to print. It can be all or part of:
– The currently displayed screen.
– The active AWS.
– One or more library members or the Library Selection List.
Also see Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for
information about printing data through the Library Facility Print Function
panel or the Selection List.
– The currently attached job output file.
Also see Chapter 30, “Jobs: Viewing Job Output” for information about
using the modifiable STATUS JOB display to print job output.
– The currently attached data set object.
Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for
information about printing data through the Data Set Facility Print Function
panel or a Selection List.
■ Qualify the data that you want printed (for example, printing multiple copies or
printing only selected lines or columns of the data).
■ Control printers and printing locations. This includes:
– Displaying information about available printers and printing locations.
– Directing your data to print at an alternate location (like a different system or
328x-type printer).
■ Control and monitor the data after it has been scheduled for printing.
Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed
7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed

As illustrated, you can print data from a variety of different sources.
Basic Command Description

PRINT <AWS> Prints the entire contents of the active AWS. The AWS
need not be attached. (The AWS keyword is optional.)
PRINT mem(s) Prints a maximum of 12 unattached library members. (To
print a member that does not belong to you, include the
owner's prefix.)
PRINT LIB Prints all of the currently attached library member or
Selection List.
PRINT DSN Prints all of the currently attached data set object.
PRINT JOB Prints all of the currently attached job output file.
PRINT SCREEN Prints all of the currently displayed screen.
Data from any of the sources identified in the previous figure can be combined as long
as the total number does not exceed 12. To illustrate, the following example shows
how you can combine data from eight different sources. This example also uses the
INSEP operand to cause the data from each source to begin on a new page:
PRINT MEM1 DSN AWS 1= 4= AWS 9= 1== JOB LIB AAA.MEM2 SCR INSEP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
You can also print a copy of the current screen display when an RPF program or other
application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal. Assuming that
the CA defaults are in effect, you can do this by entering:
:P
in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the
command :P.)
If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display will identify the
site-defined:
■ Escape character: The field RSCESCCH identifies the character to use. The
default is a colon (:).
■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is PF12.

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

This section describes many of the PRINT command operands that you can use to
control how your data are printed. For a detailed description of all the operands, see
the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.
7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers

Use the NUM or NONUM operands of the PRINT command to designate whether the
CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be printed. For example, to print the
contents of the active AWS and have sequence numbers included in columns 1 through
6, you would enter:
PRINT NUM
If you do not specify either of these operands when printing:

■ The contents of the active AWS, the current AWS sequence number attribute
controls whether sequence numbers are included.
■ An unattached library member, the member's sequence number attribute controls
whether sequence numbers are included.
■ An attached data set object, job output file or library member/Selection List, the
current display format governs whether sequence numbers are included (for
example, if SET DISPLAY NUM is in effect, sequence numbers are included).
■ Screen display, no sequence numbers are included.
7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data

You can use the CAPS, TYPE and FORMAT operands to format the data to be
printed.
CAPS Operand:
CAPS causes alphabetic characters in the data to be printed in uppercase characters.

For example:
PRINT INVLIST CAPS
prints any alphabetic characters in the library member named INVLIST in uppercase.
(The data itself is not changed.)

TYPE Operand:
TYPE can be used to designate which printer control characters are to be recognized,
where:
TYPE ANS Recognizes ANSI control characters.
TYPE DEF Recognizes CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands. (This is the
default.)
TYPE MCC Recognizes machine control characters.
When TYPE DEF is in effect, you can use:

■ CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands with data that is in the active AWS.
These commands, which must begin in column 1, include:
.SK v or To include v number of blank li
:SK v output.
.TOP or :TOP To force a new page.
■ The TM and BM operands to change the site-defined top and bottom margins,
respectively. For example, if you want to begin printing six lines from the top of
the page (for example, have five blank lines precede the data) and stop printing
nine lines from the bottom, you would enter:
PRINT TYPE DEF TM 5 BM 9
Notes:
– Use the PRINT DEVICE command to determine the default and current top
and bottom margins.
– The left and right margins are determined by the placement of the data. In the
following screen, for example, the data extends from columns 5 through 53.

PRINT Command: Using Formatting Pseudo-Commands
7 PRINT TYPE DEF_

8
>
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST1) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
================================ T O P ==============
===1== This data illustrates the use of the formatting
===2== pseudo-commands.
===3== :p.
===4== The preceding .SK 2 command causes two blank
===5== lines to be inserted in the printed output.
===6== :TOP
===7== The :TOP command causes a page EJECT to occur.
===8==
===9== The pseudo-commands must begin in the first posi-
==1=== tion of a line and be the only data on that line.
FORMAT Operand:
FORMAT can be used to specify the desired data format, where:

FORMAT DUMP Each line is formatted with offsets, hexadecimal data and
EBCDIC data to the right of the line.
FORMAT CHEX Each line is formatted with offsets and hexadecimal data to the
right of the line.
FORMAT VHEX Each line is formatted in character data with hexadecimal data
shown vertically below.

7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests

When you execute the PRINT command, the data are scheduled for printing and an
information message is displayed. The message contains:
RPS1= REQUEST tag, number SCHEDULED FOR LOCATION id
where:
tag Optional name that you can assign to the print request.
number Print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe.
id Location at which the request is scheduled for printing.
Note: A print request is any data that you direct to a system or 328x-type printer.
7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests
You can assign a name (referred to as a tag) to a print request. If included, the tag
must be one- to eight- characters in length, begin with an alphabetic character, and be
bound by apostrophes, as in:
PRINT 'MASTER' DSN
Here, the name MASTER is assigned to the print request that prints the contents of the
currently attached data set object.
7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests
To reference a scheduled print request (that is, to hold a request), you must include
either the CA-Roscoe-assigned request number or the user-assigned tag name with the
appropriate command. See 7.4, “Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests” on
page 7-13 for additional information.
7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies

You can use the COPY operand of the PRINT command to specify how many copies
of the request are to be printed. (If the operand is omitted, one copy is printed.) For
example, to print four copies of the member named INVLIST, enter:
PRINT INVLIST COPY 4

7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns

You can limit a print request to include only the data appearing within a selected range
of lines or columns.
7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines
■ To print a range of lines within the active AWS, include the appropriate starting
and ending line numbers with the command, as in:
PRINT 1== 5==
■ To print a range of lines within an attached data set object, job output file or
library member, specify the appropriate line numbers after identifying the data to
be printed, as in:
PRINT JOB 1== 5==
■ When printing data from multiple sources, identify the data to be printed and the
appropriate line numbers, as in:
PRINT INVLIST 6== 1=== AWS 12== 23== DSN 1== 5==
■ To print any display that does not include line numbers (like the current screen
display or a Data Set Facility Selection List), assume that the data are numbered
from one by one. Thus, to print the first ten lines of the current screen display,
PRINT SCREEN 1 1=
7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns
You can also limit a print request to include only the data appearing within specific
columns.
■ If the display includes a Scale Line (like the active AWS, a library member,
attached job output file or data set object), use the Scale Line values to determine
the appropriate column numbers. For example, if you enter:
PRINT JOB COLS 1= 3=
only the data appearing within column 10 through 30 will be included in the print
request.

■ If the display does not include a Scale Line (like the current screen display), the
left-most displayed position is assumed to be column one. Thus, if you enter:
PRINT SCREEN COLS 1 1=
only the data appearing in the first ten positions on the screen will be included in
the print request.
7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification

Site management has the option of allowing you to receive a message at your terminal
when your print request has printed. If your site is using this facility, you can override
your site default for:
■ A specific request using the NOTIFY or NONOTIFY operand. For example, if
your site default prohibits notification messages, you can use the NOTIFY operand
to override this setting for a specific request, as in:
PRINT INVLIST NOTIFY
■ For your terminal session using the modifiable STATUS SESSION display or the
SET RPSNOTIFY command.
In the following example, SET RPSNOTIFY ON will display notification messages

when the first two requests are printed. The NONOTIFY operand will prohibit the
message when the third request is printed.
SET RPSNOTIFY ON
PRINT
PRINT INVLIST
PRINT NONOTIFY

7.2.7 Using a System Printer

In addition to the facilities described thus far, you can use the following PRINT
command operands when directing data to a system printer:
■ CLASS Operand:
CLASS can be used to designate which print class is to be used, as in:
PRINT JOB CLASS A
If you do not specify a print class, your site-defined default is used. (You can use
the PRINT DEVICE command to display information about the printer and the
print classes assigned to it. PRINT DEVICE is described in 7.3.3, “Obtaining
Information About Printers” on page 7-12.)
■ BURST Operand:
If the printer supports the burster-trimmer-stacker option, you can use this operand
to have the output burst into separate sheets.
■ FCB Operand:
FCB can be used to specify the Forms Control Buffer to be used when producing
the output, as in:
PRINT JOB FCB B6==

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations

Printing locations are defined by your site management, and consist of one or more
328x-type printers or a system printer. Your management can associate multiple
printing locations with each terminal.
When you issue the PRINT command, your data are directed to the default printing
location associated with your terminal.
7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location

The majority of time, you will want to print your data at the default printing location
associated with your terminal. There may be occasions, however, when you want to
print data at a different location (like at a system printer location if your default is a
328x-type printer location or at another 328x-type printer location).
You can change your printing location for a single request or for the remainder of your
terminal session.
7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request
To specify an alternate location for a single request, use the DEST operand with the
PRINT command. For example, to print the contents of the active AWS at the
location identified as PR05, you would enter:
PRINT DEST PR=5
7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session
Use the SET RPSDEST command to alter the default printing location for the duration
of your terminal session (or until you execute another SET RPSDEST command). For
example, to change the default printing location to PR12, you would enter:
SET RPSDEST PR12 2

7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information

You can get information about your site-defined printing locations.
■ To display a list of all printing locations associated with your terminal, enter:
PRINT LOCATION
The first displayed location is the default location assigned to your terminal. The
current printing location (which is either the default or an alternate you assigned)
is preceded by an asterisk.
■ To display information about your default printing location, enter:
PRINT LOCATION Q
The resulting display provides information about the location to which your print
requests are normally directed. The information shows, for example, the maximum
number of lines and copies you can print at that location.
When you issue the command:
STATUS SESSION
the field RPSDEST contains the name of your current (or default) printing
location.
■ To display information about a specific location, enter the command followed by
the name of that location. For example, if you entered:
PRINT LOCATION PR17
Information associated with the printing location identified as PR17 is displayed.

7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers

To list the printers defined to CA-Roscoe, enter:
PRINT DEVICE
To display information about a specific printer, enter:

PRINT DEVICE printer-name
where printer-name is the name your site has assigned to that printer.
The display includes such information as the:

■ Current and default top and bottom margins.
■ Current and default page length and width.
Note: If you need to use a non-standard size paper (like the paper width and/or
length differs from the default), include the PW and PL operands with the
PRINT command. For example, if you are using paper that allows only 50
print lines where each line can contain a maximum of 40 characters, you
would enter:
PRINT PL 5= PW 4=

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests

This section describes a variety of ways you can control data that is scheduled for
printing.
7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s)

If, after scheduling a request, you decide that you do not want the request printed, you
can terminate it through the PRINT CANCEL command. For example, to cancel a
request that has been assigned the number 598, you would enter:
PRINT CANCEL 598
You can use the tag name in place of the request number, as in:
PRINT CANCEL MASTER
To terminate all of your own outstanding requests, enter:

PRINT CANCEL ALL
7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status

Whether or not you use the notification facility (described in the section Requesting
Completion Notification), you can monitor the progress of your print requests using the
PRINT STATUS command.
To check the status of all of your outstanding print requests, you can enter either:
PRINT STATUS or PRINT STATUS ALL
To check the status of a particular request, you must include the tag or print request
number of the desired request. For example, to check the status of a print request
whose tag name is MASTER, enter:
PRINT STATUS MASTER
To check the status of the print request assigned the number 278, enter:
PRINT STATUS 278

7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s)

You can use the PRINT HOLD command to hold any of your outstanding print
request(s). To hold a request, specify its assigned request number or tag name. For
example, to hold the request assigned the tag name of MASTER, you would enter:
PRINT HOLD MASTER
To hold all of your outstanding print requests, you would enter:

PRINT HOLD ALL
Having held one or more requests, you can release them using the PRINT RELEASE
command, as in:
PRINT RELEASE MASTER
or
PRINT RELEASE 598
or
PRINT RELEASE ALL
You can use PRINT HOLD and PRINT RELEASE to rearrange the priorities of your
own print requests. The steps you follow are:
1. Hold all of your outstanding requests at the appropriate location.
2. Release the print request you want printed first, then release your remaining print
requests.
7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s)

As long as a print request is outstanding (for example, it has not started to print), you
can change the location at which it is to be printed. For example, to reroute the
request named ABC from location PRT01 to PRT12, you would enter:
PRINT ROUTE DEST PRT=1 TO PRT12 'ABC'
This example assumes that the terminal's default printing location is PRT01 and that
ABC was implicitly scheduled to print at that location. If you reroute a held request,
the request is automatically released.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format
This chapter describes the basic format of the screen displayed during a CA-Roscoe
session. It also discusses how you can:
■ Split the screen, (allowing two concurrent CA-Roscoe subsessions).
■ Lock the screen by invoking the Terminal Lock Facility.
Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description

As illustrated in the following example the CA-Roscoe screen is segmented into a
Command Area 1, System Control Area 2, and Execution Area 3.
ROSCOE Screen Format
7 _
8
1
>
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 2
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
================================ T O P ======================
===3==
===4==
===6==
===7== CONFIGURATION SECTION.
===8== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.
===9== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.
==1=== 3
==11== INPUT-OUTPUT SECTION.
==12== FILE-CONTROL.
==13== SELECT INVENTORY-FILE
==14== ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSIN.
==15== SELECT INVENTORY-REPORT
==16== ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSPRINT.
U V
Note: This screen and all others shown in this manual are representations of the
actual screens. The screen widths are modified to allow them to fit within the
margins of this manual. This results in an abbreviated System Information and
Scale Line.

8.1.1 The Command Area

By default, the Command Area comprises the first three lines of the screen. You can
change the number of lines by specifying a value between 1 and 3 with the SET
CMDLINES command.
This area is where you enter all primary commands, Monitor commands and RPF
program names. You can enter one or more commands or program names per line.
(See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for additional information
about entering commands in this area.)
8.1.2 The System Control Area

The System Control Area consists of the following three lines:
1. Response Line
This protected line is used to display informational and error messages. The right
side of this line is also used to identify what may be pending (for example, data
that is attached but not currently displayed). The PENDING message is preceded
by one or more of the following codes:
D Data Set Facility is pending.
E Application executing under ETSO is suspended.
J Job output is pending.
L Library Facility is pending.
Sv Full-screen split has occurred. v will be 1 or 2 indicating which
full-screen split is pending.
T Etso Subtask is active.
2. System Information Line
The System Information Line is used to display information about the currently
displayed data. (The line is blank when data are not being displayed.) This line
consists of:
The Name Field
This protected field identifies the data currently displayed. The information is
presented in one of the following formats:
AWS() or AWS(pfx.mem)
The contents of an AWS is displayed. The data is modified. If
it is unnamed (the data has not been FETCHed from the library
or SAVEd in it), only bounding parentheses are shown. If the
data are named, the prefixed member name is placed between
the parentheses.

DSN() dsn A data set object is displayed. The data are not modifiable;
portions of selection lists and function panels are modifiable.
The fully qualified name of the data set object is shown on the
line below this keyword.
HLP(..HELP..) A HELP member is displayed. It is not modifiable.
JOB(name, no) Job output is displayed. The data are not modifiable. The job
name and number are bound by parentheses following the
keyword.
LIB(pfx.mem) Library facility data are displayed. The displayed member is not
modifiable; portions of the selection list and function panels are
modifiable. When a member is displayed, its prefixed name,
bound by parentheses, follows the keyword.
STA(name, no) Information about the currently attached job output is displayed.
Portions of the display are modifiable.
The right side of the display might also contain:
A<name> An AWS is attached. Its name is bound by < and >.
PGM(pfx.mem) An RPF program is executing. PGM is followed by the prefixed
name of the library member containing the executing program.
PAU(pfx.mem) An RPF program is executing and is in a pause state. PAU is
followed by the prefixed name of the library member containing
the executing program.
The SCRL Field
This modifiable field contains the value used by the PF keys that are assigned
scrolling functions. You can change this value at any time by issuing the SET
SCROLL command, or by positioning the cursor to the start of this field and
entering one of the values shown in the following table.
Permanent Scroll Action Taken When Key Pressed

Value Direction
FULL Forward/Backward Scroll one line less than the number of
lines in the Execution Area.
Left/Right Scroll the width of the screen.
FRAM or Forward/Backward Scroll the number of lines in the
Page Execution Area.
HALF Forward/Backward Scroll one-half the number of lines in
the Execution Area.

Permanent Scroll Action Taken When Key Pressed

Value Direction
CSR Forward/Backward Scroll to begin or end the display with
the line containing the cursor.
Left/Right Scroll to begin or end the display with
the column containing the cursor.
v Forward/Backward Scroll the specified number of lines (v
may be 1 through 9999.)
Note that the display is unchanged if you attempt to scroll:

■ Forward or backward, and there are not a sufficient number of lines to begin
or end the display with the designated line.
■ Left or right, and there are not a sufficient number of characters in the
appropriate direction to begin or end the line with the designated column.
The following chart shows the temporary values that you can type in the SCRL
field.
Temporary Scroll Action Taken When Key Pressed

Value Direction
MAX Forward/Backward Scroll the display to the first or last
line of the data.
Left/Right Scroll the display to the first or last
column of the data.
PFv Forward/Backward, Execute the function assigned to the
Left/Right designated PF key.
The previous SCRL field value is restored after MAX or PFn is executed.

The COLS Field

This modifiable field contains numbers representing the left and right display
margins. By default, the values are set to the maximum width permitted by the
display format and type of terminal being used.
To change the margins, you can: 1) use the SET DISPLAY command, or 2)
position the cursor to the appropriate field and overtype the current value with the
new.
Note: Leading zeros are not required. If omitted, eliminate the old value so that
the field contains only the new margin value.)
For additional information, see Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format.”
3. The Scale Line
The last line in the System Control Area is reserved for the Scale Line. This
protected line reflects the current display margins. For example, if the left display
margin is 7, the displayed data begins with column 7. The Scale Line also begins
with 7 and is aligned over the first displayed position.
When appropriate, special characters are placed on the Scale Line. They are:
<> Indicating the current left and right search boundaries.
¬ Indicating tab positions. The default tab character is ¬. If a different
character is being used, that character will appear on the Scale Line.
* Indicating the location of both a search boundary and tab position.
8.1.3 The Execution Area

The remaining lines on the screen are used to enter, edit and display data. These lines
are referred to as the Execution Area. The actual number and length of the displayed
lines depends on the type of terminal being used.
When an AWS is attached, line commands can be used to enter and modify the
displayed data. (For additional information about using line commands, see Chapter 2,
“Commands and Command Components.”)

8.2 Splitting the Screen

You can divide the physical terminal screen into two logical presentation areas by
performing a:
■ Partial-screen split - both presentation areas are displayed, or
■ Full-screen split - the active presentation area fills the screen.
When the screen is split, each presentation area represents a single CA-Roscoe
subsession. Each subsession is allocated its own AWS and can be used to perform any
command or function handled through the single display format. These subsessions
allow you to have two simultaneous independent CA-Roscoe sessions. (If there is a
site sign-on program or if you have a sign-on program, these programs are executed
each time you split the screen.)
When you split the physical screen into two logical presentation areas, each screen
contains:
■ A Command Area, consisting of one to three lines. (Use the SET CMDLINES
command to specify the number of lines comprising this area.)
■ A System Control Area, containing a Response Line, System Information Line and
Scale Line.
■ An Execution Area, containing the maximum number of lines allowed as
determined by the type of split screen you invoked.
The minimum size of a presentation area is 11 lines. The maximum size is determined
by the type of screen split being requested.
8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split

To request a full-screen split (as illustrated in the following example) position the
cursor to the last line of the current screen and press PF1 or PF13. The screen is split
and the new presentation area fills the entire screen. An Sv PENDING message
identifies the other presentation area that can be recalled at any time.
Note: PF1 or PF13 are the CA-Roscoe default PF key settings to split the screen.

Full-Screen Split - Before
7 8
>
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
...... ================================= T O P ======================
===1== AAAAA
...... ============================== B O T T O M ===================
Full Screen Split -- After
7- 8
> S1 PENDING
>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
To cause a full-screen split when a partial-screen split is currently in effect, move the
cursor to the last line of the appropriate presentation area and press PF1 or PF13. That
presentation expands to to fill the terminal screen.
Alternate Full-Screen Split
If an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of

the terminal, you can request a full-screen split by entering:
:S
in any unprotected field of the screen and pressing PF12. (The cursor must
immediately follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the
CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM command to determine if your site
management has changed these defaults.

8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split

When a partial-screen split is invoked, both presentation areas are displayed. As
illustrated in the following example, they are separated by a protected, highlighted line
containing asterisks. The cursor is placed in the Command Area of the lower screen.
Continuing the previous example, if you want to:

■ divide the screen equally:
Position the cursor within the first or last 11 lines of the physical screen or to the
middle line of the screen and press PF1 or PF13. (If you position the cursor to the
last line, a full-screen split is invoked when you press the PF key.)
Partial-Screen Split
7 >
8
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
...... ================================= T O P =======================
===1== AAAAA
...... ============================== B O T T O M ====================
) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
_
>
>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
U V
If the physical screen contains an even number of lines, the upper presentation
area will contain one more line than the lower presentation area.
■ divide the screen unequally:
Position the cursor to any line other than those used to perform an equal- or
full-screen split and press PF1 or PF13. (For example, if you position the cursor
to the thirteenth line of a 43-line terminal screen and press PF1 or PF13, the upper
screen will contain 12 lines, the separator will be on the thirteenth line and the
lower presentation area will use the remaining lines.

8.2.3 Resplitting Screens

With one exception, you can change the size of the presentation areas after the initial
split by resplitting the screen. (The exception is that resplitting is not valid when a :S
or :W was used to create the current display.)
To resplit, press PF1 or PF13 after moving the cursor to:

■ The last line of a presentation area to cause a full-screen split.
■ Within the first or last 11 lines of a presentation area to cause an equal
partial-screen split.
■ Any other line to cause an unequal partial-screen split.
Note that you cannot change the screen size if an RPF program executing in either
presentation area contains the command SET SCREEN NOMODIFY.
8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens

Only one presentation area is active at a time. The active area is the one containing
the cursor. When you press the ENTER key or a PF/PA key, terminal input is read
from the active presentation area. Commands or PF/PA key functions are executed in
only the active area. Any data or commands that you have typed in the inactive
presentation area remain displayed. No action is taken in the inactive screen.
When a partial-screen split is in effect, use the cursor positioning keys to move the
cursor from one area to the other, the new presentation area becomes active; the old
presentation area is inactive.
■ If the newly activated presentation area is less than three-fourths the size of the
deactivated presentation area, the sizes of the two areas are interchanged.
■ If the cursor is positioned to the line separating the two areas, both presentation
areas are considered inactive.
You can activate one presentation area while deactivating the other by pressing PF2 or
PF14, the CA-Roscoe default PF-key assignments for swapping. This bounces the
cursor from the active presentation area to the inactive area. Thus, activating the new
area.
When a full-screen split is in effect, pressing PF2 or PF14 causes the logical screens to
be bounced, where the new screen contains the cursor and is, thus, the active screen.

Alternate Full-Screen Swap
When a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application (like
ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can swap the logical screens
by entering:
:W
8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens

To terminate full- or partial-split screens, press PF3 or PF15, the CA-Roscoe default
PF-key assignments for END. The presentation area:
■ Containing the cursor is terminated.
■ Not containing the cursor becomes the active presentation area and expands to fill
the screen.
You can end your CA-Roscoe session while the screens are split by entering OFF or
OFFON in either presentation area.
If, when you terminate split screens or sign-off CA-Roscoe, there is data in an AWS
with a RECOVERABLE attribute, it is saved in a library member named SAVAWSnn,
where nn is a unique identifier.
Alternate Full-Screen Split Termination
If a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application (like ETSO
or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can terminate split screen processing
by entering:
:E

8.3 Changing the Screen Size
8.3 Changing the Screen Size

Depending on how 3270-type terminals are defined at your site, you may be able to
change the size of the physical or logical CA-Roscoe screen by issuing the SCREEN
command. For example,
SCREEN FLIP
allows you to bounce between the terminal's primary and alternate screen sizes.
Additional operands of this command permit you to switch to a specific size, as in:
SCREEN 2
which changes the screen size to 24 rows by 80 columns. See the CA-Roscoe
Command Reference Guide for additional information about using this command.

8.4 Locking the Screen

There may be times when you need to leave your terminal for a few minutes and do
not want to sign off or allow anyone to access your session. At these times, you can
use the SET TLOCK command to activate the Terminal Lock Facility. For example,
if you enter:
SET TLOCK NOW
the terminal lock screen (as illustrated in the following example) is displayed.
Terminal Lock Screen
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||| TLO=1 TERMINAL LOCKED ||||||||
||||| ||||||||
||||| KEY your-key DATE =9/19/94 ||||||||
||||| TERMID terminal-id TIME 14.35.5= ||||||||
||||| APPLID application-id VERSION 6.= ||||||||
||||| ||||||||
||||| To continue enter password => ||||||||
||||| To terminate enter 'OFF' => ||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||| ||||| ||||| || ||| ||||| |||||
|||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||
|||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||
|||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||
||||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||||
|||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||||||
||| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| |||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
U V
When this screen is displayed, you must enter either your CA-Roscoe password (to
resume your session) or the OFF command (to terminate your session).
Note: The Terminal Lock Facility is not available if you have no CA-Roscoe
password, are using a typewriter device, or are accessing CA-Roscoe through a
terminal defined to CICS.
There are two other ways the Terminal Lock Screen can be displayed.
1. When an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-EMAIL+) is in
control of the terminal, you can force the Terminal Lock screen by:
■ Checking the STATUS SYSTEM display to verify the site-defined escape
character prefix (identified by the RCSESCCH field) and PF key (identified
by the RCSESCPF field).

■ Assuming the defaults are in effect, entering in any unprotected field of the
display:
:L
and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command :L.)
2. Site management can force the terminal to be locked if there is no activity for a
site-specified period of time. (If the CA-Roscoe Automatic Signoff Facility is in
use when the Terminal Lock screen is displayed, you will be signed off
CA-Roscoe if there is no terminal activity within the site-specified time period.)
To display or change the site-defined time periods, issue the commands:

STATUS SYSTEM To display the site-defined default and maximum inactivity
periods. If your site management is not using the facility, it
is noted on this display. (The AUTTLOCK values provide
information about the Terminal Lock Facility; the AUTOFF
values provide information about the Automatic Signoff
Facility.)
STATUS SESSION To display and alter the current settings, where the TLOCK
field is for the Terminal Lock Facility and the AUTOFF field
is for the Automatic Signoff Facility.
In addition to causing the Terminal Lock screen to be displayed, you can use the SET
TLOCK command to: 1) activate the Terminal Lock Facility, if it is inactive and 2)
change the site-defined inactivity period. See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference
Guide for additional information about the SET TLOCK command.

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages
You can use the SEND command or the BulletinBoard System to direct a message
containing one or more lines to any other CA-Roscoe user.
Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages

By default, SEND-related messages are displayed on the Response Line of your
terminal. You can use the SET SEND command to control whether these messages are
to be displayed. For example, if you enter:
SET SEND OPER
only messages sent by the operator are displayed. (Regardless of the setting, the
messages are always added to your library member ZZZZZMSG.)
To permit messages created by the SEND command to be displayed, you would enter:
SET SEND ALL
If you are signed on and receiving messages when someone sends you a message and
it is a:
■ One-Line Message:
The message is displayed on the Response Line the next time you press the
ENTER key or a PF key. As shown in the following example, the message text is
preceded by the sender's prefix.
SEND Command: Receiving a One-Line Message
7 8
> pfx RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================

■ Multi-Line Message:
The following example illustrates the format of the message you will receive the
next time you press the ENTER key or a PF key.
SEND Command: Receiving Multi-Line Message Notification
7 > MSG FROM USERID IN MEMBER: ABC.Z1!61525 COMMITTEE REPORT

8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
The message contains variable information:

key Sender's sign-on key (USERID in the above example)
zmddhhmm Name of the member in your library that contains the message.
This unique name consists of the character z, the month (in
hexadecimal), the day, the hour and the minute the member was
created. In the previous figure the member Z1061525 was
created on January 6 at 3:25 PM. A member created on
October 15 at 9:15 AM would be named ZA150915 (where the
second character, A, represents the month October in
hexadecimal).
string Optional note that the sender included with the SEND command
(for example, COMMITTEE REPORT).
Whether or not you are signed on or receiving messages, an entry is always added to
the top of the your library member ZZZZZMSG. Each entry consists of two lines,
where the first line indicates the date, time and sender's name. The second line
contains either: 1) the one-line message or 2) the name of the library member that was
created to hold the multi-line message.

9.2 Transmitting Messages

You can direct: 1) a one-line message to the Response Line of another CA-Roscoe
user's terminal, or 2) a multi-line message to a special library member in another user's
library.
9.2.1 Using the SEND Command

To send a message using the SEND command, you must:
1. Identify the Recipient:
You can use either the sign-on key or prefix of the user to whom you want to
send the message. For example, to send a message to the user whose sign-on key
is JONES, you would enter:
SEND KEY=JONES ...
If JONES' prefix is JNS, you could send the message by entering:
SEND PFX=JNS ...
2. Specify the Message:
If the message is brief (no longer than 64 characters in length), you can include it
with the SEND command itself, as in:
SEND KEY=JONES 'RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN'
The message must be delimited by a special character not found in the message.
If you want to send a multi-line message, you can place the text in either the
active AWS or a library member. Then, when you issue the SEND command, you
must identify the location of the message, as in:
SEND AWS KEY=JONES
In this example, the keyword AWS identifies the location of the message.
When you send a multi-line message, you can optionally include a note with the
command, as in:
SEND MYREPORT KEY=JONES /COMMITTEE REPORT/
In this case, the contents of the member named MYREPORT is sent to the
recipient identified as JONES. The message displayed on the recipient's Response
Line will include the note COMMITTEE REPORT.

3. Qualify the Message:

There may be occasions when you want to control the transmission or display of
your message. For example,
■ If you want your message transmitted only if the recipient is currently signed
on and accepting messages, you can include the NOW operand with the
command, as in:
SEND KEY=JONES 'MUST SEE YOU IMMEDIATELY' NOW
If the recipient is not signed on or is not receiving messages, you will receive
a message stating that your message was not transmitted.
■ If you want to send a confidential message to another user and not have it
displayed on the user's Response Line, you can include the NODSPLY
operands, as in:
SEND KEY=JONES 'THE PASSWORD IS ABLE' NODSPLY
In this case, the message is written directly to the recipient's library member
ZZZZZMSG.
9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS)

To send a one-line message to another CA-Roscoe user using the BulletinBoard
System, invoke the ZMsg Mode (PF12) from any BBS screen. This mode allows you
to send messages to other CA-Roscoe users and still remain in your BulletinBoard
session. These messages are like any other CA-Roscoe one-line SEND messages.
Note: See BBS - BulletinBoard System on page 35-1 for more information about
using the ZMsg mode.
On the ZMsg screen, fill in the fields with the appropriate information. Enter the
CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the message to. If the key or
prefix does not exist, you will receive an error message on the Error/Status line. Enter
the message text in the Message field.
To send the message, press ENTER. The message will be sent, and your message
field will be immediately updated to include this information. The Status line on the
top of the screen tells you that the message was sent, and to what prefix.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe

■ Sign on to CA-Roscoe.
■ Customize your sign-on process by:
– Creating, changing and/or deleting your password.
– Creating, changing and/or deleting your sign-on program.
■ Sign off CA-Roscoe either explicitly or automatically.
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-1

10.1 Signing On
10.1 Signing On
In addition to describing the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen, this section provides
information about how to bypass the sign-on screen when signing on from VTAM
terminals or accessing CA-Roscoe from CICS terminals, a TSO session or another
CA-Roscoe.
10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen

When the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed at a 3270-type terminal, the current
date and time are shown on the right side of the screen. The version of CA-Roscoe
being executed is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the screen.
The following example illustrates the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen that is displayed at
3270-type terminals.
7 8
>APPLID(A=4IROS3)
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||| |||||||
|||| |||||||
|||| KEY _ DATE =9/19/92 |||||||
|||| PASSWORD TIME 14.35.49 |||||||
|||| GROUP CODE TERMID A=1IX=17 |||||||
|||| NEW PASSWORD > |||||||
|||| > (Repeat for verification) |||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||| ||||| ||||| ||| ||| ||||| |||||
||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||
||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||
||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||
|||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Ver 6.=||
||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Glvl 94=4|
|| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| |||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||| COPYRIGHT (C) 1994 COMPUTER ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL, INC. ||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
U V
To sign on to CA-Roscoe, complete the following fields:
KEY (Required.) Enter the sign-on key assigned to you by site
management. The cursor is positioned to this field when the
sign-on screen is displayed.
PASSWORD (May be required.) Enter your password if you have been
assigned one.
A password protects you against unauthorized access. Thus,
for security reasons, your password is not displayed when you
enter it.

10.1 Signing On
GROUP CODE (Optional.) Enter the appropriate information.

This field provides a way for you to enter additional security
information requested by your site management. Data entered
in this field is not displayed.
NEW PASSWORD (Optional.) Enter a new password, if appropriate. To verify
that you have spelled your password correctly, reenter it on
the next line.
See 10.2.1, “Changing/Creating a Password” on page 10-8 for
additional information.
After completing the appropriate fields, press the ENTER key to have the information
transmitted to CA-Roscoe. As soon as you are signed on:
■ The system sign-on message is displayed, if established by your site management.
■ The system sign-on program is executed, if established by your site management.
■ Your sign-on program is executed, if you have created one.
10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals

If the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is not displayed, you must enter a VTAM application
ID to establish contact with CA-Roscoe.
Your site management will tell you what application ID to use. If the ID is, for
example, ROSCOE, you can display the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering:
ROSCOE
and pressing the ENTER key. You can now sign on as described earlier.
You can bypass the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering sign-on information with
the VTAM application ID. To do this, you would use the format:
──applid──signonkey──┬─────────────────────────────┬──────────
└─/password─┬─────────────┬─/─┘
└─/group-code─┘
Examples:
If your sign-on key is SMITH and you have no password or group code, you would
enter:
ROSCOE SMITH
If you sign-on key is SMITH and your password is MYPASS, you would enter:
ROSCOE SMITH/MYPASS
If any of the sign-on information is incorrect, the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is

displayed and all sign-on information must be reentered.

10.1 Signing On
10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM

XTPM (External Teleprocessing Monitor) is a component of CA-Roscoe that allows
users to access CA-Roscoe from terminals defined to CICS/VS, TSO, or another
CA-Roscoe.
10.1.3.1 CA-Roscoe From CA-Roscoe
You can sign on to one CA-Roscoe from another CA-Roscoe at any time using the
ETSO CALL command in the form:
──CALL──prog──┬────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬──────────
└─signonkey/password─┘ └─ROSID=code─┘
where prog is the name of a CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module.

Note: The target CA-Roscoe must be the same release as the host CA-Roscoe (the
one from which you are invoking sign-on.) You cannot sign on to a
CA-Roscoe of another release level.
For example, if your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you
might enter:
CALL ROSXROS 'MYSIGNON/MINE'
Refer to Appendix B of the CA-Roscoe Installation Guide for detailed instructions on

installing the CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module.
Notes:
■ If you do not enter your sign-on key and password, either:
– The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, the
CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or
– The CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed.
■ There is an optional user group code:
– If specified explicitly, will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe.
– If specified implicitly with an asterisk (*), the user group code from your
current CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe.
– If your site security system is providing the sign-on information, the user
group code from your current CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the target
CA-Roscoe.
■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. You
may omit ROSID= if:
– Your site is executing a single CA-Roscoe, or

10.1 Signing On
– You have no preference as to which CA-Roscoe you are signed on to when

your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems.
If your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems, it is possible to bounce between

the host and target systems. For example, assume that:
■ You are currently executing on a host CA-Roscoe identified as ROS1. The RCS
escape character is a semi-colon (;) and the RCS escape PF key is PF12 (as
identified by the RCSESCCH and RCSESCPF field of the STATUS SYSTEM
display).
■ You want to begin a session on a target CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. Its RCS
escape character is the colon (:) and its RCS escape PF key is PF12.
First, create a full-screen split. In the new screen, enter the CALL command with the
appropriate program name and identify the target CA-Roscoe, as in:
──CALL──prog──┬──────────────────────┬──ROSID=ROSA────────────
└─signonkey──/password─┘
You are now signed on to the CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. To bounce back to the
ROS1, your host CA-Roscoe, enter: '; (Host CA-Roscoe RCS Escape Character)'
;W
and press PF12, where the ; is defined as the host CA-Roscoe RCS escape character.
When you are returned to ROS1, the ETSO application is viewed as suspended. You
can execute CA-Roscoe commands, RPF programs, and so on. You can swap back to
the target CA-Roscoe at any time to continue your session on ROSA.
Since the target CA-Roscoe has a different RCS escape character, it is possible to
request a full-screen split on that CA-Roscoe. This gives you four CA-Roscoe screens,
two on the host and two on the target. It is also possible for you to access yet another
CA-Roscoe from the target.
When you end your target CA-Roscoe session you are returned to your host
CA-Roscoe session.
As can be seen by the preceding example, it is possible for you to access multiple
CA-Roscoes from a single terminal.

10.1 Signing On
10.1.3.2 CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals
From a terminal defined to CICS/VS, you can sign on to CA-Roscoe through: 1) a

menu-driven or formatted site-defined screen, or 2) by entering a site-defined
transaction ID.
When using a transaction ID, the sign-on format is:
──transid──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬───────
└─signonkey─┬───────────┬──┘ └─ROSID=code─┘
└─/password─┘
For example, if the CA-Roscoe transaction ID is ROSC, your sign-on key is

MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter:
ROSC MYSIGNON/MINE
Notes:
■ See the CA-Roscoe Installation Guide for complete information about setting up
CICS interface modules and TRANSID resources.
can omit ROSID= if:
When you end your CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to CICS.

10.1 Signing On
10.1.3.3 CA-Roscoe From TSO
From the TSO READY prompt or from ISPF/PDF Option 6, you can access
CA-Roscoe using the sign-on format:
──cpid──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬────
└─signonkey─┬───────────┬──┘ └─ROSID=─┬──────┬──┘
└─/password─┘ └─code─┘
where cpid is the name of a site-defined TSO Command Processor. For example, if
the TSO Command Processor for CA-Roscoe is ROSF, your sign-on key is
MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter:
ROSF MYSIGNON/MINE
Notes:
may omit ROSID= if:
When you end your CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to TSO.
WARNING:
The TSO restriction on the use of PA1 is applicable during your CA-Roscoe
session. If you should press the PA1 key, it is ignored.

10.2 Customizing Sign On

This section describes how you can create, change or delete your CA-Roscoe password
and sign-on program. Note that your site management may restrict your ability to
perform some or all of these actions.
10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password

Your site management has the option of:
■ Requiring you to maintain a password. (This is to protect you against unauthorized
access.)
■ Controlling whether you can change or delete your password.
■ Requiring you to change your password on a periodic basis.
If your site permits you to control your password, you have two different methods for
creating, changed and deleting it.
Method 1 - When Signing On
You can use the NEW PASSWORD fields on the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen to:
■ Create a Password.
Enter your password in the NEW PASSWORD field. To verify that the password
is spelled correctly, reenter it on the next line. The password must be one to ten
characters in length and cannot contain a slash (/) as one of its characters.
■ Change a Password.
Enter your current password in the PASSWORD field. Then enter your new
password in the NEW PASSWORD field (and on the following line for
verification). The next time you sign on to CA-Roscoe, your new password will
be in effect.
■ Eliminate a Password.
Enter spaces in the NEW PASSWORD field and on the following line.
Method 2 - During a Session

Note: Your site management may prohibit the use of the PASSWORD primary
command. If the use of PASSWORD is not restricted, you can use it at any
time during your terminal session.

You can use the PASSWORD command to:

■ Create a Password.
Enter the command PASSWORD and a one- to ten-character password that does
not contain a slash (/). For example, to establish E637 as your password, you
would enter:
PASSWORD E637
■ Change a Password.
Enter the PASSWORD command followed by the new password. Your new
password will be in effect the next time you sign on.
■ Eliminate a Password.
Enter the command PASSWORD with no operand, as in:
PASSWORD

10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program

Note: Site management has the option of designating whether you may create, change
or delete a sign-on program.
A sign-on program consists of one or more CA-Roscoe commands that are saved as a
library member. If you have a sign-on program, it is executed every time you sign on
to CA-Roscoe and every time you split the screen.
A sign-on program is useful when, for example, you want certain CA-Roscoe session
attributes to always be in effect. Rather than entering the commands establishing each
attribute every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe, you can include the commands in a
library member and then have the commands in that member automatically executed
for you. (See Chapter 6, “Displaying Session Attributes/Information” for additional
information.)
The following example contains a sample sign-on program. In addition to using some
of the commands that set session attributes, it also changes the functions assigned to
some of the PF keys.
Sample Sign-on Program
7 SAVE MYSIGN_
8
>
> AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....6....+
...... ================================ T O P =====================
===1== <<MYSIGN>>
===2== SET MODE XTENDED : Set character translation
===3== SET DISPLAY ALL 1 72 NUM : Set display format
===4== SET DISPLAY AWS 7 8= NUMX : Set AWS display format
===5== TAB $ : Set tab character
===6== TAB 16 2= 42 : Set tab positions
===7== SET ; : Set command delimiter
===8== : PF key assignments follow
===9== LET AWS.PF13 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH'
==1=== LET JOB.PF13 = '+ATTACH JOB +C1+'
==11== LET DSN.PF13 = '+ATTACH DSN +C1+'
==12== LET LIB.PF13 = '+ATTACH +C1+'
==13== LET PF14 = '+DETACH +C1+'
==14== LET PF15 = '+SCROLL +C1+ +C2+ +C3+'
============================= B O T T O M ==================
U V
When creating a library member that is to be your sign-on program:
■ Only one command may appear per line in the member.
■ The first line in the member should contain the library member name.
If you do include the name, it must be bound by angle brackets (<< and >>).
(Notice line 100 in the previous figure contains <<MYSIGN>>, where MYSIGN
is the name of the member.)

■ Comments may be included in the program.

A comment is indicated by a colon (:) that is preceded and followed by at least
one space. Any words following the colon are treated as comments and ignored.
(Notice the use of comments in the sample sign-on program in the previous
figure.)
To establish or change the member containing your sign-on program, enter the
command SIGNON followed by the appropriate library member name. For example:
SIGNON MYSIGN
establishes the library member named MYSIGN as your sign-on program. Once
established, the library member remains your sign-on program until you specify
another one or eliminate the existing one.
To eliminate a sign-on program, enter the SIGNON command with no operand, as in:
SIGNON
Eliminating a sign-on program does not delete the library member. It simply prevents
the commands comprising that member from being executed each time you sign on to
CA-Roscoe.

10.3 Signing Off
10.3 Signing Off

You can explicitly terminate your session at any time. You or your site may also use
the CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility to terminate a session that has been inactive
for a specified period of time.
If any existing AWS with a RECOVERABLE attribute contains data when you sign
off (or are automatically signed off), the contents of each AWS is saved as a library
member named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique ID.
10.3.1 Automatic Signoff

Sites have the option of using the CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility. When this
facility is activated, you are automatically signed off if your terminal is inactive for a
site-specified time period. Most sites set the time period so that few of their users are
affected.
To change the site-defined inactivity period:

■ Use the SET AUTOFF primary command, or
■ Change the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.
The time that you specify may not exceed your site-defined maximum. (Use the
STATUS SYSTEM command to display the site-defined default and maximum
inactivity time periods.)
If your site is not using this facility, it will be noted on the STATUS SYSTEM
display. You then have the option of activating and deactivating the facility using the
SET AUTOFF command.

10.3 Signing Off
10.3.2 Explicit Signoff

You have two ways to explicitly terminate your session.
■ To sign off CA-Roscoe, enter:
OFF
If you are at a VTAM site, you can use operands of this command to terminate a
session and begin another session, bypassing the VTAM logon screen and
CA-Roscoe sign-on screen. (The CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide,
Reference Summary Guide and HELP facility described the operands that can be
used with OFF.)
■ To sign off CA-Roscoe and cause the sign-on prompt screen to be displayed,
enter:
OFFON
If you are using multiple CA-Roscoe sign-on keys, you can use the OFFON
command to simultaneously sign off under one key and sign on under another. For
example, suppose you are using the two sign-on keys JONES and BROWN. If
you are currently signed on under JONES, you can terminate your session and
start a new session under BROWN by entering:
OFFON BROWN

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys
This chapter describes:

■ The default PF/PA key assignments distributed with CA-Roscoe.
■ How to use the default assignments, especially when supplying variable
information,
■ The processing hierarchy used to determine the PF/PA key assignment to be used
and then performing that assignment.
■ How to change your PF/PA key assignments.
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments

The following chart shows the PF and PA key assignments provided with CA-Roscoe.
You will notice that each key can have a maximum of four unique assignments.
Note: This manual assumes you are using the distributed default PF and PA key
assignments. Your site has the option of using these assignments or changing
them. You also have the option of changing the PF key assignments.
KEYS AWS DSN JOB LIB

PA1 Ignore Changes same same same
PA2 HELP PFKEYS same same same
ROSCOE
PF1 SPLIT same same same
PF2 SWAP same same same
PF3 END same same same
PF4 ATTACH DSN SELECT C1 ATTACH EXEC PFK4
C1 JOB * FILE
C1
PF5 ATTACH JOB EXEC PFK5 ATTACH EXEC PFK5
C1 C2 C3 JOB * C1 C2
C3
PF6 Reexecute same same same
PF7 SCROLL BACK same same same
C1 C2
PF8 SCROLL same same same
FORWARD C1
C2
PF9 GO same same same
PF10 SCROLL LEFT same same same
C1
PF11 SCROLL RIGHT same same same
C1
PF12 INPUT same same same
PF13 EXEC PFK13 same same same

KEYS AWS DSN JOB LIB

PF18 Reexecute same same same
PF19 SCROLL BACK same same same
C1 C2
PF20 SCROLL same same same
FORWARD C1
C2
PF21 GO same same same
PF22 SCROLL LEFT same same same
C1
PF23 SCROLL RIGHT same same same
C1
PF24 INPUT same same same

11.2 Using PF/PA Keys

A PF or PA key can have a maximum of four unique assignments. The assignment it
performs depends on the type of data currently attached. As illustrated in the preceding
chart a key may perform a different assignment depending on whether an AWS, a data
set, job output file or library member is attached.
11.2.1 Types of Assignments:

A PF or PA key assignment may be either fixed or variable.
■ Fixed Assignments:
A fixed assignment is complete unto itself. It needs no additional information to
perform its assigned function. For example, PF1 is assigned the fixed function:
SPLIT
When you press this key, your physical CA-Roscoe screen is split into two logical
screens. If PF1 were assigned the function:
SCROLL FORWARD 1= LINES
your display would be repositioned ten lines forward every time you pressed this
key.
■ Variable Assignments:
A variable assignment lets you supply variable information. Depending on the
particular assignment, this information may either be optional or required. Assume
that PF8 is assigned the function:
SCROLL FORWARD C1 C2
where C1 and C2 are Command Line variables. When this PF key is pressed, the
lines comprising the Command Area are read and any information found there is
assigned sequentially to the variables in the assignment. For example, if you
typed:
5 LINES
in the Command Area and then pressed PF8, the key is treated as though the fixed
assignment:
SCROLL FORWARD 5 LINES

This assignment also illustrates that you can supply:

– No Variable Input:
If no information is found in the Command Area and the assignment is valid
without further qualification, the function is performed (for example,
SCROLL FORWARD is a valid assignment and, thus, is performed). If it is
not, a message is issued.
– An Insufficient Amount of Information:
If an insufficient amount of information is found in the Command Area, the
available information is sequentially assigned to the variables and the
assignment is checked to see if it is valid. If it is, the function is performed
and any unused variables are ignored. For example, if the Command Area
contains:
MAX
when PF8 is pressed, the key is treated as though it had the assignment:
SCROLL FORWARD MAX
Since this is a valid assignment, it is performed. The unused variable (C2) is
ignored.
When using PF/PA keys with variable assignments, you can:

■ Terminate Variable Input:
You can use the command delimiter to end variable input. For example, suppose
you want to scroll to the bottom of the active AWS and renumber its contents.
You can do this by typing:
MAX & RENUMBER
in the Command Area where the ampersand (&) is the command delimiter. The
assignment is treated as:
SCROLL FORWARD MAX
since the command delimiter terminates variable input. Thus, RENUMBER is
recognized as a command and is not treated as the value of the variable C2.
■ Include Spaces in a Variable:
To include a space with a value, bound the value with delimiters. For example,
assume that PF8 is assigned the function:
SCROLL FORWARD C1
and you want to reposition the display by five lines. You can do this by typing:
'5 LINES'
in the Command Area and pressing PF8. For the assignment, 5 LINES is treated
as a single value; when the assignment is performed, it is treated as SCROLL
FORWARD 5 LINES.
■ Enter Variables and Other Commands/Data:

When a PF/PA key with a variable assignment is pressed, the entire Command
Area is read to build a valid PF/PA key assignment. Thus, all of the information
needed by a PF/PA key must appear on the same line and precede any other
command or data.
When an assignment includes variables, the combined length of the assignment
after the variables have been replaced by values plus any additional
commands/data found in the Command Area must not exceed 255 characters in
length.

11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy

Two actions are taken when you press a PA or PF key, where:
1. The assignment to be used is determined.
■ If you are currently using a Monitor command that has subcommands (like
DISPLAY) and there are special site assignments for that Monitor, the
appropriate site-defined function is selected. If there are no site-defined
assignments, the user-defined function is selected.
■ If you are not using such a Monitor command, the key is checked to see if
there is a user-defined function. If there is, that function is selected. If there is
not, the site-assigned function is selected.
2. The assignment is performed.
■ If a PA key is pressed, the selected assignment is performed.
■ If a PF key is pressed, the Command Area is read for input, if needed, and
for any additional commands that may be entered there. The commands in the
assignment (plus those entered from the terminal) are then executed.
The assignment (and associated commands) are executed until:
■ It is successfully completed.
■ The first command that causes an implicit or explicit pause (like DISPLAY
with MORE or ATTACH). Any unexecuted commands are displayed in the
Command Area of the screen. To resume execution of those commands, press
the ENTER key.
Note: If the pause was caused by an RPF program containing a panel, the
panel overrides the display of unexecuted commands (the unexecuted
commands are lost).
■ An error is encountered. Any unexecuted commands are displayed. To resume
execution, correct, change or delete the command in error and press the
ENTER key. (See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for
additional information about correcting invalid/incomplete commands.

11.4 Changing Assignments

Caution PA KEY Warning
When a PA key is pressed, 3270 hardware limitations prevent CA-Roscoe from
knowing: 1) any of the changes made to the screen, and 2) the current position of
the cursor when split screens are in effect.
It is strongly recommended that you do not change the default PA key

assignments. If you do change the defaults, only commands can be assigned to PA
keys (no functions may be assigned). Exercise care when assigning commands,
especially if you frequently split screens. Examples:
■ If UPDATE * is assigned to a PA key that is pressed, the command is issued
but changes made to the screen are not applied to the library member (or to
that AWS).
■ If you assign DETACH JOB to a PA key and then split the screen to attach
two jobs, the wrong job may be detached when you press the PA key. (The
last known cursor position is used (for example, where the cursor was placed
for the last terminal write). CA-Roscoe does not know if you moved the
cursor to a different screen.)
You have the option of changing any of the PF/PA key assignments provided by your
site. New assignments:
■ Can be established at any time during a terminal session.
■ Remain in effect until you sign off or change them. If you decide that you always
want certain assignments to be in effect, you can add the commands establishing
those assignments to your signon program. Then, each time you sign on, the
commands are executed and the PF/PA functions are automatically reassigned for
you.

11.4.1 Syntax
The syntax to assign a function to a PF or PA key is:
──LET──┬────────┬──┬─PAv─┬──=──'string'───────────────────────
└─scope.─┘ └─PFv─┘
scope Qualifies the operational range of this key. If omitted, the operation
applies to all forms of attached data. If specified, it must be one of
the following:
AWS. Designates that the operation affects only the active
AWS.
DSN. Designates that the operation affects only the attached
data set object.
JOB. Designates that the operation affects only the attached
job output.
LIB. Designates that the operation affects only the attached
library member.
PAv PA key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a value
between 1 and 10.
PFv PF key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a value
between 1 and 24.
'string' Function to be performed. It must be delimited by apostrophes. It
may contain Command Line and/or RPF variables and, after the
variables have been replaced by their values, must not exceed 255
characters in length. (See the next section for additional information
about assigning functions.)

11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions

This section describes:
■ assignment limitations, and
■ assignment techniques.
11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations:
PA Keys You can assign one or more commands or one of the designated keyword
functions of a PA key.
PF Keys You can assign one or more commands or any keyword function to a PF
key. When assigning commands and keyword functions, you may include
multiple commands but only one function.
The keyword functions are described in the next section.
11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques:
■ Assigning a Single Fixed Value:

The value to be assigned must be delimited by apostrophes ('), as in:
LET PF16 = 'SPLIT'
The function assigned to PF16 will be performed whenever the key is pressed.
You can qualify the assignment so that it applies to a specific form of attached
data. To do this, include the appropriate qualifier (like AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB)
with the PF key designation, as in:
LET AWS.PF16 = 'SET DISPLAY AWS FLIP NUMX'
Now, when you press PF16, the type of data currently attached is determined. If it
is:
– The active AWS: you will bounce the display between an unprotected
sequence number field and no sequence number field.
– Any other form of attached data: the screen will be split.

■ Assigning Multiple Values:

When multiple commands are assigned to a PF/PA key, the commands must be
separated by a slash (/). For example, if you assigned:
LET JOB.PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY JOB NONUM/SET MODE BASIC/SET ;'
and then press this key when job output is attached, the display will exclude
sequence numbers, the character translation mode will be basic and the semicolon
(;) will be the command delimiter.
Note: The slash (/) is the default separator character. You can change this
character using the SET PFKDELIM command or through the modifiable
STATUS SESSION display.
■ Assigning Commands With String Operands:
Commands that have string operands fall into one of two categories, 1) those
requiring that the string always be delimited, and 2) those requiring that the string
be delimited only if it could be confused for a keyword operand of that command.
When assigning commands with string operands, it is a good practice to delimit
the string. Note that the delimiter may be any special character except an
apostrophe, the PF/PA key assignment delimiter or the command delimiter. In the
following example, the logical not sign (¬) is used to delimit the string JOB. (If
the delimiters where omitted, JOB would be treated as a keyword operand of the
FIRST command.)
LET PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY NONUM/FIRST ¬JOB¬'
■ Assigning RPF Programs:
You can assign a RPF program name to a PF or PA key, as illustrated by:
LET PF9 = 'EXEC AAA.WIDGET'
or
LET PF9 = 'AAA.WIDGET'
or
LET PF9 = 'WIDGET'
If the RPF program name matches the name of a primary or Monitor command,
use either the EXEC command or slash (/) to cause explicit program invocation.
(If the program is in an Execution Library, the slash must be used.) The
following assignment shows how you can renumber the active AWS and explicitly
execute a program named FETCH when you press PF10:
LET PF1= = 'RENUMBER//FETCH'
Remember that the slashes in this example are serving two purposes. The first
slash separates the commands; the second slash explicitly invokes RPF program
execution.
■ Assigning Variable Values:
You can include Command Line and RPF variables in a PF key assignment. RPF
variables can be included in a PA key assignment.
– Defining Variables:

When variables are used within an assignment, the assignment must begin
with a special character (a plus sign in these examples) that is also used to
delimit the variable portion of the assignment, as in:
LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH' or
LET PF5 = '+RENUMBER/SAVE +C1+'
If you omit the special character, the variable is not recognized. (In both
cases, C1 is assumed to be a library member name, not a Command Line
variable.)
Caution IMPORTANT:
When variables are used in an assignment, the length of the assignment,
after all variable substitution has been performed, plus any other
commands/data specified in the Command Area may not exceed 255
characters.
– Using Command Line Variables

You can assign a maximum of eight Command Line variables (named C1
through C8) to any PF key. Command Line variables cannot be assigned to
PA keys.
If you use Command Line variables in an assignment, you must provide
variable information in the Command Area of the screen. For example,
assume the following assignment is in effect:
LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH'
When PF4 is pressed, the Command Area is read for the needed variable
information. If WIDGET appears in the Command Area, the assignment is
treated as though the following commands were entered:
FETCH WIDGET & ATTACH
When you include multiple Command Line variables in an assignment, each
one must be delimited by the same special character, as in:
LET AWS.PF4 ='+ATTACH +C1+ +C2+ +C3+ +C4+'
So, when PF4 is pressed, the values found in the Command Area are assigned
sequentially to the variables. A value need not be supplied for all of the
variables in an assignment. If the supplied values form a valid command, the
remaining variables are ignored. For example, assume that the preceding
definition is in effect and the Command Area contains:
JOB Q
This assignment is treated as though the command ATTACH JOB * was
entered. Since this is a valid command, the variables C3 and C4 are ignored
and the command is executed.
The same principles apply when using any of the predefined keyword
functions instead of, or with, commands. For example, assume the following
definition is in effect:
LET PF12 = '+SCROLL +C1+ C2+ +C3+'

With this definition, you may enter any of the following:

FORWARD
BACKWARD HALF
FORWARD 5 LINES
■ RPF Variables
Any RPF system or storage variable can be included in a PF or PA key definition.
When you use a storage variable (like L1 or P12), it must be assigned a value
before you press the associated PF key. For example, assume the following
definition is in effect:
LET AWS.PF5 = '+FETCH +L1+'
If L1 contains no value or a value that is inappropriate for the assignment, an
error message is displayed.
11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions

This section describes the keywords that you can use to designate:
1. The location to which the display is to be scrolled, or
2. An action that is to be performed.
When assigning these keywords, they must always be delimited, as in:

LET AWS.PF1 = 'SCROLL BACK'
11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments
The following functions can be used to position the display. Unless noted otherwise:
■ These functions can only be assigned to PF keys, and
■ Any changes made to the current frame are applied.
Note: A frame is equivalent to the number of lines in the Execution Area. (Page is a
synonym for frame.)
POSITION BOTTOM The display is positioned so that it ends with the last
displayable line.
POSITION TOP The display is positioned so that it begins with the first
displayable line.
SCROLL BACK The display is positioned backward based on the value
specified in the SCRL field of the System Information
Line. If the number of remaining lines is less than the
SCRL field value, the action is identical to POSITION
TOP.
SCROLL BACK Csr The display is positioned so that the line at which the
cursor is positioned is the last displayed line. If the
number of preceding lines is less than the size of the
Execution Area, the display is unchanged.

SCROLL BACK [v] FRames or SCROLL BACK [v] Pages

The display is positioned backward one or v frames. If
less than vframes precede the current frame, the action
is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Full The display is positioned backward one line less than
the total number of lines in the current frame (the first
line of the new display is the last line of the old). If
less than a full frame of lines precede the current frame,
the action is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Half The display is positioned back one-half frame. If less
than a half frame of lines precede the current frame, the
action is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK [v] [Lines]
The display is positioned backward one or v lines. If
less than vlines precede the current frame, the action is
identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Max Display positioning is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL FORWARD The display is positioned forward based on the value
specified in the SCRL field of the System Information
Line. If the number of remaining lines is less than the
SCRL field value, the action is identical to POSITION
BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Csr The display is positioned forward so that the line at
which the cursor is positioned is the first displayed line.
SCROLL FORWARD [v] FRames or SCROLL FORWARD [v] Pages
The display is positioned forward one or v frames. If
less than vframes remain, the action is identical to
POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Full The display is positioned forward one line less than the
total number of lines in the current frame (the last line
of the new display is the first line of the old). If less
than a full frame of lines remain, the action is identical
to POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Half The display is positioned forward one-half frame. If less
than a half frame of lines remain, the action is identical
to POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD [v] [Lines]
The display is positioned forward one or v lines. If less
than v lines remain, the action is identical to POSITION
BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Max Display positioning is identical to POSITION
BOTTOM.

SCROLL LEFT The extent of the left shift is determined by subtracting

the left margin value from the right margin value, as
specified in the COLS field of the System Information
Line. This value is then subtracted from the left margin
and the display is repositioned.
SCROLL LEFT v The display is shifted left that number of positions. (It
cannot be shifted beyond column 1.) The value must be
positive and greater than 0. If zero is specified, no
shifting occurs.
SCROLL LEFT MAX The display is shifted left to begin with the first position
of the line.
SCROLL RIGHT The extent of the right shift is determined by subtracting
the left margin value from the right margin value, as
specified in the COLS field of the System Information
Line. This value is then added to the right margin and
the frame is repositioned.
SCROLL RIGHT v The display is shifted right that number of positions. (It
cannot be shifted beyond the rightmost margin for the
type of data being displayed; for example, 255 for an
AWS.) The value must be positive and greater than 0.
If zero is specified, no shifting occurs.
SCROLL RIGHT MAX The display is shifted right to end with the last position
of the line (for example, 255 when an AWS is attached;
LRECL value when a data set is attached).
11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments
The following functions control split-screen processing. They can only be assigned to
PF keys.
END Split-screen processing is terminated; the two logical screens are
returned to a single physical screen.
SPLIT Split-screen processing is invoked; the physical screen is divided into
two logical screens.
SWAP Active and inactive split screens are interchanged; the cursor is moved
from one logical screen to the other.

The following functions can be assigned to a PF or PA key:

INPUT As a PA key assignment, changes made to the current frame are
ignored. Blank lines are inserted before the first line displayed in the
current screen.
Caution: After entering data, press a PF key or the ENTER key. If a
PA key is pressed, all inserted lines will be lost.
As a PF key assignment, changes made to the current frame are applied.
If the cursor is in the Execution Area, blank lines are inserted after the
line at which the cursor is positioned. If the cursor is not in the
Execution Area, blank lines are inserted before the first line displayed
in the current screen.
REPEAT Changes made to the current frame are ignored. The attached data
remains attached.
As a PF key assignment, commands found in the Command Area are
executed.
As a PA key assignment, commands found in the Command Area are
ignored if this function is assigned to a PA key.
The remaining functions can only be assigned to PF keys:

+ The last executed command is redisplayed.
- The last executed command is reexecuted.
ENTER The display is positioned based on the function assigned to the ENTER
key. Normally, the display retains its position.
QUIT Changes made to the current frame are ignored; attached data are
detached. Commands entered in the Command Area are executed.
Note: : See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for information

about + and -.

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids
This chapter describes the user documentation and online tools that are provided with
CA-Roscoe.
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12-1

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation
12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation

In addition to this manual, each CA-Roscoe user should have access to:
■ CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for a detailed description of all CA-Roscoe
commands.
■ CA-Roscoe Getting Started Guide for an introduction to CA-Roscoe oriented to:
1) non-programmers, and 2) individuals familiar with IBM TSO ISPF/PDF.
■ CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide for a description of the ROSCOE Programming
Facility (RPF).
Finally, each user should have a copy of the CA-Roscoe Reference Summary and,
optionally, a copy of the RPF Reference Summary.

12.2 The HELP Facility

The online HELP facility is a quick and easy way to get information about CA-Roscoe
commands and facilities. For example, to display information about the SAVE
command, enter:
HELP SAVE
The following example illustrates part of the information that is displayed.

HELP Command: Sample Display
7 _
8
>
> HLP(...HELP...) SCROLL FULL DISPLAY ==1 =79
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
SAVE
Function: Places contents of active AWS into library as a

member.
Syntax: SAVE mem < p<q> > < 'string' >

< NOSEQ/SEQ <s<l>>/COBOL >
< SHARED/EXECONLY/RESTRICTED >
mem Name to be assigned to member being created.

Must comply with naming conventions and not
currently exist in user's library.
p First line of AWS to be saved.
. . .
U V
As with all HELP displays, the information presented includes:
Function A one-sentence description of the command or facility.
Syntax The syntax of the command.
Level List of HELP members that provide additional and/or related
information about the command or facility.
The following figure identifies the PF keys that are used to position within and
between HELP displays.
Display PF Keys Action

If there is more information PF7/PF19 Scrolls to start of display.
available than fits on the
current screen
PF8/PF20 Scrolls forward.
If the display indicates that PF10/PF22 Scrolls to prior level.
level information is available
PF11/PF23 Scrolls to next level.

To obtain information about the HELP facility itself, enter the command:
HELP
Other HELP displays that you may want to review are:

HELP MESSAGE x Displays a description of the designated messages (like HELP
MESSAGE CMD01).
HELP PFKEYS Displays information about: 1) PF/PA key assignments, 2)
how to use the default assignments, and 3) how to change the
assignments.
HELP NEW Displays information about the current release of CA-Roscoe.

12.3 The Online Tutorial
12.3 The Online Tutorial

The Tutorial provides a way for you to learn more about CA-Roscoe. It simulates an
actual CA-Roscoe terminal session and introduces the most frequently used CA-Roscoe
commands and facilities.
The Tutorial presents you with a menu of 12 independent learning modules. You can
complete the modules in order, use only certain modules, or vary the order in which
you complete the modules.
To obtain more information about the Tutorial, enter:

HELP TUTORIAL
The resulting HELP display explains how to invoke the Tutorial at your company.

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . . . 17-1
Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . . 18-1

18.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT . . 22-3
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . . 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS
When you sign on to CA-Roscoe, an AWS (or Active Work Space) is automatically
allocated for your use. If you split the screen, a second AWS is automatically allocated
for that subsession (a split screen appears). These AWSs are named ROSn, where n is
a unique identifier. (The name of the AWS that you are currently working with is
shown at the right side of the System Information Line.) All data entry and editing
that you do during your CA-Roscoe session is done in one of these temporary work
areas.
Note: See Chapter 8, “Selecting a Screen Format” on page 8-1 for information about
the CA-Roscoe split screen facility.
You can place data in an AWS by entering it from the terminal or copying it from the
CA-Roscoe library, an attached job output file or an OS data set. After editing the
data, you can store it as a member in the CA-Roscoe library, print a copy of it at a
328x-type or system printer, submit it to the operating system, write it to a data set or
delete it.
The data in an AWS is stored in the form of variable length records not exceeding 255
characters in length. (Each line in an AWS is considered to be a record.) These
records are kept in order by six-digit sequence numbers that are created and
maintained externally from your data. The maximum number of records that you can
have in an AWS is set by your site management.
Any data remaining in an AWS when you sign off is automatically saved for you if
the AWS has a RECOVERABLE attribute. The data is saved in the CA-Roscoe library
as a member. One member is created for each recoverable AWS that you are using.
The members are named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique identifier. These members
are also created in the event of a network shutdown or system failure. The next time
you sign back on to CA-Roscoe, you can use these members to restore your AWS(s).
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal
13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal

The rest of this chapter describes how you can:
■ Attach the currently active or a specific AWS.
■ Bring data from a variety of sources into the AWS.
■ Change the name and/or attributes of any existing AWS.
■ Create one or more AWSs.
■ Detach the active AWS.
■ Discard (remove) an existing AWS.
■ Position the display within the active AWS.
■ Reattach the active AWS.
■ Select an existing AWS for display.

13.2 Attaching an AWS
13.2 Attaching an AWS

The ATTACH command is used to bind an existing AWS to the terminal so that all or
part of its contents can be displayed and modified.
To view the entire contents of the currently active AWS, enter:

ATTACH
To view the entire contents of a specific AWS and make it the active AWS, you might
enter:
ATTACH AWS SAMPLE
where SAMPLE is the name assigned to an existing AWS.
When working with the currently active AWS, you can use ATTACH to:
■ Limit the display to a particular range of lines. For example, to view only lines
200 through 800 of the currently active AWS, you would enter:
ATTACH 2== 8==
■ Begin the display with the first occurrence of a particular character string. For
example, assume that the active AWS contains a COBOL program and you want
to begin the display with the line containing PROCEDURE DIVISION. To do
this, enter:
ATTACH 'PROCEDURE DIVISION'
The display begins with the first line in the active AWS that contains the specified
string. (Note that the string specified with ATTACH must be enclosed by a special
character that is not found within the string itself.)

13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS
13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS

You can place data into an AWS by:
■ Entering data directly from the terminal - using the commands described in
Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS” on page 18-1.
■ Copying data into the AWS - using the commands described in Chapter 15,
“AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” on page 15-1, you can copy
data from:
– Another AWS.
– The current screen display.
– A library member.
– An attached data set object.
– An attached job output file.
Also refer to Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on
page 27-1 and Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” on
page 34-1 for additional commands that can be used to place data within an AWS.

13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes
13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes

You can change the name or attribute(s) of any existing AWS using the commands:
■ RENAME - to change the name of an existing AWS, as in:
RENAME AWS SAMPLE TEST
which renames the AWS named SAMPLE to TEST.
■ ALTER AWS - to change the attributes of an existing AWS, as in:
ALTER AWS TEST SPLIT ALTERAWS
which discards the AWS named TEST when the screen in which the CREATE
command was entered is terminated. (Attributes that are not included with the
ALTER command remain unchanged. See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on
page 13-6 for additional information about AWS attributes.
You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command to
rename or change AWS attributes. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing
AWS Information” on page 17-1 for details.

13.5 Creating an AWS

When you sign on to CA-Roscoe, you automatically have two AWSs assigned to you
for your session. (Their names are ROSn, where n is a unique identifier.)
You can use the CREATE command to name and define the attributes of one or more
additional AWSs. The maximum number of additional AWSs that you can work with
is set by site management.
To create an AWS, you might enter:

CREATE AWS SAMPLE
where SAMPLE is the name assigned to this AWS. You can use almost any one- to
eight-character name that conforms to CA-Roscoe member naming conventions. (The
restricted names are FLIP, NEXT, PREV, ROSn, SYSn and TMPn (where n is a
numeric value); B, F, N, P, T, and R are also restricted.)
Since no attributes are defined with the CREATE command in the preceding example,
the default values are used. The attributes that you can assign to an AWS (and their
default values) are:
■ RECOVERABLE or NONRECOVERABLE
These define whether the contents of the AWS is to be backed up on disk and
recovered in the event of a session or system failure. The default is
RECOVERABLE.
■ SESSION, SPLIT, RPF or LEVEL:
These define the retention period for the AWS, where:
SESSION Discards the AWS when you end your session. (Default)
SPLIT Discards the AWS when the screen in which the AWS was
created is terminated.
RPF Discards the AWS when the RPF application containing the
CREATE command terminates (In this case, application refers
to the initiating RPF program and all of its subordinate RPF
programs.)
LEVEL Discards the AWS when the RPF program containing the
CREATE command terminates.
■ ACTIVE or INACTIVE
These define whether the AWS is to become the active AWS for the screen
containing the command. The default is ACTIVE.

■ IMPLICIT or EXPLICIT
These define how the AWS is to be identified when a SELECT command is
issued. The default is IMPLICIT. (See 13.10, “Selecting an AWS” on page 13-14
for additional information.)
■ NEW, REUSE or RETAIN
These define the type of AWS being created, where:
NEW Indicates this is a new AWS. (Default)
REUSE Reuses an existing AWS after deleting its contents.
RETAIN Reuses an existing AWS while retaining its contents.
The attributes described thus far relate only to an AWS that you create. Once created,
each AWS has its own attributes that affect how data are displayed and/or handled. To
display all of the attributes associated with each existing AWS, use the command:
STATUS AWS
Also see Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on page 17-1
for a description of all AWS attributes.

13.6 Detaching an AWS
13.6 Detaching an AWS

The currently active AWS remains attached to the terminal until you:
■ CREATE another AWS with an ACTIVE attribute.
■ ATTACH or SELECT another existing AWS.
■ Execute a command (like ATTACH LIB) that causes output to the Execution
Area.
■ Execute the DETACH command, explicitly releasing the AWS.
■ Execute the DISCARD command, explicitly removing the current AWS.
■ Press the CLEAR key.

13.7 Discarding an AWS
13.7 Discarding an AWS

You can remove a specific AWS by:
■ Explicitly identifying the AWS via the DISCARD command, as in:
DISCARD AWS TEST
where the AWS named TEST is removed and its contents deleted.
■ Implicitly removing it when activating another AWS, as in:
SELECT SAMPLE DISCARD
where the current AWS is discarded when the AWS named SAMPLE is activated.
You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command to
discard one or more AWSs. (See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS
Information” on page 17-1 for details.)
Finally, the retention attribute associated with an AWS also controls when that AWS
will be discarded. For example, if you create an AWS with the retention attribute of
SPLIT, that AWS will be discarded when the split screen in which the CREATE
command was executed is terminated. (See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for
additional information.)

13.8 Positioning the Display

This section describes how you can position the display of the currently active AWS:
■ Based on the position of an internal pointer.
■ To a specific line by using primary and line commands.
13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer

CA-Roscoe maintains internal pointers that are positioned to a line based on the
execution of a command. While pointer positioning occurs with all forms of attached
data, it is most frequently used when manipulating the contents of an AWS. For
example, if you enter the command DELETE 500, the AWS pointer is positioned to
the line following the deleted line. You can then reference that line by replacing a
command's line number operand with an asterisk (*). To illustrate how you might use
pointer positioning, assume that you enter the commands:
DELETE 6== 9==
COPY Q 21==
ATTACH Q,,
The resulting display will begin with line 2101 because:

■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the line
following the last deleted line (the line following 900).
■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned is then copied after line 2100.
The pointer is reset to the last copied line (the new line 2101).
■ The AWS contents are then redisplayed, beginning with the line at which the
pointer is currently positioned.
This example assumes that all three commands appear in the Command Area when the
ENTER key is pressed. The results would be different if the active AWS is attached
and the commands are entered one at a time, where:
■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the line
following the last deleted line. The data are then redisplayed. The redisplay of
attached data causes the pointer to be positioned to the first displayed line.
■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned (the first line of the active
AWS) is then copied after line 2100. The data are again redisplayed. Again, the
AWS pointer is positioned to the first displayed line.
■ The AWS contents are then explicitly redisplayed. The display begins with the
first line of the active AWS.

When using the asterisk (*) to reference the current pointer position, you can qualify it
with a positive or negative value, as in:
*-5 References the line that is five lines after the current pointer position.
*+5 References the line that is five lines before the current pointer position.
For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide. When
applicable, the command descriptions include the position of the pointer after the
command is executed.
13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines

This section describes how you can position the display to a specific line. Also see
Chapter 20, “AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS” on page 20-1 for information
about positioning the display to begin with a line that contains a specific character
string.
13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands
If the AWS that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal screen,
you can reposition the display by:
■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys.
■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to reposition
the display to begin with line 2500, you would enter:
POINT AWS LINE 25==
To position to the first or last line of the display, you would enter:
POINT AWS LINE T or POINT AWS LINE B
When browsing the STATUS AWS display, entering an * (asterisk) in the first
unprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that
entry.

13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands
The line commands shown in the following figure can be used to reposition the
displayed data. Simply enter the appropriate line command in the sequence number
field of the display.
COMMAND ACTION AFTER COMMAND EXECUTED
v Display begins with line v (display begins with line 500 if that value is
typed in the sequence number field of any line).
* Display begins with the line that contained the *. Can be qualified
with:
+v Display begins v number of lines after the line that contained the
command.
-v Display begins v number of lines before the line that contained
the command.
+P [v] Display scrolled forward one or v number of pages, where a page equals
the number of lines in the Execution Area.
-P [v] Display scrolled backward one or v number of pages.
T+ Display begins with the first line of the active AWS. Can be qualified
with:
v Display begins v number of lines after the first line of the active
AWS.
B- Display contains the last line of the active AWS. Can be qualified with:
v Display begins v number of lines before the last line of the
active AWS.

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS
13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS

At any time during your terminal session, you can attach another AWS, a data set
object, job output, or a library member/selection list. After browsing that data, you can
return to the AWS. For example, the following screens show how you can ATTACH a
library member, displays it so you can browse it, and from there you can reATTACH
the data you have been viewing.
7 ATTACH INVLIST
8
>
> AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..
...... ============================== T O P ========================
=====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
=====2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE.
=====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
7 8
ATTACH AWS )
>
> LIB(XYZ.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..
============================== T O P ========================
===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT.
7 >
8
> AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..
============================== T O P ========================
=====2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE.
When you reATTACH the AWS, the display begins with the first line of the prior
display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:
■ Use the AWS operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to
begin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST AWS /DD/
■ Use the AWS operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display
with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:
INCL AWS /DD/
■ Use the AWS operand of the POINT command to begin the display with a
specific line, as in:
POINT AWS LINE 72==

13.10 Selecting an AWS
13.10 Selecting an AWS

You can use the SELECT command to activate and display an existing AWS. The
AWS can be activated by:
■ Name. For example, to activate the AWS named SAMPLE, you would enter:
SELECT SAMPLE
Note: If the AWS was created with an EXPLICIT attribute, you can only
activate it by explicitly specifying its name with the SELECT command.
■ Relative position, if it was created with the IMPLICIT attribute. For example, to
display the next or prior AWS, enter:
SELECT AWS NEXT
or
SELECT AWS PREV
To bounce the display between the currently active AWS and the the previously
active AWS, enter:
SELECT AWS FLIP
Additional operands of the SELECT command allow you to:

■ Discard the AWS you are currently viewing when you activate a different AWS,
as in:
SELECT AWS SAMPLE DISCARD
where the AWS you are currently viewing is discarded, and the AWS named
SAMPLE is activated.
■ Retain the attributes associated with the current AWS when you activate a
different AWS, as in:
SELECT AWS SAMPLE NOATTR
where the AWS named SAMPLE is activated and its attributes are overridden by
the attributes of the AWS that had been current.
■ Designate which internal pointer is to be used when an AWS is activated. One
pointer is used by the SELECT command; the other pointer marks a line affected
by the execution of a command. By default, the SELECT-related pointer is used.
To override this pointer, you would enter:
SELECT SAMPLE NOPOINT
where the resulting display begins with the line at which the command-related
pointer is positioned.

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS

■ Add a character string to one or more lines using the FILL, PREFIX, and SUFFIX
primary commands.
■ Reorder specific records of an AWS.
■ Edit one or more characters within one or more lines using the XLATE primary
command or the XL, XLB, or XLT line commands.
■ Edit character strings within one or more lines using the EDIT primary command
or an E, EB, EE, or ET line command. (You can also trace lines affected by an
edit operation.)
Note: At most sites, data that you add or change in an AWS is automatically
translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (the word division is
translated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that you change is to
be treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional
information.
Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings
14.1 Adding Character Strings

You can add a character string at the beginning (using the PREFIX command),
anywhere within (using the FILL command) or at the end (using the SUFFIX
command) of one or more lines within the active AWS.
14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line

The FILL command can be used to insert a character string into specific columns of
one or more lines comprising the active AWS.
To limit the operation to specific columns, include the appropriate column numbers
before the string, as in:
FILL 73 79 'INVLIST'
where columns 73 through 79 of every line in the active AWS will contain the string
INVLIST. If column numbers are omitted, the column boundaries currently in effect
are used. Thus, if the current column boundaries are 1 through 80 and you enter:
FILL 'QQQ'
columns 1 through 80 of every line in the active AWS will contain ***. (If the column
range is greater than the string, the string is repeated.)
Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the execution of
the command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional
information.
To limit the operation to specific lines, specify the appropriate line numbers after the
string, as in:
FILL 73 79 'INVLIST' 1== 12==
14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line

When using the PREFIX or SUFFIX command, the default is to prefix or suffix every
line within the active AWS with the designated string, as in:
PREFIX 'TESTONLY'
Both PREFIX and SUFFIX allow you to limit their operation to a specific range of
lines by including the appropriate line numbers after the string, as in:
SUFFIX 'SAMPLE' 3== 9==
Neither operation is performed if the result would cause a line to exceed 255
characters.

14.2 Reordering AWS Records
14.2 Reordering AWS Records

This section describes how you can use the ORDER (AWS) command to reorder the
contents of an AWS.
Use the ORDER command to invoke the CA-Roscoe internal sort routine. Reorder
specific records of the AWS in descending order, as in:
ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES
If more than one AWS is active, specify the name of the AWS to be reordered, as in:
ORDER AWS TMP2 COL 1 7 DES
You can reorder multiple groups of AWS records. Specify the columns to be
reordered, and the sorting order (ASCending or DEScending). If no order is specified,
the data will be sorted in ASCending order. You must use the word 'AND' (or its
character equivalent) to separate the sorting boundaries, as in:
ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES AND COL 17 24
Note: The word 'AND' can also be represented by the '&' (ampersand) or '@' (the at
sign).
If sites or users set the '&' as a command delimiter, it will override the sort
syntax and function as a delimiter. To use '&' within the ORDER command,
the command delimiter must be set to another character. See 6.5, “Synopsis of
Session Attributes” on page 6-15 for information on changing the command
delimiter.
A maximum of six order criteria are permitted. When sorting multiple column groups,
the sort is done in order of the columns specified. So, in the example above, columns
1 through 7 are reordered, and then columns 17 through 24 are sorted with respect to
the first sort.

14.3 Editing Characters

This section describes how you can use primary or line commands to change one or
more characters.
Note: If you want to change a string of characters, see 14.4, “Editing Character
Strings” on page 14-6.
14.3.1 Using a Primary Command

Use the XLATE command to replace one character with another, as in:
XLATE /A/B/
where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with the character B. Multiple
characters can be specified as search and replacement characters, as in:
XLATE /A1Q/B9 /
where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with a B, every 1 is replaced

with a 9, and every * is replaced with a space.
Note: The search and replacement characters must be delimited by a special character
that is not one of the search or replace characters.
You can limit an operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the columns to
be searched before the character(s). Specify the line numbers to be searched after the
character(s), as in:
XLATE 2= 75 /-/ / 1== 92==
where only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100 through 9200 are to be
affected.
Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the execution of
that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional
information.

14.3.2 Using Line Commands

The line commands used to perform character replacement are:
XLB Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) on
every line beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing
through the last line in the active AWS.
XLT Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) on
every line beginning with the first line of the active AWS and
continuing through the line on which the command is entered.
XL [v] Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s)
beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing for v
number of lines. If no number is specified, only the line containing the
command is changed.
Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the search
and replacement character(s) in the data portion of the same line. As illustrated in the
following screen, the strings must be delimited.
7 8
>
> AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
==61== ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED
XLB2== '/'- '
==63== A12984-XX =9/14/91 12/15/91
==64== A23563-XX =1/=4/92 =2/=1/92
==65== A45887-XX =6/2=/92 =9/19/92
The following screen shows the result of the edit.
7 8
>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
==61== ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED
==62==
==63== A12984-XX =9-14-91 12-15-91
==64== A23563-XX =1-=4-92 =2-=1-92
==65== A45887-XX =6-2=-92 =9-19-92
Once search and replacement characters are specified, they are remembered until you
change them. This allows you to selectively change specific occurrences of a
character.

14.4 Editing Character Strings

You can change a character string within the active AWS using primary or line
commands.
Note: If you want to change one or more single characters, see section 14.3, “Editing
Characters” on page 14-4.

Use the EDIT command to replace one character string with another string. The first
string specified with the command is the original (or search) string. The second string
is the replacement string. For example, to replace every occurrence of the string
INVENTORY-BALANCE with the string INVENTORY-AMOUNT, you would
enter:
EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/
The character strings must be delimited by a special character not found within either
of the strings.
You can limit an edit operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the columns
to be searched before the character strings. Specify the line numbers to be searched
after the strings. For example:
EDIT 2= 75 /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/ 1== 92==
causes the command to affect only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100
through 9200.
Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of
that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional
information.
By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the edit string. To
avoid possible confusion, you can qualify the string with the keyword WORD,
BEGIN, PREFIX, EMBED, SUFFIX, or END. (See Chapter 20, “AWS: Locating
Data Within an AWS” for additional information about these qualifiers.) For example,
if you enter:
EDIT /THE/AN/ WORD
the search is for every occurrence of THE that is preceded and followed by a
non-alphanumeric character. If you omitted the qualifier, words such as OTHER and
THERE would match the search string and would be changed.

In addition to replacing a character string, you can also use EDIT to:
■ Delete a character string from one or more lines.
By defining a null replacement string, every occurrence of the search string will
be deleted. For example, to delete every occurrence of the string
INVENTORY-BALANCE from the active AWS, you would specify:
EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE//
Lines containing the string are not deleted; only the string is deleted from those
lines.
■ Replace the entire contents of one or more lines.
Defining a null search string, the contents of every line will be overlaid with the
replacement string. For example, to replace the current contents of lines 1800
through 2000 with the string FILLER, you would enter:
EDIT //FILLER/ 18== 2===

The edit line commands are:
EB Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line
beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing through the last
line in the active AWS.
ET Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line
beginning with the first line of the active AWS and continuing through the
line on which the command is entered.
EE Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line within
the block of lines. (An EE must appear in the sequence number field of the
first and last line of the range.)
E [v] Replaces the search string with the replacement string beginning with the line
on which the string is entered and continuing for v number of lines. If no
number is specified, only the line containing the command is changed.
Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the search
and replacement character strings in the data portion of the same line. The strings
must be delimited.

7 8
>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....
...... ============================= T O P =======================
EB 1== /PART-NUMBER-MSTR/PART-NUMBER-OUT/_
Once edit strings are specified, they are remembered until you change them by
entering another edit line command. This allows you to selectively change specific
occurrences of a string. For example, assume you only want to change certain
occurrences of the string THIS to THAT. Once you have specified the string, you can
scroll through the active AWS, entering the appropriate edit line command where
needed.
14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines

You can keep track of lines changed by an edit operation using the SET EDITCHNG
command or the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.
Using the primary command to illustrate, you can activate the tracking facility by
entering:
SET EDITCHNG ON
When the facility is active, any subsequent EDIT primary command or E, EB, or ET
line command causes a change indicator to appear in the sequence number field of
affected lines. The indicator remains in the sequence number field until you:
■ Replace the contents of the active AWS,
■ Issue the RESET line command or SET EDITCHNG RESET command, or
■ Enter the SET EDITCHNG OFF command, or deactivate the facility via the
STATUS SESSION display.
The following examples illustrate how you might use this facility. Notice that the
search string is qualified as a prefix; thus line 6700 is not affected.

7 SET EDITCHNG ON 8
EDIT /IN-/INPUT-/ PREFIX
>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....
==61== WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
==62== =1 HOLDING-AREA.
==63== =2 IN-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'.
==64== =2 IN-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'.
==65== =2 IN-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'.
==66== =1 WORK-AREA.
==67== =2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.
7 8
>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....7...
==61== WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
==62== =1 HOLDING-AREA.
==CHG> =2 INPUT-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'.
==CHG> =2 INPUT-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'.
==CHG> =2 INPUT-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'.
==66== =1 WORK-AREA.
==67== =2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.
The change indicators placed in the sequence number field are modifiable. This means
you can overtype any indicator with a line command. After the command is executed,
the indicator is redisplayed.
If you want to track another edit operation, you can remove the change indicators by
issuing the RESET line command or:
SET EDITCHNG RESET
To deactivate the facility, either modify the STATUS SESSION display, or issue the
command:
SET EDITCHNG OFF

When the facility is deactivated, the change indicators remain displayed. To remove
these indicators, either:
■ Deactivate the facility by issuing:
SET EDITCHNG OFF RESET or
■ Issue the RESET line command after the facility is deactivated.
If you want to see a non-modifiable display of lines affected by the execution of the
EDIT primary command, specify the TRACE command prior to EDIT, as in:
TRACE
EDIT 'FILLER'FILLER'
NOTRACE
TRACE causes all affected lines to be displayed. While this facility is active, each
time you execute the EDIT command, a list of affected lines is displayed. The
NOTRACE command deactivates this facility.

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an
AWS
This chapter describes how you can copy data:

■ From one location to another within the active AWS using the COPY primary
command, copy line commands, or repeat line commands.
■ Into an AWS from another AWS, a screen display, library member, attached data
set object or attached job output file using the COPY, COPYS and COPYX
primary commands.
■ From one split screen to the active AWS in the other split screen using the
XCOPY, XCOPYS and XCOPYX primary commands. All copy operations are
nondestructive (the lines being copied are not deleted from their original location).
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-1
15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

This section explains how you can use primary or line commands to copy data from
one location to another within the active AWS.

When copying data, you must identify the line(s) to be copied and the destination of
the operation. The destination can be specified as:
v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be placed.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.
T Before the first line of the active AWS.
B or ,, After the last line of the active AWS.

15.1.1.1 To copy a single line:
Enter the COPY command followed by the number of the line to be copied and the
destination line number, as in:
COPY 295= 36==
In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be copied at or after line 3600. (If the
destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line number does
not exist, the data are placed at that line number.)
15.1.1.2 To copy a range of lines:
Enter the COPY command with the number of the first and last line to be copied plus
the destination. For example, to copy lines 2500 through 2700 to the top of the active
AWS, you would enter:
COPY 25== 27== T
15.1.1.3 To duplicate the copied lines at the destination:
Use the Nv operand to duplicate lines, where v is the number of times the data are to
be repeated. For example, to copy lines 700 through 900 at, or after, line 2500 and
have those lines repeated three times, you would enter:
COPY 7== 9== 25== N3

You can use the:
■ Copy line commands to duplicate one or more lines to another location within the
active AWS.
■ Repeat line commands to repeat one or more lines immediately after themselves.
15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands
As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be copied and the
destination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in the
following table.)
■ To copy a single line:
Type C in the sequence number field of the line to be copied. (Also include a
destination line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.)
■ To copy a block of lines:

Type CC in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be copied.
(Also include a destination line command in the appropriate sequence number
field.)
Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same screen.
You can scroll the display forward or backward while the command is
pending (waiting for a matching copy or destination line command).
■ To copy a range of lines:
In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the following
line commands in the appropriate sequence number field:
Cv To copy v number of lines (for example, entering C5 causes the line
containing the command plus the next four lines to be copied).
CB To copy all lines from the line containing the command through the last
line of the active AWS.
CT To copy all lines from the first line in the active AWS through the line
containing the command.
■ To copy repeatedly:
Type CR (for a single line copy) or CCR (on the first and last lines, for a block
copy) in the appropriate sequence number field. Then, type a destination line
command on the appropriate target sequence number field. The destination line
command that you use will either cause the CR or CCR command(s) to remain
displayed, allowing you to copy the same line(s) to multiple locations, or remove
the commands. (You can also use the RESET line command to remove a pending
CR or CCR command.) The following table shows all of the destination line
commands for Copy.
Command Type Meaning

A [v] Destination Only After this line, insert one or v number of
copies.
B [v] Before this line, insert one or v number
of copies.
BB [v] After the last line in the active AWS
insert one or v number of copies.
TT [v] Before the first line in the active AWS,
O [v] Overlay At Overlay one or v number of lines with
Destination copied data.
OD [v] Overlay one or v number of lines with
copied data and remove pending CR or
CCR line command.


OO Overlay block of lines, where OO is
entered on the first and last line of the
block of lines to be overlaid.
OB Overlay all lines from the line containing
the command through the end of the
active AWS with the copied data.
OT Overlay all lines from the first AWS line
through the line containing the command
with the copied data.
AD [v] Destination And After this line, insert one or v number of
Remove Pending CR copies.
BD [v] CCR Line Command Before this line, insert one or v number
of copies.
BBD [v] After the last line in the active AWS,
TTD [v] Before the first line in the active AWS,
15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands
The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line commands.
Only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with corresponding data from
the source lines.
AWS: Copy Line Commands Using Overlay
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
C =8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).
O2 9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN
==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
===8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).
===9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ).
==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).
The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the number of
lines being copied. For example, the upper screen in the previous example shows that
one line is to be copied (800) and that two lines are to be overlaid with that data (900
and 1000). The lower screen shows the result, where PIC X( ) has overlaid the
corresponding blank positions in the designated lines. (SAMPLE has been ignored
since its corresponding positions contain data.)

15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands
To copy one line immediately after itself, enter the R line command in the appropriate
sequence number field. To repeat one line multiple times, use Rv where v is the
number of times the line is to be repeated. To repeat a block of lines, enter the RR
line command in the sequence number field of the first and last line to be repeated.
The following example illustrates the result of entering R4 on line 3200. (Notice that
the sequence numbers of the repeated lines are incremented by 1, so as to have
minimal impact on preexisting sequence numbers.)
AWS: Repeat Line Command Example
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==3=== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
==31== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).
R4 2== FILLER PIC X(3=).
==33== FD INVENTORY-REPORT
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==3=== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
==31== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).
==32== FILLER PIC X(3=).
==32=1 FILLER PIC X(3=).
15.2 Copying Data to an AWS

You can use the COPY, COPYS and COPYX commands to bring data from the
current screen display, another AWS, a library member, an attached data set object or
an attached job output file into an AWS. When using these commands, you must
designate the source of the data being copied and its destination within the active
AWS. Optionally, you can direct the data to an AWS other than the currently active
one.
──┬─COPY──┬──source ...──AWS-destination──┬─────────┬─────────
├─COPYS─┤ └─TP name─┘
└─COPYX─┘
The source operands that identify the data to be copied are:

AWS name From the designated existing AWS.
DSN From the attached data set object. (Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets:
Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about other
ways you can copy a data set object into the active AWS.)
JOB From the attached job output file.
LIB From the attached library member or Selection List. (Also see
Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for
information about other ways you can copy library data into the
active AWS.)
mem Name of the library member to be copied.
SCREEN From the current screen display.
The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS or designated AWS must
be specified as:
v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in the
AWS.
T Before the first line of the AWS.
B or ,, After the last line of the AWS.
R Replace the contents of the AWS.

By default, the commands COPY, COPYS and COPYX bring data into the active
AWS. You can designate a different existing AWS by using the TO name operand.
Thus,
COPY DSN T
copies the currently attached data set object to the currently active AWS, while:
COPY AWS SAMPLE1 B TO SAMPLE2
copies the entire contents of the AWS named SAMPLE1 to the bottom of the AWS
named SAMPLE2.
15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy

Assuming the CA defaults are in effect, you can also copy the screen when an RPF
program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the
terminal by entering:
:C
in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the
command :C.)
If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display identifies the:
■ Escape character: The field RCSESCCH identifies the character to use. The
default is a colon (:).
■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is PF12.
The screen is copied to the AWS identified by the SET COPYDEST command.
Note: An AWS destination must be in effect for this type of copy operation to work
successfully.
15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines

You can use the COPY command to:
■ Copy all lines:
Enter the COPY command, the keyword indicating the source of the data and the
destination. For example, to copy the currently displayed screen after line 900 of
the active AWS, enter:
COPY SCREEN 9==
If line 900 does not exist, the data are copied at that line number.
■ Copy a range of lines:
Enter COPY, the appropriate source keyword, the number of the first and last line
to be copied, and the destination, as in:
COPY DSN 12== 25== B TO SAMPLE
where lines 1200 through 2500 from the currently attached data set object are to
be copied to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE.
15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String

You can use the command:
■ COPYS to copy line(s) from the source that contain a particular string into the
active or designated AWS, as in:
COPYS JOB /ADDRESS/ 12==
where every line from the attached job output file containing the string ADDRESS
is copied to, or immediately after line 1200 in the active AWS. (A source
keyword, the appropriate string and a destination are required.)
■ COPYX to copy line(s) from the source that do not contain a particular string to
the active or a designated AWS, as in:
COPYX DSN /FILLER/ B TO TEST1
where every line from the attached data set object not containing the string FILL
is copied to the bottom of the AWS named TEST1.

Both COPYS and COPYX allow you to specify a range of lines to be searched for a
string. To do this, include the appropriate line numbers after the string. For example,
to copy every line between 1 and 300 that contain the string NAME from the library
member UPLIST into the active AWS at, or immediately after, line 1200, you would
enter:
COPYS UPLIST /NAME/ 1 3== 12==
By default, the entire line of the source data are searched for the specified string.
You can limit the search operation to a specific range of columns. To limit the search
operation when copying from:
■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file:
– Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command to
change the column boundaries associated with the source data. (See
Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.
– Specify a column range with the command, using the values shown on the
Scale Line. For example, to copy every line containing the string FILLER
within columns 10 through 50 of the attached job output file to the bottom of
the active AWS, you would enter:
COPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ B
■ The displayed screen or a Selection List:
Assume that the left-most displayed position is column one and include the
appropriate numbers, as in:
COPYX SCR 1 3= /QQQ/ R
where every line from the current screen not containing *** in the first thirty
positions of the line is copied to the active AWS and replaces its contents.
15.3 Copying Data Between Screens

When you are working with split screens, you can use the XCOPY, XCOPYS and
XCOPYX commands to copy data from one split screen to the other. The data are
placed in the active AWS of the screen that contains the command. As with the other
copy operands, this is a nondestructive operation (the lines being copied are not
deleted from the source destination).
──┬─XCOPY──┬──┬────────────┬──AWS-destination─────────────────
├─XCOPYS─┤ └─source ...─┘
└─XCOPYX─┘
The source operands allow you to designate the data that is to be copied. The operands
are:
DSN From the data set object attached in the other screen. (Also see
Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for
information about other ways you can copy a data set object into the
active AWS.)
JOB From the job output file attached in the other screen.
LIB From the library member or Selection List attached in the other screen.
(See Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for
information about other ways you can copy library data into the active
AWS.)
mem Name of the library member to be copied.
If no source is specified, the default is the active AWS.
The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS can be specified as:
v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in the
active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS.

15.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines

You can copy all or part of the data from the other split screen into the AWS of the
screen containing the command.
■ To copy all lines:
Enter the XCOPY command, the optional keyword indicating the source of the
data, and the destination, as in:
XCOPY DSN 9==
where the entire contents of the data set object attached in the other split screen is
copied to, or immediately after, line 900 of the screen containing the command.
Enter XCOPY, the appropriate optional source keyword, the number of the first
and last line to be copied, and the destination, as in:
XCOPY 1== 12== B
Since no source keyword is specified in this example, lines 100 through 1200
from the active AWS in the other split screen are copied after the last line of the
active AWS in the screen containing the command.
15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String

You can use the command:
■ XCOPYS to copy lines containing a particular character string from the other
split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command.
■ XCOPYX to copy lines not containing a particular character string from the other
split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command.
You can use these commands to copy all or selected lines.

■ To copy all lines containing the string RECORD-NUMBER in the job output file
attached in the other screen to the top of the active AWS in the screen containing
the command:
XCOPYS JOB /RECORD-NUMBER/ T
■ To copy every line between 1 and 300 that contains the string NAME from the
data set object attached in the other split screen to, or immediately after, line 1200
of the active AWS in the screen containing the command:
XCOPYS DSN /NAME/ 1 3== 12==
By default, the entire line in the source data are searched for the specified string.
When copying from:

■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. You can
limit the search operation to specific columns by:
– Using the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command to
change the column boundaries associated with the source data. (See
Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.
– Specifying a column range with the command, using the values shown on the
Scale Line, as in:
XCOPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ B
where every line containing the string FILLER in columns 10 through 50 of
the job attached in the other screen is copied to the bottom of the active AWS
in the screen containing the command.
■ The displayed screen or a Selection List: You can limit the search to a specific
column by assuming that the left-most displayed position is column one and
include the appropriate numbers, as in:
XCOPYS SCR 1 3= /QQQ/ R
where every line from other screen containing *** in the first thirty positions of
the line is copied to the active AWS of the screen containing the command and
replaces its contents.
Column numbers and line numbers can be specified together, as in:

XCOPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ 12== 25== R
where only columns 10 through 50 of lines 1200 through 2500 of the attached job are
searched for the string FILLER. All matching lines are copied to the active AWS,
replacing its prior contents.

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS
This chapter describes how you can delete data from the active AWS using:
■ The DELETE primary command to delete one or more lines.
■ The DELETES and DELETEX primary commands to delete lines containing (or
not containing) a specific string.
■ The delete line commands.
■ 3270 hardware facilities (for example, ERASE EOF and DELETE keys).
Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands

You can use primary commands to delete one or more lines from the active or a
specific AWS. The deletion can be by line number(s) or by the presence or absence of
a specific character string.
16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number

You can use the DELETE command to delete all or part of the contents of an AWS:
■ To delete the entire contents of the active AWS, enter:
DELETE
■ To delete one line from a specific AWS, include the appropriate line number and
the AWS name, as in:
DELETE AWS SAMPLE 25==
where line 2500 is to be deleted from the AWS named SAMPLE.
■ To delete a range of lines, include the first and last line numbers in the range. For
example, to delete lines 1600 through 3500 from the active AWS, enter:
DELETE 16== 35==
When deleting a range of lines, you can indicate the last line of the end of the
AWS by specifying two consecutive commas (,,). For example, to delete every
line beginning with line 1600 through the end of the AWS named SAMPLE,
enter:
DELETE AWS SAMPLE 16== ,,

16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String

Use the DELETES and DELETEX commands to delete lines from the active or a
specific AWS based on the occurrence of a specific character string. (Use the EDIT
primary or line commands to delete a string without deleting the line.)
■ Use DELETES to delete lines that contain a particular string. For example, to
delete all lines from the active AWS that contain the string
PART-NUMBER-OUT, you would enter:
DELETES 'PART-NUMBER-OUT'
■ Use DELETEX to perform the opposite function - to delete lines not containing a
specified string. For example, to delete all lines from the AWS named SAMPLE
that do not contain the string NEW-RECORD, you would enter:
DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 'NEW-RECORD'
By default, every line in the AWS is searched for the specified string. With both
DELETES and DELETEX, you can limit the number of lines searched. For example,
to delete all lines from the active AWS containing the string XYZ within lines 1
through 400, enter the line numbers after the string:
DELETES 'XYZ' 1 4==
Also by default, the area within the current (or default) column boundaries is searched
for the string. To limit the columns involved, enter the number of the starting and
ending columns searched. For example, to delete only those lines that do not contain
INVENTORY-BALANCE in columns 1 through 50 of the active AWS, enter the
column numbers before the string:
DELETEX 1 5= 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'
You can combine the operands to limit the search to a specific column range within
specific lines, as in:
DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 1 5== 'NEW RECORD' 1== 12==
where every line within the AWS named SAMPLE not containing NEW RECORD in
columns 1 through 500 of lines 100 through 1200 is deleted.

16.2 Using Line Commands

You can use line commands to delete:
■ A single line:
Enter a D in the sequence number field of each line to be deleted.
■ A block of lines:
Enter DD in the sequence number field of the first and last lines of the block.
When deleting a block of lines, the entire range need not appear on one screen.
The display can be scrolled forward and backward while a DD command is
pending (while waiting for a matching DD command to be entered).
■ A range of lines:
In the sequence number field of the appropriate line, enter:
Dv To delete v number of lines (for example, D5 deletes the line
containing the command and the next four lines).
DB To delete all lines from the line containing the command through the
last line of the active AWS.
DT To delete all lines from the first line through the line containing the
command.
■ One or more lines based on the presence or absence of a string:
When using the commands shown in the following table, enter the command in
the sequence number field and the string in the data portion of the same line.
Once the string has been specified, it is remembered for any subsequent delete line
command.

LINE MEANING
COMMAND
DS [v] [/string/] Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) containing
string.
DSB [/string/] Deletes all lines containing string from this line to end of
active AWS.
DST [/string/] Deletes all lines containing string from first line through
this line.
DU [/string/] Deletes all lines from this line until first line containing
string.
DX [v] [/string/] Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) not
containing string.
DXB [/string/] Deletes all lines not containing string from this line to end
of active AWS.
DXT [/string/] Deletes all lines not containing string from first line
through this line.

16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities

CA-Roscoe supports the delete facilities available at 3270-type terminals as explained
in the following subsections.
16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key

The current setting of the SET EOF and SET FILL commands determines the extent of
deletion that is to occur when you use the ERASE EOF key to delete a line, where
with:
SET EOF DELETE1 If SET FILL BLANK is in effect and the left display
margin is column one, the entire line is deleted. If the
left display margin is other than column one, data
beyond the right display margin is not deleted.
If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the cursor is in column
one and the left display margin is column one, the entire
line is deleted. If the cursor is positioned to any other
column (regardless of the left display margin), data
beyond the right display margin is not deleted.
SET EOF DELETE If SET FILL BLANK is in effect, the entire line is
deleted if all of the data within the current display
margins is erased.
If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the entire line is deleted
if the cursor is in the first displayed position (not
necessarily column one). If the cursor is placed
anywhere else, the contents of the line is deleted from
the cursor position to the end of the display.
SET EOF ERASE If the cursor is in the first displayed position of the line
(not necessarily column one) when ERASE EOF is
pressed, all of the displayed line is deleted (the line
itself remains). (Data to the right or left of the current
display margins is not deleted.)
If the cursor is in any other position, the data from the
cursor location to the right display margin is deleted.

16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key

The DELETE key deletes data one character at a time. To do so, position the cursor to
the first character to be deleted and press the DELETE key. The character is deleted
and the displayed data are shifted one position to the left. Any data existing beyond
the right display margins is unaffected by this delete and shift operation.

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS
Information
To display information about the active AWS plus all of the AWSs that are currently
in use, enter the command:
STATUS AWS
Portions of the resulting display are modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display,

include the LIST operand, as in:
STATUS AWS LIST
The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. Note that if the
bottom marker (== END OF LIST ==) is not displayed, the number of AWSs exceeds
the screen size. Use PF keys to scroll the display.
STATUS AWS Command: Sample Display
7 >
8
> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 A<ROS1>+
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....
ROSCOE AWS STATUS TOTAL SESSION\SPLIT RECOVERABLE
MAX: 6 CURR: 2 MAX: 2 CURR: 2 M
NAME STATUS ROS MEMBER CHG LINES INCR LAST CURRENT ACT
ASSOCIATED DATASET NAME VOLUME UNIT
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ROS1 (NONE) CHG 24 1== 24== 24==
(NONE)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MYAWS ABC.MYMEM 1137 1== 1137 1
TEST.SOURCE(MYSOURCE) MUROS1 338=
======================= END OF LIST =======================
U V
Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information 17-1

Use the modifiable display to perform one or more of the following functions by
typing the appropriate code in the first field of the display.
A Attach AWS.
AT Alter AWS attributes. (Overtype the appropriate field(s) in the display with
the new attribute value(s).)
D Delete contents of AWS.
DS Discard AWS and delete its contents.
S Select AWS. (The AWS is activated but not displayed.)
R Rename AWS. (Type the new AWS name in the STATUS field.)
X Terminate display.
* Position Selection List to begin with the designated AWS.
When appropriate, the second shaded area (the STATUS field) will indicate the result
of the operation after it is performed.
The amount of available information exceeds the width of 80-character screens. The
information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to
view different information by entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you
will proceed sequentially through the different displays. (The ALT field in the
following figures contains the number of the alternate display in which each field
appears.) The first two lines in the Execution Area remain constant as you scroll the
display, and contain the fields:
TOTAL Made up of two fields of information:
1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs currently in effect for the
user session.
2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created for the user
session.
SESSION\SPLIT Made up of two fields of information:
1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs with the SESSION or
SPLIT attributes that are active for the user session.
2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created with the
SESSION or SPLIT attributes.
RECOVERABLE Made up of two fields of information:
1. CURRENT: Number of recoverable AWSs in effect.
2. MAX: Number of recoverable AWSs that can be created.
Note: See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for more information.

The remaining fields are described in the following table. Note that the modifiable
fields include information about how their values can be changed.
Field Name Description ALT

NAME Name of the AWS. ALL
ROS MEMBER Name of the last FETCHed, SAVEd or 1
UPDATEd library member or (NONE).
CHG Changed data indicator shown if data in AWS is 1
new or does not match the member identified
by last FETCH, COPY replace, SAVE or
UPDATE.
LINES Number of lines in the AWS or 0 if the AWS is 1
empty.
INCR Current line number increment or 100 if the 1
AWS is empty.
Change: Use the RENUMBER command.
LAST Number of the last line in the AWS or blank if 1
the AWS is empty.
CURRENT Number of the line at which the pointer is 1
positioned or blank if AWS is empty.
ACT Number of the split screen (1 or 2) in which the
AWS is active. If blank, the AWS is available
for use but not active.
ASSOCIATED Fully-qualified name of the data set COPYed or 1
DATASET IMPORTed into the AWS or (NONE).
NAME
VOLUME Serial number of the volume containing the 1
COPYed or IMPORTed data set or blank.
UNIT Unit name associated with the device on which 1
the data set resides or blank.
L-BOUNDS-R Current or default left and right column 2
boundary settings used by any command that
locates, edits, or shifts data.
Change: Use the AT function code and
overtype the appropriate field with the new
column boundaries; use the modifiable STATUS
DISPLAY screen, SET BOUNDS command or
BOUNDS line command.

L-SET DIS-R Left and right display margins established by 2
default, the last executed SET DISPLAY
command or the last change made to either the
STATUS DISPLAY or this screen.
overtype the appropriate field with the new left
or right display margin; use the SET DISPLAY
command or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY
screen.
L-CUR DIS-R Left and right display margins temporarily set 2
by the: 1) last command that located data
outside of the established display margins, or 2)
value types in the COLS field.
NUMBR Current or default sequence number display 2
setting.
overtype the field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2
or NONUM; use the SET DISPLAY command
or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.
DISP Current or default data display mode. 2
overtype the field with CHAR or HEX; use the
SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable
screen STATUS DISPLAY screen.
POSTN Current or default screen positioning to occur as 2
a result of executing a FIRST, NEXT, LAST,
PREV, INCL or EXCL primary command.
overtype the field with CJUST, JUST, CENT or
LOCK; use the SET SEARCH command or the
modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.
FILL Current or default trailing character to be used 2
in the AWS.
overtype the field with BLANK or NULL; use
the SET FILL command.

MODE Current or default character translation mode. 2
overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or
standard; use SET MODE command or
modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.
TAB Current or default tab character followed by the 2
SETTINGS tab positions currently in effect.
overtype the:
1. First field with the special character to be
used as the tab character; use TAB
command.
2. Remaining fields with one to eight column
numbers; use TAB command.
CHARACTER Language character set code representing the 3
SET data that you can enter and display at the
terminal.
overtype the field with a language code defined
at your site; use SET CHARSET command or
modifiable STATUS SESSION screen.
RECOVERY Current or default setting indicating whether the 3
contents of this AWS is to be recovered in the
event of a session or system termination.
overtype the field with REC or NREC; use
ALTER AWS command.
DISCARD Current or default setting indicating when this 3
AWS is to be discarded.
overtype the field with SESSION, SPLIT, RPF
or LEVEL; use ALTER AWS command.
SELECT Current or default setting indicating how this 3
AWS can be referenced by the SELECT
command.
overtype the field with IMPLICIT or
EXPLICIT; use ALTER AWS command.

EOF Current or default extent of deletion that is to 3
occur when the ERASE EOF key is pressed.
overtype the field with ERASE, DELETE or
DELETE1; use SET EOF command.
DSPLY Current or default data protection and 3
highlighting attribute.
overtype the field with U, UH, S or SH; use
SET AWSDSPLY.
SEQUENCE Current or default AWS sequence number 3
attribute.
overtype the field with NOSEQ, COBOL or two
numeric values where the first is starting value
and the second is the length of the field (for
example, 73 8); use SEQ or NOSEQ command.
(This attribute is also changed by the execution
of a CHAIN, FETCH, MERGE or SAVE
command.)

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in
an AWS
This chapter describes the different facilities that you can use to enter data into the
active AWS. It also describes how you can manually or automatically format the data
while entering it.
Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-1

18.1 Entering Data
18.1 Entering Data

This section describes how you can:
■ Use primary and line commands to enter data into the active AWS.
■ Define and use a mask to insert data into the active AWS.
■ Use a PF key to open the AWS for data entry.
■ Add, delete or replace data from the Command Area.
Note: At most sites, data that you enter into the active AWS is automatically
translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enter
division, it is translated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that you
enter is to be recognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character
Recognition” for additional information.
18.1.1 Using Primary Commands

This section describes how you can enter data into an AWS that is either empty or
contains one or more lines by using:
■ INPUT - To open the Execution Area.
■ INPUT TEXTENTR - To open the Execution Area for power typing.

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area
To add data to an empty active AWS, enter the command:

INPUT
As illustrated in the following example, the screen is opened to accept input, the
current (or default) increment is used for line number sequencing and the cursor is
placed at the to first line of the Execution Area, ready for data entry.
AWS: INPUT Command Adding Data to Empty AWS
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
===1== _
===2==
===3==
===4==
===5==
===6==
===7==
===8==
===9==
==1===
==11==
==12==
==13==
==14==
==15==
========================== B O T T O M ==============
U V
If you fill all lines in the Execution Area and still have more data to enter, press the
ENTER key. The data you have entered is recorded in the active AWS and a new
screen is displayed. The first line in the Execution Area of the new screen will contain
the last line of data that you entered.
To indicate that you have completed data entry, either:

1. Press the ENTER key or any PF key having a scroll function, or
2. Move the cursor to the Command Area and enter a command.
Either of these actions causes the screen to close. Any data that had not been recorded
in the active AWS is now recorded, all unused lines are deleted from the Execution
Area, and the beginning and end of the data in that AWS is noted with TOP and
BOTTOM markers.

18.1 Entering Data
You can also use the INPUT command to:

■ Insert data between existing lines.
Enter INPUT and the number of the line after which data are to be inserted, as in:
INPUT 38==
The following example illustrates the resulting screen. Notice that line 3800 is the
first line in the Execution Area. The next existing line, 3900, is displayed as the
last line and is unnumbered to allow for multiple screens of data entry. The
intervening lines are available for data entry. To avoid renumbering the existing
contents, these inserted lines are incremented by one.
If the designated line number (for example, 3800) does not exist, the insertion
begins at that line number. The first AWS line with a number less than the
specified line number is shown as the top line in the Execution Area.
AWS: INPUT Command Inserting Data Between Two Lines
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
==38=1 _
==38=2
==38=3
==38=4
...... =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

18.1 Entering Data
■ Insert data before the first line of the active AWS.

Enter the command as:
INPUT T
The resulting display contains the Execution Area opened for data entry. (The
inserted lines are numbered from 1 and incremented by 1.) The first line of this
AWS is shown as the last line of the Execution Area.
■ Add data to the end of the active AWS.
Enter the command as:
INPUT
or
INPUT B
The resulting display shows the last line of this AWS as the first line in the
Execution Area which is opened to accept input.
The current line number increment is used for sequence numbering. If the next
generated sequence number will exceed 999999, CA-Roscoe stops accepting input.
While this condition rarely occurs, issuing the RENUMBER command with a lower
starting sequence number and increment value usually resolves the problem.
In all cases, the cursor is automatically positioned to the first line in the Execution
Area, ready for data entry.
If you fill the Execution Area, press the ENTER key to continue entering data. The
entered data are recorded in the active AWS and a new screen is displayed. The first
line in the Execution Area of the new screen contains the last line of data that you
entered. (If the data you inserted generates sequence numbers that overflow into
existing AWS sequence numbers, the contents is renumbered by 1 until the overflow
condition is rectified.)
To terminate data entry, you can: 1) press the ENTER key, or 2) move the cursor to
the Command Area and enter a command.
Either of these actions causes the screen to close. All unused lines are deleted from
the Execution Area, any data that has not been recorded in the active AWS is then
recorded, and the beginning and end of the data in this AWS is noted with TOP and
BOTTOM markers.

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques
When you use the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the format of the
Execution Area is different than when this operand is not used.
With INPUT TEXTENTR:

■ The sequence number field is protected and invisible and the right margin is
ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that if you
reach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically skips over the
invisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data entry. (Without
TEXTENTR, the right margin marks the end of a word. If you reach the margin
in the middle of a word, the cursor is positioned to the next line. The characters
appearing at the end of the previous line are treated as one word. The characters
at the beginning of the new line are treated as another word.)
■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are formatted after
you press the ENTER key. As illustrated in the following example, this allows
you to establish a left and right margin for your data and then use the entire
screen to enter that data.
Any formatting that you do when entering the data are also remembered. For
example, to begin a new paragraph, move the cursor to the next line and enter one
or more spaces, then move the cursor to the next line and resume typing. The
blank line separating the paragraphs is remembered when your data are formatted.

18.1 Entering Data
AWS: INPUT With TEXTENTR Operand
7 SET BOUNDS 1! 5! & INPUT TEXTENTR

8
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE.
...... ======================= B O T T O M =============
7 >
8
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
_
7 >
8
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra
p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep
7 >
8
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
===2== This sample shows how you can enter data
===2=1 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for

18.1 Entering Data

You can use line commands:
I or IB To insert one or more empty lines in the active AWS for data entry.
TE To allow for power typing techniques.
18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area
You can use the I and IB line commands to insert one or more empty lines in the
active AWS. Use:
I To insert one or more lines after the line containing the command.
IB To insert one or more lines before the line containing the command.
To insert one line, enter I or IB in the appropriate sequence number field.
To insert multiple lines, enter Iv or IBv in the appropriate sequence number field,
where v is the number of lines to be inserted. You can request any number of blank
lines to be inserted. If you request more than can be displayed, the resulting screen
contains the maximum number of displayable lines.
The following example illustrates how you would insert one line after line 1900 and
three lines before line 2300.
Inserting Lines Using I and IB Line Commands
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
I=19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).
==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
==21== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).
==22== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
IB33== PROCEDURE DIVISION.
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).
...... _
==22== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
......
......
......
==23== PROCEDURE DIVISION
When you press the ENTER key after entering your data, the Execution Area is
examined. If there are any unused lines, they are removed. Lines containing data are
retained and assigned line numbers incremented by one.

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT
You can use the SET AUTOINSERT command to activate an automatic line insertion
facility. When this facility is active, one or more data entry lines are inserted after you
have used all of the lines provided by an I or IB line command. (If the facility is not
active, the insert operation terminates.) The following examples show how to activate
the facility with a default line insertion value of 1. Once activated, new lines are
provided as long as you continue to enter data.
AWS: Automatic Data Entry Line Insertion
7 SET AUTOINSERT ON_

8
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
I=19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).
...... _
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).
==19=1 =5 filler pic X(1=)._
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7).
==19=1 =5 FILLER PIC X(1=).
...... _

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques
As with the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the TE line command
causes:
■ The sequence number field to be protected and invisible and the right margin to
be ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that if you
reach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically skips over the
invisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data entry.
■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are formatted after
you press the ENTER key.
7 >
8
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
TE=1== THIS IS A SAMPLE.
...... ======================= B O T T O M =============
7 >
8
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
_
7 >
8
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra
p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep
7 AWS: TE Line Command

8
>
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
===2== This sample shows how you can enter data
===2=1 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.3 Using a Mask

The MASK line command allows you to define a character string mask that can be
inserted anywhere in the active AWS using the IM line command.
18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask
To define a mask,
■ Enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of any line in the active
AWS.
■ Then, enter the mask in the data portion of the same line. The mask must be the
only data on the line. Ensure that this is the case by overlaying any other data
on the line with spaces, or by using the DELETE or ERASE EOF keys to delete
the remaining data.
■ Finally, press the ENTER key to establish the mask.
After the MASK command has been executed, the original contents of the line are
redisplayed.
Once the mask is defined, it remains in effect until you: 1) replace it with a new
mask definition, or 2) eliminate it.
To eliminate a mask, enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of any
line in the active AWS and press the ENTER key.
18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask
You can insert your data mask in the active AWS by using the:
■ IM (Insert Mask) line command.
To insert one copy of the mask, position the cursor to the sequence number field
of the line after which you want the line inserted. Type IM in the sequence
number field and press the ENTER key. A new line containing the mask is
inserted immediately after the line that contained the IM command.
To insert multiple copies of the mask, include the appropriate numeric value with
the command, as illustrated in the following figure.
The first screen in the following examples shows the mask being defined on line
3200. (Notice that only the mask appears on that line. The original contents are
restored when the command is executed.) The second screen shows how multiple
copies of the mask can be inserted. The third screen shows the resulting display.

18.1 Entering Data
AWS: MASK and IM Line Commands to Define and Insert a Mask
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
MASK!! !5 FILLER PIC X(3!).
==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT.
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
IM2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
==32== =5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(6).
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==3==1 =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
==3==2 =5 FILLER PIX X(3=).
■ OM (Overlay Mask) line command.

To overlay one line, position the cursor to the sequence number field of the
appropriate line. Type OM and press the ENTER key. The mask will overlay the
corresponding blank characters in this line. (Only blank characters are overlaid. If
the line contains alphanumeric characters within the area defined by the mask,
those characters are not overlaid.)
To overlay multiple lines with the mask, include a numeric value with the
command. For example, if you enter OM3 on line 3400, the mask will overlay the
corresponding blank characters on line 3400 and the next two lines.
You can also use the OMT and OMB commands to overlay multiple lines. OMT
overlays all of the lines from the first line of the active AWS through the line
containing the command. OMB overlays all of the lines from the line containing the
command through the end of this AWS.

18.1 Entering Data
The following example illustrates how you can overlay lines with a mask. (It is
assumed the mask defined in the previous figure is still in effect.)
AWS: Overlay Line Commands to Insert a Mask
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
OM3 == =5 FILLER
==35== =5 OUT-MONTH
==36==
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==34== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
==35== =5 OUT-MONTH PIC X(3=).
==36== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
18.1.4 Using a PF Key

As distributed, PF12 and PF24 are assigned the INPUT function. If your site is using
this assignment, you can use either key to insert data into the active AWS. To do so,
■ Position the cursor to the line after which the insertion is to be made.
■ Press the appropriate PF key.
The screen is opened for data entry immediately after the line at which the cursor was
positioned. Note that the column position of the cursor has no affect on this operation.
To insert data at the top or bottom of the active AWS, position the cursor before the
first line, or after the last line, of that AWS and again press the appropriate PF key.

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.5 Using the Command Area

If you only want to insert a few lines of data, you may find it convenient to add the
data from the Command Area. To do this:
1. Type the line number in the form =number, where number is the sequence number
to be assigned to the inserted line.
2. Leave at least one space, then type the data to be associated with that sequence
number.
3. Press the ENTER key.
If the number you specify already exists within the active AWS, your line replaces the
existing line. If it does not, your line is added to the active AWS. Using the following
examples to illustrate, when the ENTER key is pressed, the previous contents of line
3100 are replaced with the information appearing in the Command Area, while line
3101 is added to this AWS.
AWS: Inserting Data From Command Area
7 =31== =5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9).

8
=31=1 =5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3).
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==32== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
==31== =5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9).
==31=1 =5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3).
==32== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).
All of the lines comprising the Command Area can be used to enter data in this
manner. You can also use the command delimiter to enter more than one line of data
per Command Area line.

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data

This section describes how you can format the data in the active AWS using:
■ An automatic indentation facility when you are inserting data via the I or IB line
command.
■ A software tab facility with data that is being entered into the active AWS or
already within the active AWS.
18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation

You can activate the automatic indentation facility by issuing the command:
SET AUTOINDENT ON
When this facility is active, the cursor is automatically positioned under the first data
character when you insert data using the INPUT primary command, I or IB line
command or a PF key to which the INPUT function is assigned.
The following example illustrates how the cursor is positioned when you use the I line
command.
AWS: Using SET AUTOINDENT Command
7 >
8
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===8=
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ============================= T O P ============
I==1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
7 >
8
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ============================= T O P ============
...... _

18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility

The software tab facility allows you to define one to eight tab positions within a line
and then position data to those positions.
18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character
To define tab positions, use the TAB command. You can define a maximum of eight
different tab positions. For example:
TAB 12 16 2= 32
sets tab positions at columns 12, 16, 20 and 32.
The default tab character (the special character you include with your data) is the
logical not sign (¬). To change this character, use the TAB command again. For
example, to establish the percent sign (%) as the tab character, you would enter:
TAB %
As illustrated in the following example, the tab character and tab positions must be
defined in separate executions of the TAB command. When tab positions are in effect,
the tab character is used to indicate those positions on the Scale Line.
AWS: Using TAB Command
7 TAB %
8
TAB 12 16 2! 32
>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ============================= T O P ============
7 >
8
> <...+....1.%..+%...%....+....3.%:
...... ============================= T O P ============
!!!1!! IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

18.2.2.2 Using Tabs
When the tab character and tab positions are set, you can format your data by
including the tab character with your data. You can do this when you are:
■ Initially entering data in the active AWS, or
■ Formatting data that is already in the active AWS.
To shift the contents of a line to the appropriate location, enter one or more tab
characters. As illustrated in the following example, entering one tab positions the data
following it to the next defined tab position (for example, entering a single tab
character at the beginning of line 3800 shifts the line to begin in column 12). To skip
one or more tab positions (as illustrated in line 3400), enter contiguous tab characters
(that is, not separated by spaces).
AWS: Formatting Data With the Software Tab
7 >
8
> ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+..
==34== %%RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
==35== %%LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED
==36== %%DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
==38== %=5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL%PIC X.
==39== %=5 FILLER%PIC X(9).
==4=== %=5 PART-NUMBER-OUT%PIC X(1=).
7 >
8
> ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+..
==34== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
==36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
==39== =5 FILLER PIC X(9).
==4=== =5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(1=).
Note: The tab character will be treated as a data character if either of the following
conditions occur:
■ The data includes the tab character but no tab positions have been defined.
■ The data includes more tab characters than the number of defined tab positions
(for example, four tab positions are defined and the data includes five tab
characters.)

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS
The commands described in this chapter can be used to format data or text that is in
the active AWS. These commands allow you to:
■ Center text lines.
■ Control the capitalization of alphabetic characters within the data.
■ Reformat text lines.
■ Shift one or more lines to the left or right.
■ Split and join text lines.
Note that the software tab facility (described in Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering and
Formatting Data in an AWS”) can also be used to position data within the active
AWS.
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-1

19.1 Centering Text
19.1 Centering Text

You can center text on a line using either the TXTCENT primary command or the TC
line command.

You can use the TXTCENT command to center the text on one or more lines. By
default, the text is centered between the default or current left and right column
boundaries. For example, if the default column boundaries are in effect and you enter:
TXTCENT 1==
The contents of line 100 will be centered between 1 and 80.
You can override the default or current column boundaries by including the BOUNDS
operand with the command. The following example shows how you can center the text
on multiple lines between columns 9 and 45.
AWS: TXTCENT Command to Center Multiple Lines
7 TXTCENT 2!! 5!! BOUNDS 9 45

8
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===1== Q------------------------------------------------
===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES
===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND
===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
===6== Q------------------------------------------------
7> 8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===1== Q------------------------------------------------
===6== Q------------------------------------------------

19.1 Centering Text

You can use line commands to center the text on one or more lines. The text is
centered between the default or current left and right column boundaries.
■ To center a single line:
Enter TC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.
■ To center a block of lines:
Enter TCC in the sequence number fields of the first and last lines to be centered.
■ To center a range of lines:
– Enter TCv in the sequence number field of the first line to be centered, where
v represents the number of lines to be centered (for example, TC5).
– Enter TCB or TCT in the appropriate sequence number field. With TCB,
every line from the line containing the command through the end of the active
AWS will be centered. With TCT, every line from the first line of the active
AWS through the line containing the command will be centered.
The text is centered between the default or current column boundaries. To change the
column boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS in line
command.
In the following example, the BOUNDS line command is used to change the column
boundaries. The TCC line commands then center the text in the designated block of
lines between the boundaries.
AWS: TCC Line Command to Center Multiple Lines
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
BOUNDS Q-<----------------------------------->----------
TCC2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
TCC5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
===6== Q------------------------------------------------

19.1 Centering Text
The following example shows the results of these commands.
AWS: TCC Line Command Results
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===1== Q------------------------------------------------
===6== Q------------------------------------------------

19.2 Controlling Capitalization

At most sites, data that you enter or edit in an AWS is automatically translated to its
corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enter the word division, it is
translated to DIVISION). You can control how data that you enter and edit is to be
recognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for
There may be occasions when you want to retranslate one or more lines within the
active AWS. While you can do this by changing the current translation mode setting
and then modifying the appropriate lines, you can also use the primary and line
commands shown in the following table.
Action Primary Command Line

Translate uppercase characters to LOWCASE LC, LCC, LCB,
their corresponding lowercase LCT
characters.
Translate lowercase characters to UPCASE UC, UCC, UCB,
their corresponding uppercase UCT
characters.
None of these commands, however, are text sensitive. When dealing with lines
containing text, you should use the TXTLCASE primary command or TLC line
command to control capitalization.

You can use the TXTLCASE command to lowercase the characters in one or more
lines while ensuring that the first word of each sentence begins with a capital letter.
For example, to lowercase the characters within the current or default column
boundaries of line 100 through 500, you would enter:
TXTLCASE 1== 5==
You can use the optional BOUNDS operand to override the default or current column
boundaries. For example, to lowercase the characters between columns 9 and 45 of
lines 700 through 1200, you would enter:
TXTLCASE 7== 12== BOUNDS 9 45

19.2.2 Using a Line Command

You can use the TLC command to control the capitalization of the lines comprising a
paragraph. It lowercases the characters encountered while ensuring that the first letter
of each sentence is in uppercase.
To use this command, enter TLC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.
When the ENTER key is pressed, all of the characters on the line containing the
command through the end of the current paragraph are translated to their
corresponding lowercase characters. The end of a paragraph is indicated by:
■ A blank line,
■ A change in indentation, or
■ The end of the active AWS.
Note that only the characters found within the default or current column boundaries are
translated. To change the column boundaries, you can use the SET BOUNDS primary
command or the BOUNDS line command.

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines

At any point, the TXTFLOW primary command or TF line command can be used to
reformat the text within the active AWS.

You can use the TXTFLOW command to reformat the text appearing on one or more
lines of the active AWS. For example, to reformat the text comprising lines 2 through
7, you would enter:
TXTFLOW 2 7
The resulting display will show the reformatting text comprising those lines. Each
reformatted line will:
■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (In these examples, that is
column 9.)
EXCEPTION:
If the text within the designated lines begins inside the left column boundary,
the reformatted lines will begin at the column which contained the left-most
character comprising those lines. For example, if the left column boundary is
set to 9 and all of the text lines begin in column 15, the reformatted lines will
begin in column 15.
■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display margin,
whichever is less. For example, assume that the terminal screen displays a line 72
characters in length. If the right column boundary is set at:
– Column 50 - The reformatted text will stop at column 50.
– Column 80 - The reformatted text will stop at column 72.
You can override the right column boundary for the execution of a command by
specifying the COLS operand. In the following example, lines 2 through 7 will be
reformatted and the reformatted lines will not extend beyond column 30.

AWS: TXTFLOW Command to Reformat Text Lines
7 TXTFLOW 2 7 COLS 3=
8
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND
=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN
=====3 Q ESTIMATED SHIPPING
=====4 Q COST REPORT. SHIPPING
=====5 Q RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT
=====6 OF ORDER AND DISTRICT
=====7 TO WHICH ORDER
=====8 SHIPPED.
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------
====1= IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
19.3.2 Using a Line Command

You can use the TF line command to reformat the paragraph you are working with. A
paragraph extends from the line containing the command to:
■ The first blank line,
■ A change in indentation, or
■ The end of the active AWS.

AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Lines
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
TF=1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
=====2 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF
=====3 Q ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
As illustrated in the previous example, reformatted lines:

■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (See page 19-7 about the
TXTFLOW primary command for an exception to this rule.)
■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display margin,
whichever is less.
By specifying a numeric value with the command, you can override the right column
boundary. The following example illustrates how you would reformat the lines within
a paragraph so that the text does not extend beyond column 35.
AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Line
7 >
8
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
TF35=1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
=====2 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF
=====3 Q ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
7 >
8
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN
=====2 Q ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
=====3 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
=====4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER
=====5 AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER
=====6 SHIPPED.

19.4 Shifting Data
19.4 Shifting Data

You can shift all or part of the contents of one or more lines to the left or right using
either primary or line commands.

You can use the RSHIFT and LSHIFT command to move the contents of one or more
lines in the active AWS to the right or left, respectively. For example, to shift the
entire contents of the active AWS five positions to the right, you would enter:
RSHIFT 5
To limit the operation to specific lines, you can include the appropriate line numbers
with the command, as in:
LSHIFT 2 1== 5==
where only the contents of lines 100 through 500 are shifted two positions to the left.
By default, the data within the default (or current) column boundaries is shifted. You
can use the SET BOUNDS command to change the column boundaries for your
session. To change the boundaries for a single execution of the command, use the
BOUNDS operand, as in:
RSHIFT 5 BOUNDS 8 2=
where only the data within columns 8 through 20 are shifted five positions to the right.
Note: SET BOUNDS is described in Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries.”
If you shift the contents of a line beyond right or left column boundary, the data are
lost. This may be useful if you want to clear a field. For example, if you enter:
LSHIFT 7
RSHIFT 7
the first seven positions within the default (or current) column boundary of each active
AWS line is blank-filled.

19.4 Shifting Data
To prevent data from being lost by such an operation, include the TEXTSTOP operand
with the command. For example, if you enter:
LSHIFT 3= TEXTSTOP
every line in the active AWS is shifted 30 positions to the left. However, if any line
contains data that would be shifted beyond the left margin, the operation is stopped for
that line when the left margin is reached.

The following table lists the line commands you can use to shift the contents of one or
more lines to the left or right. As with the primary commands, you can shift one or
more lines to the left or right, where:
■ Using the commands beginning with ( or ), the line is shifted the designated
number of positions, regardless of the current column boundary setting (that is,
data may be lost).
■ Using the commands beginning with < or >, the line is shifted the designated
number of positions or until the appropriate column boundary is reached (that is,
data are not lost).
To change the column boundaries that are currently in effect, you can use the SET
BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “Defining
Column Boundaries” for additional information.
Shift Shift Meaning

Line Until
Data
) [v] > [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces.
)) [v] >> [v] Shift block of lines right 1 or v spaces. Enter on first
and last line of block.
)B [v] >B [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces from line containing command
through end of active AWS.
)T [v] >T [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces from first line through line
containing command.
( [v] < [v] Shift left 1 or v spaces.
(( [v] << [v] Shift block of lines left 1 or v spaces. Enter << on first
and last line of block.
(B [v] <B [v] Shift left 1 or v spaces from line containing command
through end of active AWS.
(T [v] <T [v] Shifts left 1 or v spaces from first line through line
containing command.

19.4 Shifting Data
The following example illustrates how you can use these line commands to format
data. The upper screen contains the unformatted data and appropriate line commands;
the lower screen shows the correctly formatted data (how the data will look after the
line commands are executed).
Using Line Commands to Shift Data
7 >
8
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ================================ T O P ============
>4=1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
<4=2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.
>>43== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
>>=4== CONFIGURATION SECTION.
===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.
===6== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.
7 >
8
>
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ================================ T O P ============
===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.
===6== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

You can split one line into two or join two lines together using either primary or line
commands.
19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines
You can split one line into two using the TXTSPLIT primary or TS line command.
You can use the TXTSPLIT command to split a line at a specific location. The
following example shows line 300 being split at column 31 (top screen). Everything
from that position to the right column boundary is moved to the next line. The text
will begin at the left column boundary of that line. In this case, it means that the word
RATES is moved to line 301 and begins in position 9, which is the current left
boundary (bottom screen).
AWS: TXTSPLIT Command to Split One Line
7 TXTSPLIT 3!! COLS 31

8
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===1== Q------------------------------------------------
===6== Q------------------------------------------------
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===1== Q------------------------------------------------
===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT.
===3=1 RATES
===6== Q------------------------------------------------

A variation of the example shown in the previous figure uses the CURSOR operand.
For example, you could have split the line by positioning the cursor to column 31 on
line 300 and entering:
TXTSPLIT Q CURSOR TXTSPLIT
This form of TXTSPLIT is especially useful when it is assigned to a PF key. Then,

you only need to position the cursor to the appropriate column within the appropriate
line and press the PF key. The following example shows how you can use TXTSPLIT
to split multiple lines. In this case, lines 400 and 500 are split at column 27.
Everything from that position through column 45 is moved to the appropriate next line,
beginning in column 12.
TXTSPLIT Command to Split Multiple Lines
7 TXTSPLIT 4!! 5!! COLS 27 BOUNDS 12 45

8
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===1== Q------------------------------------------------
===3=1 RATES
===6== Q------------------------------------------------
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT.
=====4 RATES
=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT
=====6 OF ORDER AND
=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH
=====8 ORDER SHIPPED.
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------

19.5.1.2 Joining Lines
You can use the TXTJOIN command to rejoin two lines. In the following example,
the modified contents of line 4 are being rejoined to line 3. Since no column number
is specified, the contents of line 4 will begin one space after the current last word on
line 3.
AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Two Lines
7 TXTJOIN 3
8
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT.
=====4 SHIPPING RATES
=====6 OR ORDER AND
=====8 ORDER SHIPPED.
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------
7 >
8
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====6 Q OR ORDER AND
=====8 Q ORDER SHIPPED.
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------

The following example shows how you can rejoin multiple lines (lines 5 through 8, in
this case). The example also shows how you can have the joined lines begin in a
specific location. When a column number is specified with the command, the joined
text begins one space after the designated column (in the example, the joined text will
begin one space after column 26).
AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Multiple Lines
7 TXTJOIN 5 8 COLS 26
8
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====6 Q OR ORDER AND
=====8 Q ORDER SHIPPED.
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------
7> 8
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
=====1 Q------------------------------------------------
=====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND
=====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
=====9 Q------------------------------------------------

19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines
To split a text line into two lines:

1. Type the TS line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line,
and
2. Position the cursor to the desired location within the data portion of that line.
You can also insert lines for data entry when you split a line. In the following
example, TS2 is typed in the sequence number field of line 200 and the cursor is
positioned to column 31. When the ENTER key is pressed, everything from the cursor
position to the right column boundary is moved to begin at the left column boundary
of the new next line. Since a numeric value was specified with the command, the
appropriate number of data entry lines will be inserted between the split.
AWS: TS Line Command to Split a Line
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
TS22== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES
-
7> 8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
......
......
===2=1 RATES
If anything is typed on the inserted lines (like text or a space), the lines are retained
when the next operation is performed. If nothing is entered, the lines are removed.

19.5.2.2 Joining Lines
You can use the TJ line command to rejoin two lines. When this command is
executed, the joined line begins one space after the last word on the preceding line.
The following example shows how you can rejoin the modified contents of line 201 to
line 200. Since nothing was entered on the inserted lines, they are removed when the
operation is performed.
AWS: TJ Line Command to Join Two Lines
7 >
8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
TJ=2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT.
......
......
===2=1 SHIPPING RATES
7> 8
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
To have the joined line begin in a specific location, include a numeric value with the
command, where the value represents the column after which the text from the
following line is to be placed. For example, entering TJ35 causes the following line to
begin one space after column 35 of the line containing the command.

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS

■ Display specific occurrences of a character string using the FIRST, NEXT, LAST
and PREV primary and line commands.
■ Display all lines containing (or not containing) a specific character string using the
INCL and EXCL primary or line command. (This display is modifiable. To
produce a non-modifiable display, use the SEARCH or OMIT command.)
■ Customize the operation by: 1) qualifying the search string, and 2) designating the
resulting screen positioning.
While the examples in this chapter show strings that are in character format, you can
also locate and display data that is in hexadecimal representation. See 20.3,
“Customizing the Operation” on page 20-10 for details.
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String

In addition to the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV primary and line commands, you
can use the ATTACH command to position data to the first line containing a specific
character string. For example, you might want to copy a library member into the active
AWS and then begin the resulting display with the first line containing a specific
string, as in:
FETCH INVLIST
ATTACH /DATA/
The resulting display begins with the first line containing the string DATA.


You can use the following commands to locate and display specific occurrences of a
string:
FIRST Locates and displays first occurrence of a string.
NEXT Locates and displays the next occurrence of a string.
LAST Locates and displays the last occurrence of a string.
PREV Locates and displays the previous occurrence of a string.
For example, to locate and position the display to the first line containing the string
TEST-DATA, enter:
FIRST TEST-DATA
To locate and display the next occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is:
NEXT
Once specified, the string is remembered until you specify a different one. It is,
therefore, used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV
primary or line command that does not include a string. (The string specified with the
ATTACH command is also remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST,
INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command that does not include a
string.)
By default, the entire AWS is searched for the string (every column of every line).
You can limit the extent of the operation to specific columns or lines. For example, to
locate the last occurrence of TEST-DATA and to limit the search to columns 10
through 50, you would enter:
LAST 1= 5= TEST-DATA
where the column numbers are specified before the string. To limit the search to a
specific number of lines, specific the appropriate value after the string. For example,
to search the previous 200 lines for the first occurrence of TEST-DATA, enter:
PREV TEST-DATA 2==

that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information
about changing boundaries for the terminal session.
Finally, you can combine a column range and line limit within a command, as in:
FIRST 1= 5= TEST-DATA 2==


You can use line commands to locate specific occurrences of a string. The line
commands are FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV.
To locate a string, enter the appropriate line command in the sequence number field
and the delimited search string in the data portion of the same line. The following
example shows how to find the last occurrence of the string PRINT-FILE.
AWS: LAST Line Command
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
LAST /PRINT-FILE/TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN.
-
==37== SELECT PRINT-FILE ASSIGN TO S-SYSPRINT.
==38== DATA DIVISION.
==39== FILE SECTION.
==4=== FD TEST-DATA
==42== DATA RECORD IS TEST-RECORD.
==43== =1 TEST RECORD PIC X(8=).
==44== FD PRINT-FILE
U V
If the string was specified with a previously executed ATTACH, EXCL, FIRST,
INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command, you need not respecify it.
Once a character string is specified, it is remembered and available for use until you
change it.
By default, the entire line is searched. To limit the search to specific columns, you can
use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, the SET BOUNDS primary command
or the BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String

You can locate all lines containing a specific string by using the INCL primary or line
command. The resulting display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display,
use the SEARCH primary command.
To locate all lines not containing a specific string, use the EXCL primary or line
command. Again, the resulting display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable
display, use the OMIT primary command.
20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL
The INCL and EXCL primary commands display all lines including or excluding a
specific character string. For example, to display all lines that do not contain the string
TEST-DATA, specify:
EXCL TEST-DATA
To then display all of the lines that contain the same string, all you need enter is:
INCL
When you do not specify a string, the string specified with the previous ATTACH,
EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command is assumed.
To limit the search to specific columns or numbers of lines, specify the column
numbers before the string and the number of lines after the string. For example,
EXCL 12 4= DATA 4==
limits the search for DATA to columns 12 through 40 of the next 400 lines.
about changing boundaries for the remainder of the terminal session.
The following example illustrates the type of display resulting from the execution of
an INCL or EXCL command.

AWS: INCL Command Display
7 > AWS!7: LINES 3!!! THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 5 MATCHES

8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ===========
==36== SELECT TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN.
==4=== FD TEST-DATA
=143== OPEN INPUT TEST-DATA.
=147== READ TEST-DATA INTO HOLDING-AREA.
=2=7== CLOSE TEST-DATA.
If the number of lines containing (or not containing) the string exceeds the size of your
terminal screen, you can:
1. Press one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The direction of
the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed, or
2. Enter the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence number
field of a line and press ENTER. The scan begins with that line and continues
towards the end of the data.
To see the data that follows a particular line, you can:

■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line.
■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line.
■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (for example, by deleting a leading
zero).
After pressing the ENTER key, the resulting display begins with the designated line.
Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within the
active AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a primary or line
command. If, for example, you delete a range of lines (using either a primary
or line command), all of the displayed and non-displayed lines within that
range are deleted.
20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT
Use the SEARCH command to produce a non-modifiable display of all occurrences of

a specific string within the active AWS.
Use the OMIT command to produce a non-modifiable display of all lines not
containing a specific string.
When using these commands, the string must be delimited, as in:

SEARCH 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'

As illustrated in the following example, the resulting display contains the number and
contents of each line containing the string.
AWS: SEARCH Command Display
7 _
8
>
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
==46== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT PIC ZZ,ZZ9.
==75== MOVE INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN
==76== TO INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT.
With both commands, you can limit the operation to: 1) a specific range of columns
and 2) a specific range of lines. For example,
OMIT 2= 5= 'PIC' 15= 9==
displays all lines that do not contain the string PIC in columns 20 through 50 of lines
150 through 900.

The INCL and EXCL line commands are similar to the INCL and EXCL primary
commands. To use the line commands, enter the appropriate command in the sequence
number field of the first line to be searched. Then, enter the character string (bound by
delimiters) in the data portion of the same line.
The following example shows the display that might result after executing an INCL
line command.

AWS: Using INCL Line Command
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ============================= T O P ============
INCL /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH./
===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.
7 > AWS!7: LINES 51!! THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 3 MATCHES

8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ======
==51== =5 WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH PIC X(3).
==69== MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.
==82== AT END MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.
If INCL or EXCL retrieve more lines than can be displayed on the screen at one time,
you can reposition the display by:
1. Entering the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence
number field of a line and pressing ENTER. The scan begins with that line and
continues towards the end of the data, or
2. Pressing one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The direction
of the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed.
To see the data that follows a particular line, you can:

■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line.
■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line.
■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (by deleting a leading zero).
After pressing the ENTER key, the resulting display begins with the designated line.
Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within the
active AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a primary or line
command. If, for example, you delete a range of lines (using either a primary
or line command), all of the displayed and non-displayed lines within that
range are deleted.

20.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify the search operation.
20.3.1 Translating the Search String

The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the character string
specified with the command is to be treated. If SET MODE BASIC is in effect and
you enter the string division, it is treated as though you entered it in uppercase
(DIVISION). If SET MODE XTENDED is in effect, the string is not translated to
uppercase. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional
information.
20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String

In all of the examples using primary commands, the search string has not been
delimited. With these primary commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:
■ Includes a space (FIRST /TEST DATA/),
■ Is a numeric (LAST /519/), or
■ Is the same as a keyword operand (or its abbreviation) of the (INCL /JOB/).
When using a line command, the string must be delimited.
20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String

By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the specified string. To
limit the search operation, you can include one of the qualifier operands. These
operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX
For example, assume the active AWS contains the line:

'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST'
and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE,
OTHER, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you
can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:
THE WORD Qualifies THE as a word, only THE matches.
THE PREFIX Qualifies THE as beginning a word, only THEIR matches.

THE BEGIN Qualifies THE as beginning or being a word - THE and THEIR
match.
THE EMBED Qualifies THE as contained within a word - OTHER and BROTHER
match.
TEST END Qualifies TEST as ending or being a word - only CONTEST
matches.
TEST SUFFIX Qualifies TEST as ending a word - only CONTEST matches.
20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal

To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format:
X'string'
where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of characters,
as in:
FIRST X'C1'
When using:
■ The primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you do
not need to delimit the hexadecimal string.
When using the comparable line commands, as illustrated in the following
example, the string must be bound by delimiters.
■ For primary commands SEARCH or OMIT, the string must be bound by
delimiters. (Note that the resulting display is not modifiable and shows only the
character format of matching lines.)
The search string itself can be specified in either uppercase or lowercase characters.
For the search operation, it is translated to uppercase. Thus, you will have the same
result if you specify:
FIRST X'C1'
or
first x'c1'

AWS: Using a Hexadecimal String With a Line Command
7 >
8
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ============================= T O P =================
LAST== /X'C1'/ THOMAS W
4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4=4=444444444444444444444444
=866194=======386412====6=1=3========================
-----------------------------------------------------
===2== SMITHSOM SALLY S
4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4=4=444444444444444444444444
=24938265=====21338=====2=2=1========================
-----------------------------------------------------
===3== WALTERS JOHN
4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444=4=444444444444444444444444
=6133592======1685========1=3========================
-----------------------------------------------------
To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimal

representation, either:
■ Use the LITERAL operand with the primary commands, as in:
FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hexadecimal notation. This
method can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find
the character string X'C1' you might specify:
/X'C1/
or
/X'C1' / 2

20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display

By default, the first line containing (or not containing) the specified search string
begins the resulting display. You can change this default for your session using the
SET SEARCH command.
By specifying a screen positioning operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV,
INCL or EXCL primary command, you can also control how the resulting display is to
be positioned. The screen positioning operands are:
CJUSTIFIED The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching string
does not fall within the current margin. (This is the default
positioning.)
JUSTIFIED The display margins are always to be altered so that the first
character of the string begins in the left-most position of the line.
CENTERED The display margins are to be altered to center the matching string
on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (less
than 1), the display is not altered.
LOCKED The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching string
occurs to the left or right of the current margins.
These operands are specified after the string, as in:

FIRST /WIDGET/ JUSTIFIED
If the string is not found, the display is repositioned to: 1) the end of the active AWS
or given range if FIRST or NEXT are specified, or 2) the beginning of the active
AWS or given range if LAST or PREV are specified.

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS
This chapter describes how you can use primary and line commands to move one or
more lines within the active AWS.
Note that a move operation (unlike a copy operation) is destructive (the lines being
moved are deleted from their original location after being inserted in their new
location).
Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-1

21.1 Using a Primary Command
21.1 Using a Primary Command

When moving data, you must identify the line(s) to be moved and the destination of
the operation.
■ To move a single line: enter the MOVE command followed by the number of the
line to be moved and the destination line number, as in:
MOVE 295= 36==
In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be moved at or after line 3600. (If
the destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line number
does not exist, the data are placed at that line number.)
■ To move a range of lines: enter the MOVE command with the number of the first
and last line to be moved plus the destination line number. For example, to move
lines 2500 through 2700 at, or after, line 1500, you would enter:
MOVE 25== 27== 15==
In addition to a line number, the destination can also be indicated through the keyword
operands:
For example, to move lines 1200 through 2800 to the bottom of the active AWS, you
would enter:
MOVE 12== 28== B


As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be moved and the
destination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in the
following table.
■ To move a single line:
Type M in the sequence number field of the line to be moved. (Also include a
destination line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.)
■ To copy a block of lines:
Type MM in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be moved.
(Also include a destination line command in the appropriate sequence number
field.)
Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same screen.
You can scroll the display forward or backward while the command is
pending (for example, waiting for a matching move or destination line
command).
In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the following
line commands in the appropriate sequence number field:
Mv To move v number of lines (for example, entering M5 causes the line
containing the command plus the next four lines to be moved).
MB To move all lines from the line containing the command through the
last line of the active AWS.
MT To move all lines from the first line in the active AWS through the
line containing the command.


A Destination Only After this line.
B Before this line.
BB After the last line in this AWS.
TT Before the first line in this AWS.
O [v] Overlay At Overlay one or v number of lines.
Destination
OB Overlay all lines from the line containing
the command thru the end of this AWS.
OO Overlay a block of lines where OO appears
in the first and last line of the range of lines
to be overlaid.
OT Overlay all lines from the first AWS line
through the line containing the command.

21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands
The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line commands.
Notice that only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with corresponding
data from the source lines.
AWS: Move Line Commands Using Overlay Destination
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
M =8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).
O2 9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN
==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN
7 >
8
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
===8== SAMPLE PIC X( ).
===9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ).
==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).
The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the number of
lines being moved. For example, the upper screen in the previous figure shows that
one line is to be moved (line 800) and that two lines are to be overlaid with that data
(lines 900 and 1000). The lower screen in the previous figure shows the result, where
PIC X( ) has overlaid the corresponding blank positions in the designated lines.
(SAMPLE has been ignored since its corresponding positions contain data.)

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS
CA-Roscoe stores data in the form of variable length records not exceeding 255
characters in length. (There is one record for each line in an AWS). To keep these
records in their proper order, a six-digit sequence number is assigned to each line.
These sequence numbers are maintained by CA-Roscoe and are stored externally to the
data records themselves.
When you begin entering data in the active AWS, default sequence numbering begins
with 100 and is incremented by 100. If you copy, move or insert lines within the
existing data, the new lines are incremented by one (for example, if you insert three
lines between lines 200 and 300, the new lines are numbered 201, 202 and 203). If
you add lines to the end of the AWS, the current line number increment value is used.
If you then delete any lines, a gap is left in the sequence numbers.
22.1.1 Renumbering Lines

You can renumber the contents of the active AWS at any time during your session by
issuing the RENUMBER command. For example,
RENUMBER
renumbers the entire contents of the AWS from 100 by 100. You can change the
starting and increment values, as in:
RENUMBER 5= 1=
which renumbers the data in the active AWS from 50 by 10.
You can also renumber a range of lines within the AWS. For example,
RENUMBER FROM 9== TO 25=1 START 9== BY 1=
renumbers only lines 900 through 2501, where the starting line number is 900 and the
increment value is 10.
Finally, you can also renumber data when you bring it into the AWS using the FETCH
command. For example if you enter:
FETCH INVLIST START 5= BY 5=
the contents of the library member named INVLIST are placed in the active AWS and
that data are then renumbered beginning with 50 and incremented by 50.
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-1

22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers
By default, the data are displayed with the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers.
You can use the SET DISPLAY command to define a display format that includes or
excludes sequence numbers. See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for a
detailed description of the SET DISPLAY command.
22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data

You can add the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers to the data in the active
AWS using either the RENUMBER or SEQ command. For example, entering:
RENUMBER START 1== BY 5= IN 1 6
renumbers the AWS from 100 by 50 and places the new line numbers within columns
1 through 6 of the data. To place the current line numbers in the data (without
renumbering), use the SEQ command, as in:
SEQ IN 73 8
which places the current sequence numbers in the data beginning in column 73 and
extending for eight positions.
If you add sequence numbers to the AWS and data exists in the designated columns,
the data are overlaid by the sequence numbers.

22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute
The SEQ command can also be used to set the AWS sequence number attribute. This
attribute designates whether the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be
included when you PRINT, SAVE or SUBMIT data that is in the active AWS. For
example, if you enter:
SEQ COBOL
the sequence number attribute is set so that line numbers will be placed in columns 1
through 6 when this AWS data are PRINTed or SUBMITted. (If data appears in the
designated sequence number field, the number is omitted; data are not overlaid.)
To prevent sequence numbers from being included, you can change the attribute by
issuing the command:
NOSEQ
Once established, this attribute remains in effect until: 1) you specifically change it by
issuing another SEQ/NOSEQ command, or 2) it is overridden by the sequence number
attribute of a library member that is FETCHed or SAVEd.
22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT

The AWS sequence number attribute controls whether the CA-Roscoe generated
sequence numbers are to be included when the data are printed or submitted. You can
override the current attribute on a per execution basis.
■ When printing data, use the NUM or NONUM operand of the PRINT command to
override the AWS sequence number attribute. See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for
details.
■ When submitting data, use the SET SUBMIT command to override the attribute if
the attribute is SEQ. (If the attribute is NOSEQ, it cannot be overridden and no
sequence numbers will be included.) See 28.1, “Check Syntax” on page 28-2 for
details.
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-3

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library
Member

■ Save the contents of the active AWS as a member in the CA-Roscoe library.
■ Replace an existing member with the contents of the active AWS.
An AWS is a temporary work area. Data that is within the active AWS may be saved
at any time as a member in the CA-Roscoe library. To modify that member, you must
bring a copy of it back into the active AWS. Once there, you can use any of the
primary or line commands to change the data. The contents of the library member
remains intact until you specifically replace it.
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member

Use the SAVE command to create a library member and store the contents of the
active AWS in that member. To do so, enter the command and the name you want to
assign to the new member, as in:
SAVE INVLIST
where the entire contents of the active AWS is saved in a member named INVLIST.
(The following figure lists the CA-Roscoe member naming conventions.)
23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST:

1. Be unique (it must not already exist in your library).
2. Begin with an alphabetic or national character. (When U.S. English is in effect,
the national characters are #, $, and @.) The remainder of the name can be any
combination of alphanumeric and/or national characters.
3. Be one to eight characters in length.
If you do not want to save the entire AWS, you can include line numbers with the
command. Only the data within the designated range of lines will be saved as the
member. For example, if you enter:
SAVE INVLIST 1== 12==
only lines 100 through 1200 of the active AWS are saved in the member named
INVLIST.

23.1.2 Member Name Considerations

The keyword operands (or operand abbreviations) of commands should not be
used as library member names. While this restriction specifically includes the
following keywords and their abbreviations:
AWS A
DSN D
JOB J
LIB L
it applies to all keyword operands and their abbreviaions. For example, NOW is a
keyword operand of the SEND command. If you name a library NOW and then
attempt to send the contents of that member to another user by issuing SEND NOW,
CA-Roscoe treats NOW as an operand, not as a member name.
If you do use keyword operands as library member names, you must specify your
prefix when referencing these members. For example, if your prefix is AAA, you
would enter:
ATTACH AAA.JOB
COPY AAA.DSN
SEND AAA.NOW
It is also recommended that you do not use member names beginning with: ZZZZZ
or SAVAWS. Members created with these characters can be deleted when the
CA-Roscoe site administrator runs CA-Roscoe library maintenance.

23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes

When you create a library member, you have the option of assigning:
■ a member description,
■ a sequence number attribute,and/or
■ an access attribute.
For example, you could enter:

SAVE INVLIST 'Inventory List Program' SEQ COBOL RESTRICTED
The following table summarizes the various options you can specify.
DESCRIPTION One to 30 characters bound by a special character not found

within the description itself. If omitted, the member has no
description.
SEQUENCE SEQ Numbers to be included (beginning in
NUMBER column 73) when data submitted for
ATTRIBUTE background execution.
SEQ COBOL Numbers to be included in columns 1
through 6.
SEQ s 1 Numbers to be included, starting in column
s for length of 1.
NOSEQ Numbers are not to be included.
If omitted, the default is the current attribute of the active
AWS.
ACCESS SHARED Others allowed to access and/or execute
ATTRIBUTE your member.
EXECONLY Others only allowed to execute your
member. Meant for members containing
RPF programs.
RESTRICTED Others are not allowed to access or
execute your member.
If omitted, the current default is used. (The distributed
default is SHARED. Site management can set a different
default. You can establish your own default through the
SET SAVEATTR command.)

23.2 Updating a Member

You can update (replace) the entire contents of a library member with the contents of
the active AWS at any time. To do so, issue the UPDATE command and the name of
the member to be changed, as in:
UPDATE INVLIST
To update the contents of a member with specific lines from the active AWS, include
the appropriate line numbers with the command, as in:
UPDATE INVLIST 7== 49==
In this example, the entire contents of the member INVLIST is replaced with lines 700
through 4900 of the active AWS.
If you want to update the last member that you FETCHed, SAVEd or UPDATEd, you
can use an asterisk (*) in place of a library member name, as in:
FETCH INVLIST
RENUMBER
UPDATE Q
At the same time you are updating the contents of a member, you can also change its
description, sequence number attribute and/or access attribute, as in:
UPDATE INVLIST 'New Inventory List' SHARED
In this example, the member description and access attribute are changed; since no
sequence number attribute is specified, that attribute is not changed. (See 23.1.3,
“Assigning a Description and/or Attributes” on page 23-4 for additional information
about member descriptions and attributes.)


Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data
Sets)
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC Selection
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10
24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12
Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal . . . 25-1
25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-14
25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-26
25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-28
25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-33
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
26.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . . . 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
27.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-21
27.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22
27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25
27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-28
27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-33
27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-36
27.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-40
27.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-44
27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-52
27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-53
27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-58

27.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-59
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set
Facility
When working with OS data sets or CA-Librarian master files, you can use primary
commands or the Data Set Facility to:
■ Directly access data that is in a:
– Sequential data set.
– Partitioned Data Set (PDS) member or CA-Librarian module.
– Generation Data Group (GDG) data set.
■ Produce Selection Lists that contain information about:
– All or selected volumes.
– All or selected data sets on a specific volume (for example, the VTOC
information).
– All or selected entries on a VSAM, ICF or OS CVOL catalog.
– All or selected members/modules on a PDS (like the PDS directory) or
CA-Librarian master file (like the master file index).
■ Browse through the attached data or Selection List. While browsing, you can
locate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can also browse
other types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to the data you were
browsing.
■ Perform a variety of data management functions which include:
– Copying all or part of a data set object into an AWS
– Printing all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printer or a system
printer.
Note: A data set object can be a sequential data set, PDS member or
CA-Librarian module. In the form of a Selection List, it can also be a
PDS directory, CA-Librarian index, list of catalog entries, volume table of
contents or list of volumes.
■ Allocating, deleting, renaming, cataloging, and so on.
You can perform all of these operations using the Data Set Facility or primary
commands. Many can also be performed using Selection Lists that are provided
through the Data Set Facility.
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-1
24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

You can attach the Data Set Facility menu (see “Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu” on
page 24-3) by issuing the command:
ATTACH DSN
or
ATTACH VOLUME
If you enter either of these commands with no operand, the menu is displayed.
You can include a function code and data set name with the DSN command.
If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it, you can
bypass the Data Set Facility menu and display the function panel. For example, if you
enter:
DSN AL TEST.NEW
the Allocate Function Panel is displayed with TEST.NEW in the DATA SET field.
If no panel is associated with the function, the Data Set Facility menu is displayed
along with any information that you provided with the command. For example, if you
enter:
DSN CT TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1
the Data Set Facility menu will show CT in the FUNCTION field, TEST.NEW in the
DATA SET field and STOR01 in the VOLUMES field. To perform this function,
press the ENTER key. (The Data Set Facility menu will be redisplayed, allowing you
to perform other functions.)
If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can redisplay the menu by entering:
SELECT MENU
When the menu is displayed, you can use the command:

SELECT ALT
to bounce the display between the last available specific and generic data set name.

Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu
7 8
>
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ==>
DATA SET ==>

VOLUMES ==>
UNIT NAMES ==>
VOLUME TYPES ==>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ==> PASSWORD ==>
PGMR NAME ==> MCD CODE ==>
MODULE TYPE ==> LANGUAGE ==>
DISPLAY FORMAT ==> (Q,S,L,H) CONFIRM DELETE ==> DSN: Y MEM: Y
A - ATTACH DSN CT - CATALOG DSN P - PRINT DSN

AL - ALLOCATE DSN D - DELETE DSN R - RENAME DSN
AM - SMS MANAGED ALLOC DA - DEFINE ALIAS RL - RELEASE SPACE
C - COPY DSN DG - DEFINE GDG UC - UNCATALOG DSN
CM - COMPRESS DSN I - DATA SET INFO X - TERMINATE DSF
U V
The fields comprising this menu include:
FUNCTION Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired action. The
codes and their related actions are shown at the bottom of the
menu.
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the
data set to be involved in the designated function. The name
may be composed of one or more wildcard characters.
(Wildcards are described later in this section.)
If the name does not include wildcards, it may be qualified
with:
dsnmem A one- to eight-character PDS member or
CA-Librarian module to be attached. (This
name may be composed of one or more
wildcard characters.)
v Relative generation number of the GDG data
set to be attached, specified as 0 (most
current), a minus number (like -1) or a positive
number (like +1).
VOLUMES Enter a one- to six-character volume serial number.

If DATA SET contains a specific data set name, one to six
serial numbers can be specified. Only one volume can be
specified if a generic data set name is specified. VOLUMES
is required if the data set is not cataloged.
Note: To display a VTOC Selection List, include the
appropriate serial number and, optionally, a data set
name containing wildcards.
To display a Volume Selection List, the serial number
must include one or more wildcards cards. If no
volume ID is specified, then UNIT NAMES and/or
VOLUME TYPES is required. Do not include a data
set name.
UNIT NAMES Enter a one- to eight-character unit name associated with a
device type. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name
(like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA).
UNIT NAMES is required if the data set is not cataloged and
resides on a mass storage device. It is also required by some
functions (like CATALOG) if the specified volume(s) are not
mounted.
Note: To display a Volume Selection List, the unit type can
be specified alone or with VOLUMES or VOLUME
TYPES.
VOLUME TYPES Enter any combination of the following:
PRIVATE Include private volumes. (Abbreviate as PRV.)
PUBLIC Include public volumes. (Abbreviate as PUB.)
STORAGE Include storage volumes. (Abbreviate as STG.)
Note: VOLUME TYPES is valid only when displaying a
Volume Selection List. It can be used with
VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES. If it is omitted, all
types are included in the Selection List.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file
module to be involved in the operation. (The module must
be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of
the module is assumed. The level can be specified in one of
the following forms:
Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as
reported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The
current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the
current.
yymmddhhmmss
Date and time when the desired archive level was
current. An even number of digits (starting from
the right) can be omitted. They are assumed to
have the highest values consistent with the values
of the specified digits.
PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by your site).
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
CA-Librarian master file module password.
If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data
set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian
password.
If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.
PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used
when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian
Selection List. Only those modules marked as owned by the
specified programmer are included in the Selection List. If
omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the other
fields) are included.
MCD CODE Enter the Management code of the CA-Librarian master file.
MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2
modules.
MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules
to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List:
PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0
security status.
security status.
security status.
TEST Includes only those modules with TEST security
status.
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other
LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programming
language type of the modules that are to be included in a
CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate
modules (as qualified by other fields) are included.
DISPLAY FORMAT Enter one of the following to designate the extent of
information that is to be included in a Selection List:
HIST Only history records for the specified
CA-Librarian master file module are to be
displayed.
QUICK, SHORT, or LONG
The amount of information to be included in the
initial Selection List display.
Note: HIST, QUICK, SHORT and LONG are mutually
exclusive. (Abbreviate as H, Q, S and L
respectively.) Whichever setting you select is
remembered at sign off and is reinstated when you
sign back on.
Note: QUICK is ignored if you request a qualified
CA-Librarian Selection List.

CONFIRM DELETE Designates whether delete operations are to be confirmed

prior to execution.
DSN Specify YES or NO to control confirmation at
the data set level. (Abbreviate as Y or N.)
MEM Specify YES or NO to control confirmation at
the member/module level. (Abbreviate as Y or
N.)
With YES, a confirmation panel is displayed to allow
verification that the designated item(s) are to be deleted.
The settings in effect when you sign off are remembered and
reinstated when you sign back on.
24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC

Selection List
The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with data set
names.
Character Meaning and Examples

+ Any number of trailing characters within a level or any number of
subsequent levels.
Example: Possible Matches:
TEST1.ABC.+ TEST1.ABC.ALPHA
TEST1.ABC.BETA.SOURCE
TEST2.ABC+ TEST2.ABC.ALPHA
TEST2.ABCR.NEXT.LOAD
** Any number of index levels (including none).
TEST3.** TEST3.AAA.SOURCE
TEST3.BBB
TEST4.**.SOURCE TEST4.BBB.SOURCE
TEST4.BBB.NEXT.SOURCE
* Any single index level.
TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASE
TEST5.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE
Any number of leading characters within a level.
TEST7.*AB TEST7.CAB
TEST7.XYZAB
Any number of trailing characters within a level.
TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABC
TEST8.ABXYZ
Any number of embedded characters within a level.
TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCE
TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or

Volume Selection
While the examples of the wildcards in the following table use member/module names,
these same wildcards can be used with a volume serial number.
Character Meaning and Exanples

? Any single character.
TEST.SOURCE(RO?) ROE
ROS
ROW
* None, one or more characters.
TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*)
AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
+ None, one or more trailing characters.
TEST.SOURCE(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE
24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels

You can use the Data Set Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each function is
identified by a specific code. The codes, shown in in the following table, can be
specified with the DSN command or through the Data Set Facility menu.
Code Function Action

A Attach a data set object. Performed.
AL Allocate a data set. Panel displayed.
AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set. Panel displayed.
C Copy a data set object. Panel displayed.
CM Compress a partitioned data set. Performed.
CT Catalog a data set. Performed.
D Delete a data set, member or module. Panel displayed.
DA Define an alias. Panel displayed.
DG Define a GDG. Panel displayed.
I Inquire about a data set or volume. Performed.
P Print a data set object. Panel displayed.
R Rename a data set, member or module. Panel displayed.
RL Release unused DASD space. Performed.
UC Uncatalog a data set. Performed.
X Terminate the Data Set Facility. Performed.
The field ACTION in the previous figure indicates whether the function is performed
directly or requires additional information. For example, the information you provide
through the menu is sufficient to catalog a data set (function code CT) but insufficient
to allocate a data set (function code AL).
When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed. When

such a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to the menu by
entering in the first panel field:
=[code.code]
■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu.
■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.

■ If you specify any other code (like =AL), the appropriate function-related panel is
displayed. If you include a subfunction code, the appropriate function-related panel
is displayed and its OPTION field will contain the subfunction code.
If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can use PF
keys to scroll the panel.
Information about attaching a data set object is described in the next chapter. The
remaining Data Set Facility functions are described in Chapter 27, “Data Sets:
Performing Data Management Tasks.”
24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

You can use the Data Set Facility or a primary command to create and attach:
■ A PDS directory or CA-Librarian master file index.
■ The entries in a catalog.
■ A volume table of contents (VTOC).
■ Volume information.
The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the screen.
This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area at any time during
your session.
The first line of each Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the bottom
marker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of entries in the list exceeds the
screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the list.
The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the width of
80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate display
formats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the command:
SELECT ALT
To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command, as in:
SELECT ALT 2
See Chapter 25, “Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal” for
information about displaying each type of Selection List. The information includes a
description of the fields comprising each list. The alternate display numbers shown
with the description are for 80-column screens. Additional formats (containing
variations of the information) are available at terminals supporting wider screen sizes.

24.3.1 Entering Function Codes

You can use Selection Lists to perform a variety of functions. Each function is
identified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection List. As
illustrated in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on page 24-14,
the function codes are entered in the area shown at the left of the display.
If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed sequentially.
If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially within the
following function hierarchy:
X Terminate Data Set Facility.
D Delete data set, member or module.*
DX Delete the members of a PDS without deleting the data set itself.*
UC Uncatalog a data set.
R Rename data set, member or module.*
DA Define an alias for a: 1) PDS member or 2) non-VSAM data set or
ICF/VSAM user catalog.
DG Define a generation data group.
RL Release unused DASD space.
CM Compress a partitioned data set.
P Print a data set, member or module.
CT Catalog a data set.
I Inquire about data set.*
G Get attributes.
C Copy a data set, member or module.
AL Allocate a new data set.
AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set.
H Attach CA-Librarian module history.
A Attach data set, member or module.*
Note: * This function cannot be performed through a Selection List if the data set is
password protected. Use the Data Set Facility menu or appropriate primary
command instead.
The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes on a
Selection List. To qualify a function, specify information in the STATUS field. (See
Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about
each of the functions you can perform through a Selection List.)
Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example
7 8
>
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL
ABC.TEST.ASM
A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
I ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8==
ABC.TEST1.LOAD
D BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 13=3=
R DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
U V
The functions in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” are processed
in the following order:
1. The data set BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD will be deleted. (A delete confirmation
panel may be displayed.)
2. A rename panel will then be automatically displayed so that you can change the
name of DATA.TEST.LOAD.
3. An information panel for ABC.TEST.OBJECT is then presented and any
remaining unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing the
information, you can:
■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT NEXT.
The next function (like attach ABC.TEST.LOAD) will be performed.
■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the Selection
List) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Data Set Facility menu). In either
case, any unexecuted functions are ignored.
4. Finally, the data set ABC.TEST.LOAD is displayed.
Note that all function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid or
incomplete function is specified, the PG functions are placed in a pending state and a
message is displayed. To resume execution, you must either:
1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or
2. Remove it by typing a space over it.

If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the other function
codes are ignored -- the Data Set Facility is immediately terminated.
24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List

After a function is performed, the STATUS field will contain the appropriate
completion message. (If the Selection List was using the QUICK or SHORT display
format option, information about the affected data set, member or module is also
displayed.)
The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear after performing
the actions noted in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on
page 24-14.
Data Set: Selection List Before REFRESHing
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.LOAD )ATTACH PO U 12288 1
ABC.TEST.OBJECT )INFO PO FB 8==
ABC.TEST1.LOAD
BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD )DELETE PO U 13=3=
DATA.TEST.LOAD )RENAME PO U 12288 1
EDU.TEST.OBJECT
U V
The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more completion
messages and information will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay the
Selection List with the most current information (for example, the deleted entries
removed and renamed entries shown with their new names). To do this, enter the
command:
REFRESH
If you include the QUICK, SHORT or LONG operand with the REFRESH command,
you can designate the amount of information you want displayed. For example, to
redisplay an updated version of the Selection List shown in the previous figure without
any of the data set information, you would enter:
REFRESH QUICK

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object
at the Terminal
This chapter describes how you can display:

■ Data directly. This includes a:
– Sequential data set,
– PDS member or CA-Librarian module, or
– Specific generation of a Generation Data Group (GDG).
■ One of the following Selection Lists:
– Volume Selection List containing information about all or specific volumes.
– VTOC Selection List containing information about all or specific data sets on
a volume.
– Catalog Selection List containing all or specific catalog entries.
– CA-Librarian Selection List containing all or specific index entries.
– PDS Selection List containing all or specific directory entries.
To be attached, the data set must:

■ Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable of being
staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes can be accessed only if the
requested data set has been migrated by the IBM Hierarchical Storage Manager
(HSM) and HSM is currently active.
■ Not be under exclusive control by another executing task or allocated with
DISP=OLD in the CA-Roscoe JCL.
■ Not use the track overflow feature.
■ Not have a variable spanned record format.
■ Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the system
programmer.
Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-1
25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List

You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOC
Selection List to display a Selection List containing a CA-Librarian master file index.
Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also display a
CA-Librarian Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT DIR

Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a CA-Librarian Selection List by
entering the command and the appropriate data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE
If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include the
appropriate volume serial number and password, as in:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE VOL STOR!2 PSWD MYPASS
You can also qualify the display to include only those entries that are associated with a
specific programmer, module type or language code. For example, to attach a Selection
List containing only the names of the modules associated with the programmer named
JONES, you would enter:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.TEST PGMR JONES
Finally, you can use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing only
those modules that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE(RO+)
the resulting Selection List will contain only those modules whose names begin with
RO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with
module names.)


LIBR.SOURCE(RO?) ROE
ROS
ROW
LIBR.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
LIBR.SOURCE(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE
25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility

To display a CA-Librarian Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the
code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field.
The data set name can include a module name which contains one or more of the
wildcard characters shown in the previous table.
If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the appropriate
information in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as illustrated in the
following example.
Data Set: Attaching CA-Librarian Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> LIBR.NEWDATA

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===> SECRET
25.1.3 Selection List Description

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed when you request
information about the contents of a CA-Librarian master file.
Data Set: CA-Librarian Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL
TEST.LIBR.SOURCE STOR=1 24 PS F 4276 =
MEMBER STATUS PSWD LAST-MODIFIED DESCRIPTION CREATED
AMODULE 8212=1112338 FIRST MODULE 12/
BMODULE 8412=8==45=4 SECOND MODULE =8/
CMODULE 86=4=22=1218 THIRD MODULE =7/
DMODULE 85=5=1233==5 1=/
You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions:
A - Attach a module
C - Copy a module
D - Delete a module
G - Get module attributes
H - Attach module history
P - Print a module
R - Rename a module
X - Terminate Data Set Facility
* - Position Selection List
To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the first
area shown in “Data Set: CA-Librarian Selection List.” With Copy, Print and
Rename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the
appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks”
for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result
of each operation.
25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays
The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of
80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You
can change the display to view the different information by entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays.

The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in
which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal
supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same
information) are available.
25.1.3.2 Display Format
The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed depends
on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The following
table lists all of the information that can be provided and identifies the display format
with which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG).
If the list is produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G
(Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more modules.
25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions
The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant
as you scroll through the list and provide the following information:
DATA SET NAME Name of the CA-Librarian master file about which information
was requested.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the data set resides.
MEMS Number of modules in the master file.
ORG Data set organization.
RECFM Record format.
BLKSZ Block size of the file.
LRECL Logical record length.
The remaining fields identify the modules comprising a CA-Librarian master file and
include the information shown in the following table.
Field Name Description ALT Q S L

MODULE Name of the module ALL * * *
PSWD Non-displayed password ALL
LAST-MODIFIED Data and time ALL * *
(yymmddhhmmss) the
module was last changed
DESCRIPTION Description of the 1 * *
module contents, if
available
CREATED Date the module was 1 * *
created
PROGRAMMER Name of the programmer 2 * *
associated with the
module
LANG Code identifying the 2 * *
language contents of the
module
SSTAT Security status of the 2 * *
module
BLKS Number of blocks 2 * *
allocated to the module
RECS Number of records in the 2 * *
module

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a Selection
List containing the names of all entries on a VSAM catalog, ICF catalog or OS CVOL
that begin with a specific qualifier.
Depending on the current data set object, you can display a Catalog Selection List by
entering the command:
SELECT CAT
SELECT CAT cannot be used if you are currently viewing a CA-Librarian or PDS
Selection List for which a Catalog Selection List was not previously requested.

Use the wildcard characters shown in the following table to define the selection criteria
that is to be used to determine which data sets are to be included in the Selection List.
For example, if you specified a data set name as:
ATTACH DSN TEST.AQB+
the resulting Selection List might include such entries as:

TEST.ACB.BASE
TEST.AXYZB.PREV.SOURCE

subsequent levels.
TEST3.BBB

TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASE
TEST5.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE
TEST7.*AB TEST7.CAB
TEST7.XYZAB
TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABC
TEST8.ABXYZ
TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCE
TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

When using the Data Set Facility, type the code A in the FUNCTION field. As with
the primary command, you can use the wildcard characters shown in the previous table
with the name you specify in the DATA SET field, as shown in the following
example.
Data Set: Attaching a Catalog
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.AQB.+

VOLUMES ===>


The following example illustrates the format of a Catalog Selection List.
Data Set: Catalog Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE
TEST.Q.MACLIB 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF
DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE
TEST.AA.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR=2 33
TEST.BA.MACLIB ALIAS
TEST.CC.MACLIB SQ====1 ROOG=4 34
TEST.DDD.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR=2 33
You can use this Selection List to perform the following functions:
A Attach a data set
AL Allocate a data set
AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set
C Copy a data set
CM Compress a PDS
CT Catalog a data set
D Delete a data set
DA Define an alias
DG Define a GDG
DX Delete members of PDS; keep the data set
G Get data set attributes
I Display data set information
P Print a data set
R Rename a data set
RL Release space
UC Uncatalog a data set
X Terminate Data Set Facility
* Position Selection List
area shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must provide
additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in
Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for
details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of
each operation.
can change the display to view different information by entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G
(Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned data sets.

as you scroll through the list and show:
SEARCH ARGUMENT
Name of the data set you specified through the ATTACH DSN command
or the Data Set Facility menu.
MATCHES
Number of data set names that matched the specified data set criteria.
CATALOG NAME
Name of the catalog(s) in which the data sets are cataloged. (This field
contains *MULTIPLE CATALOGS* if the data sets in the List are
cataloged in more than one catalog.)
TYPE The type of catalog(s) searched. The types are:
CVOL Control volume.
ICF Integrated catalog facility.
VSAM VSAM user catalog.
N/A More than one catalog and they are different types.
The remaining fields identify the data sets comprising the catalog and include the
information shown in below.

DATA SET Name of data set matching the All * * *
NAME selection criteria
TYPE Type of data set, shown as: 1 * * *
AIX Alternate index
ALIAS Alias name
CLUSTER VSAM cluster
DATA Data component
GDGBASE GDG data set
base
INDEX Index
component
MASTCAT Master Catalog
NONVSAM Non-VSAM data
set
PAGESPC Page space data
set
PATH Path
USERCAT User catalog
VOLUME VSAM volume
data set
VOLUME Serial number of volume on 1 * *
which the data set resides
DEVICE Device type on which the data 1 * *
set resides
ORG Data set organization 2 *
RFM For non-VSAM data sets, 2 *
block size
For VSAM data sets, record
organization, shown as: ESDS,
KSDS, LSDS or RRDS
BLKSZ For non-VSAM data sets, 2 *
block size
For VSAM data sets,
maximum record length


LRECL For non-VSAM data sets, 2 *
logical record length. For
VSAM data sets, average
record length
CREDT Data set creation date 3 *
REFDT Date last referenced 3 *
EXPDT Data set expiration date 3 *
TRKS Number of tracks allocated to 4 *
the data set
IN-USE Number of allocated tracks 4 *
currently in use
%USED Percentage of allocated tracks 4 *
currently being used
EXT Number of extents allocated to 4 *
the data set
STORCLAS SMS storage class 5 * *
DATACLAS SMS data class 5 * *
MGMTCLAS SMS management class 5 * *
DTYP SMS data type 5 * *
Notes:
■ The STATUS field is not displayed when the CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT are
displayed.
■ The fields STORCLAS, DATACLAS, MGMTCLAS, and DTYP are displayed
only when the IBM DFSMS is installed at the site.
25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set
25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set

If you are working with Generation Data Groups (GDGs), you can attach a specific
generation by including the relative generation number with the data set name. For
example, to attach the second most current version of the data set TEST.GENSET, you
could enter the ATTACH DSN primary command as:
ATTACH DSN TEST.GENSET(-1)
or, use the Data Set Facility menu, as illustrated in the example below.
Data Set: Attaching a GDG Data Set
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.GENSET(-1)

VOLUMES ===>
When GDG is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to the one shown in
the following example.
Data Set: Sample ATTACHed Data Display
7 8
>
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 LINE =====1
> TEST.GENSET(G===1V==)
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
=====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT.
=====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.
=====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.
=====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.
The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name of
the attached data set. (As illustrated in preceding example, when a PDS member or
CA-Librarian module is attached, its name is included with the data set name.)
The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first line in the
current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you are as you scroll
forward and backward through the data.
The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==)
marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or one of the PF
keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.

25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module

You can attach a PDS member or CA-Librarian module using the ATTACH DSN
command, the Data Set Facility menu or a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List.
When a CA-Librarian module is attached, you can bounce the display between the
source code and module history records by entering:
SELECT ALT

Using the ATTACH DSN command, specify the name of the member/module in
parentheses following the data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)
If the member/module is on a data set that is not cataloged, you must specify the serial
number of the volume on which the data set resides, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) VOL SHR=7
If you are working with CA-Librarian master files, you can qualify the information
that is to be displayed. For example, you can specify which archive level of the
module you want attached, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.LIBR(MOD1) ARC -3
If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is attached.
By default, the display begins with the first line in the member/module. You can use
the LINE operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) LINE 12==
25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu

To attach a PDS member or CA-Librarian module through the menu, specify the code
A in the FUNCTION field and the member/module name in parentheses following the
data set name in the DATA SET field.
As illustrated in the following example, if the data set containing the member/module
is not cataloged, you must also include the serial number of the volume on which the
data set resides in the VOLUMES field.
Data Set: Attaching a PDS Member through the Menu
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.MASTER(INVREPT)

VOLUMES ===> SHR=7
As with the primary command, you can qualify the information you want displayed.
The following example illustrates how you can display the third archive level of the
CA-Librarian module MOD1 on TEST.LIBR.
Data Set: Attaching a CA-Librarian Module through the Menu
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.LIBR(MOD1)

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> -3 PGMR NAME ===>
If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is attached.

25.4.3 Using a Selection List

While the format of CA-Librarian and PDS Selection Lists varies based on the
information displayed, the way you use them to attach data are the same. The
following example illustrates how you would attach the member INVREPT from a
PDS Selection List.
Data Set: Attaching a Member/Module through a Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
TEST.SOURCE STOR=1 4 PO FB 16== 8=
MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD
INVIN =1.== =4/29/85 =4/29/85 14:41 36 36 =
A INVREPT
PAY52
TEST1 =1.== 11/=5/84 11/=5/84 11:42 2 2 =
25.4.4 Attached Data Description

The following example illustrates the format of an attached PDS member or
CA-Librarian module.
7 >
8
> TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
the attached data set and member/module name.
marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or the PF keys to
which scrolling functions are assigned.
25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOC
Selection List to display a Selection List containing a PDS directory.
Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also display a
PDS Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT DIR

Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a PDS Selection List by entering
the command and the appropriate data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE
If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include the
appropriate volume serial number and password, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE VOL STOR=2 PSWD MYPASS
You can also use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing only those
members that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(RO+)
the resulting Selection List will contain only those members whose names begin with
RO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with
member names.)


TEST.SOURCE(RO?) ROE
ROS
ROW
TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
TEST.SOURCE(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE

To display a PDS Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A in
the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. The data set
name can include a member name which contains one or more of the wildcard
characters shown in the previous table.
If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the appropriate
information in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as illustrated below.
Data Set: Attaching PDS Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.NEWDATA

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===> SECRET

This section provides information about PDS Selection Lists for both load libraries and
non-load libraries.
25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List
The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when you
request information about a data set that contains a load library.
Data Set: Load Library Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
TEST.LOAD STOR=5 14 PO U 12288 12288
MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES --------------
DOIT1 RENT REUS
DOIT2 RENT REUS
DOIT3 RENT REUS REFR AM=31 RM
DOIT4 RENT REUS REFR AC=1
A Attach a member
C Copy a member
D Delete a member
DA Define an alias
G Get attributes
P Print a member
R Rename a member
area shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide
each operation.

SELECT ALT [v]
The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDS
Selection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.
as you scroll through the directory. The information includes:
DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was requested.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the first resides.
MEMS Number of members comprising the data set.
ORG Data set organization of the file.
RECFM Record format of the file.
LRECL Logical record length of the file.
The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include the
information shown in the following table.

MEMBER Name of the load module or All * * *
alias.
ATTRIBUTES Attributes assigned to the load 1 * * *
module by the linkage editor.
The possible attributes and
their meanings are:
RENT Reentrant
REUS Reusable
REFR Refreshable
OVLY Overlay Format
TEST Test symbols
present
NEXC Not executable
LOAD Only loadable
SCTR Scatter Format
AC=N Authorization
Code
AM=amode Addressing
mode
RM=rmode Residency
mode
SIZE Number of bytes of storage 2 * * *
needed to load the module.
EP Offset from the beginning of 2 * * *
the load module to the entry
point.
TTR Relative track address at 2 * * *
which the load module or
alias begins.
ALIAS-OF Name of the load module 2 * * *
which this name is an alias.
LAST- Date (mm/dd/yy) and time 2 * * *
MODIFIED (hh:ss) the module was last
link-edited. (Available only
when site has applied a
system/release dependent IBM
user mod.)
SSI-DATA System status information 2 * * *

25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List
The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when you
specify a data set which contains a source, macro, procedure or object library.
Data Set: PDS Directory Selection List (Non-Load Library)
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
TEST.SOURCE STOR=1 12 PO FB 16== 8=
MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD
INVIN =1.== =4/29/85 =4/29/85 14:41 36 36
INVREPT
TEST1 =1.== 11/=5/84 11/=5/84 11:42 2 2
TEST2 =1.13 =1/=9/85 =1/23/85 16:28 5 4
WORK=
WORK1 =1.=1 =2/2=/85 =5/1=/85 =7:38 51 51
WORK2 =1.== =2/2=/85 =2/2=/85 =8:45 41 41
A Attach a member
C Copy a member
D Delete a member
DA Define an alias
| E Edit a member
G Get attributes
P Print a member
R Rename a member
| SU Submit a member
area shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide
each operation.
SELECT ALT [v]
The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate displays in
The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDS
Selection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.
as you scroll through the directory and show:
DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was requested.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the file resides.
MEMS Number of members comprising the data set.
ORG Data set organization of the file.
RECFM Record format of the file.
LRECL Logical record length of the file.
The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include the
information shown in the following table.


MEMBER Name of the member. 1/2 * * *
VV.MM Version and modification 1/2 * * *
number of the member, if
available.
CREATED Date (mm/dd/yy) the 1/2 * * *
member was created, if
available.
LAST- Date (mm/dd/yy) and time 1/2 * * *
MODIFIED (hh:ss) the member was last
changed, if available.
SIZE Number of records 1/2 * * *
currently in the member, if
available.
INIT Number of records in the 1/2 * * *
member when it was
created, if available.
TTR Relative track address at 1 * * *
which the member begins,
if available.
MOD Number of records in the 2 * * *
member that have been
modified, if available.
USER CA-Roscoe key or TSO 1/2 * * *
user ID of the individual
that created the member or
last changed it, if available.
25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set

You can use the ATTACH DSN primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a
Catalog or VTOC Selection List to view a data set.

To browse the contents of a sequential data set, enter the ATTACH DSN command
and the appropriate data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER
If the data set is not cataloged, you must specify the serial number of the volume on
which it resides. For example, if TEST.MASTER is not cataloged and resides on
volume SHR07, you could attach it by entering:
ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER VOLUME SHR=7
By default, the display begins with the first line of the data set. You can use the LINE
operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER LINE 2==
25.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu

To attach data from the Data Set Facility menu, specify A in the FUNCTION field and
the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. As illustrated in the following example
if the data set is not cataloged, you must enter the serial number of the volume on
which it resides in the VOLUMES field.
Data Set: Attaching a Data Set Through the Menu
7 >
8
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1.===72
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.MASTER

VOLUMES ===> SHR=7


To attach a data set through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach) function code
to the left of the data set name.
Note: You cannot attach password-protected data sets from a Selection List. To do
so, use the primary command or return to the Data Set Facility menu.
The following example illustrates how you would attach the data set
ABC.TEST.LOAD.
7 >
8
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1.===72 LINE ====1
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1. 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=
A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288
ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8== 8=
25.6.4 Attached Data Description

When a sequential data set is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to the
one shown in the following example.
7> 8
> TEST.SOURCE
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
the attached data set. The right side of the System Information Line shows the
number of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of
where you are as you scroll forward and backward through the data.
marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or the PF keys to
which scrolling functions are assigned.
25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

List containing information about all or selected volumes.
If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously created
Volume Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT VOL

With the ATTACH VOLUME command, you can qualify the type of information you
want included in the Selection List by:
■ Using wildcard characters shown in the following table as part of the volume
serial number, as in:
ATTACH VOL STOR+
The resulting Selection List contains only those volume serial numbers beginning
with STOR.
■ Specifying a unit type, as in:
ATTACH VOL UNIT 338=
The resulting list contains only those volumes that reside on 3380s.
■ Indicating the type of volumes that are to be included, as in:
ATTACH VOL TYPE PRIVATE
The resulting display includes only those volumes defined as private. (The other
valid volume types are PUBLIC and STORAGE. With no qualification, all types
are included.)
You can also combine these qualifiers within a single execution. For example, to
produce a Selection List containing all volumes beginning with STOR that reside on
3380s and are defined as private or public, you would enter:
ATTACH VOL STOR+ UNIT 338= TYPE PRIVATE PUBLIC

Ccharacter Meaning and Examples

??ROS1 ADROS1
MUROS1
MU*S* MUAS
MURDS1
MUROS1
MUR+ MUR
MUROS1

To display a Volume Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A
in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate information in the VOLUMES, UNIT
NAME, and VOLUME TYPES fields.
The following example shows how you can use the wildcard characters shown in
previous table to request information about all volumes beginning with STOR that
reside on 3380s and are defined as private.
Data Set: Attaching Volume Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR+
UNIT NAMES ===> 338=
VOLUME TYPES ===> PRIVATE

The following example illustrates the format of a Volume Selection List.
Data Set: Volume Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES
STOR+ 338= ALL 2
VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE INDEX SMS DEVSTAT VOLSTAT
STOR=1 4=1 338= ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R
STOR=2 4== 338= ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R
A Attach volume's VTOC
C Copy VTOC of volume
G Get volume information
I Display volume information
P Print VTOC of volume
To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the first area
shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must provide additional
information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data
Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) After
performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.
SELECT ALT [v]

table lists all of the information that can be provided, and identifies the display format
(Get Information) code to fill-in the fields for one or more volumes.
as you scroll through the display and show:
VOLUME Search string (including wildcard characters) used to build the Selection
List.
UNIT Unit type used to build the Selection List.
TYPE Device type used to build the Selection List, shown as ALL or
PRIVATE, PUBLIC and/or STORAGE.
MATCHES Number of volume matching the selection criteria.
The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the information
shown below.

VOLUME Volume serial number. ALL * * *
UNIT Channel and unit address of ALL * * *
device.
DEVTYPE Physical device type. 1/2 * * *
INDEX Code showing if device has 1 * *
indexed VTOC and, if one
exists, its status.
SMS SMS status of the device. 1 * *
DEVSTAT Device status when 1 * * *
information requested.
VOLSTAT Volume status when 1 * * *
information requested.
CYL (CONTG) Number of free contiguous 2 *
cylinders in largest
contiguous extent.
CYL (AVAIL) Number of free cylinders. 2 *

TRK (CONTG) Number of free tracks in 2 *
largest contiguous extent.
TRK (AVAIL) Number of free tracks on 2 *
device.
AV-XT Number of extents not in 2 *
use.
#DSNS Number of data sets defined 3 *
on device.
USED-XT Number of extents allocated 3 *
to the data set.
VTOC-TRKS Size of device VTOC in 3 * *
tracks.
DSCBS Number of data set control 3 *
(TOTAL) blocks in VTOC.
DSCBS (FREE) Number not in use. 3 *
%USED Amount of space used in 3 *
VTOC rounded to nearest
integer.
TRKS (TOTAL) Number of data tracks on 4 * *
device.
TRKS (USED) Number of tracks in use. 4 *
%USED Amount of space used on 4 *
the device rounded to
nearest integer.
MAXBLK Largest valid block size for 4 * * *
this device.
TRKSIZE Physical size of device track. 4 * * *
TRK/CYL Number of tracks per device 4 * * *
cylinder.

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

List containing the names and attributes of the data sets on a specific volume.
If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously created
VTOC Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT VTOC

To obtain information for a specific volume, include the serial number of that volume
with the ATTACH command, as in:
ATTACH VOLUME STOR=1
Using the wildcard characters shown in the following table, you can qualify the
displayed information. For example, to create a Selection List containing only those
data sets starting with TEST and ending with SOURCE on STOR02, you would enter:
ATTACH DSN TEST.QQ.SOURCE VOLUME STOR=2

subsequent levels.
TEST3.BBB

TEST5.A.*
TEST5.A.BASE
TEST5.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.*.SAMPLE
TEST6.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE
TEST7.*AB TEST7.CAB
TEST7.XYZAB
TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABC
TEST8.ABXYZ
TEST9.A*C.SOURCE
TEST9.AAC.SOURCE
TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

To display a VTOC Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A
in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate serial number in the VOLUMES field.
Optionally, you can specify a data set name with wildcard characters to produce a
qualified Selection List.
The following example illustrates how you might request information about the data
sets on STOR01.
Data Set: Attaching a VTOC
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1


The following example illustrates the format of a VTOC Selection List.
Data Set: VTOC Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8=
ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 13=3=
DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
A Attach a data set
AL Allocate a new data set
AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set
C Copy a data set
CM Compress a PDS
CT Catalog a data set
D Delete a data set
DA Define an alias
DX Delete member of PDS; keep the data set
G Get attributes
I Display data set information
P Print a data set
R Rename a data set
RL Release space
UC Uncatalog a data set
To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the first area
shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide
each operation.
SELECT ALT [v]
(Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned data sets.
as you scroll through the display and show:
VOLSER Serial number of the volume.
UNIT Unit address associated with the device on which the volume is
mounted.
DSNS Number of data sets on the volume.
DSCBS Number of available DSCBs on the volume.
CYL Total number of contiguous free (available) cylinders and the total
number of free cylinders.
TRK Total number of free (available) tracks and maximum number of
contiguous free tracks.
MATCHES Number of data sets on the designated volume.

The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the information
shown in the following table.

DATA SET Name of the data set. ALL * * *
NAME
ORG Data set organization. 1 * * *
RFM For non-VSAM data sets, 1 * * *
record format.
For VSAM data sets, record
organization, shown as:
ESDS, KSDS, LSDS or
RRDS.
BLKSZ For non-VSAM data sets, 1 * * *
block size.
For VSAM data sets,
maximum record length.
LRECL For non-VSAM data sets, 1 * * *
logical record length.
For VSAM data sets,
average record length.
CREDT Creation date. 2 * * *
REFDT Date last referenced. 2 * * *
EXPDT Expiration date. 2 * * *
TRKS Number of tracks allocated 3 *
to the data set.
IN-USE Number of tracks currently 3 *
in use.
%USED Percentage of allocated 3 *
tracks currently in use.
EXT Number of extents allocated 3 *
to the data set.
The STATUS field is not displayed when the fields CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT are
displayed.
25.9 Selecting the Display

You can use the SELECT command to reposition the display between or within a data
set object.
SELECT ALT To position to the next sequential alternate display format.
If the data set object has multiple formats, you can specify a
number with the command to reposition the display that specific
format, as in:
SELECT ALT 3
Entering SELECT ALT with no number positions you to the next
sequential format. If there is no alternate format, the display is
unchanged.
SELECT CAT To redisplay a previously displayed Catalog Selection List.
SELECT DIR To display a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List. Depending on
the current display, it will be either:
1. The previously displayed PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List,
or
2. The PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List associated with the
member/module you are currently viewing.
SELECT MENU To display the Data Set Facility menu.
SELECT NEXT To perform the next function specified on the last displayed
Selection List. For example, assume you indicate on a Catalog
Selection List that you want to attach three different data sets.
When you press the ENTER key, the first data set is attached.
After browsing that data set, you can view the next one by
entering SELECT NEXT.
SELECT PREV To display the previous level in the data set processing hierarchy.
For example, assume you attach a Catalog Selection List and from
it attach a data set that results in a PDS Selection List and from
this list you attached a specific member. If you enter SELECT
PREV while viewing the member, the PDS Selection List is
redisplayed. If you enter SELECT PREV again, the Catalog
Selection List is redisplayed.

SELECT string The resulting display depends on the string you specify. If the
string contains:
■ A period (like TEST.ABC), it is treated as a data set name. If
the data set appeared on a previously displayed Catalog or
VTOC Selection List, the appropriate list is displayed. If it
did not appear in any previous Selection List and a:
1. Catalog Selection List was previously displayed, the
catalog is searched for the data set, or
2. VTOC Selection List was previously displayed, the
VTOC is searched for the data set.
■ More than six characters, it is treated as a PDS member or
CA-Librarian module name. If the member/module did not
appear in a previous Selection List, the current
PDS/CA-Librarian master file is searched for the designated
member/module.
■ Six or less characters, the name is treated as:
1. A member/module if a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection
List was previously displayed.
2. A volume serial number if a PDS or CA-Librarian
Selection List was not previously displayed.
The appropriate Selection List is then displayed.
SELECT VOL To redisplay a previously displayed Volume Selection List.
SELECT VTOC To display a VTOC Selection List.
Depending on the current display, it will either be the previously
displayed Selection List or the Selection List representing the
contents of the volume on which the data set you are currently
viewing resides.
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects

■ Detach a data set object.
■ Locate specific occurrences of a string with the attached data set object.
■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned a
name.
■ Reattach a data set object after viewing other forms of attached data (like an
AWS).
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects
26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects

You can explicitly detach the Data Set Facility by entering the command:
DETACH DSN
The Data Set Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the menu,
any function panel or any selection list. This function code is comparable to the
DETACH DSN command. (If you enter X on a Selection List that includes other
function codes, those functions will be ignored.)
ATTACHing another data set object causes the current data set object to be implicitly
detached. If you are detaching a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian
module and you have assigned NOTE names, those names are deleted when the data
are detached.
If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHing
an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Data Set Facility is placed in a pending
state and can be reattached at any time.

26.2 Locating Data
26.2 Locating Data

This sections describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a data set
object for all or specific occurrences of a character string.
While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format,
you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See 26.2.3,
26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of a
string.
FIRST Locate the first occurrence of a string.
NEXT Locate the next occurrence of a string.
LAST Locate the last occurrence of a string.
PREV Locate the previous occurrence of a string.
For example, if you enter:

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVLIST)
FIRST DIVISION
The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the member/module INVLIST will be
the first line of the resulting display.
To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is:
LAST
Once you have specified a search string, it is remembered and used with any
subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command that does not
include a string.
By default, the full line length is searched for your string. You can include column
numbers with the command to qualify the search for a single operation. For example:
NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE
examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After the
command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundaries
for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4,
“Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)
Also, by default, every line in the data set object is searched until it finds the string or
reaches the site-defined maximum. You can limit the search to a specific number of
lines by specifying the number after the string. For example, to find the last
occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of currently displayed data set object,
you would enter:

26.2 Locating Data
LAST SAMPLE 2==
After the command executes, the site-defined value is reestablished. If you want to
continue searching 200 lines at a time, you can either:
■ Press PF6 or PF18 to reexecute the last command, or
■ Use the SET DSNCNT command to alter the line limit for the rest of your session
or until you change it with another SET DSNCNT command. (See the description
of SET DSNCNT in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.)
26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String

You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular character
string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the
string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data set object,
you would enter:
INCL TEST-DATA 1==
If you do not specify a number, a site-defined maximum number of lines are searched.
(You can use the SET DSNCNT command to establish your own search limits. See the
CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for details.)
You can also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. For
example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string
TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:
EXCL 3= 8= TEST-DATA
If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, press
one of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCL
operation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like TEST-DATA).
The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The search
string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limits
apply only to the command with which they are specified.)
If you determine that you want to see the data that follows a particular line, use:
■ The cursor positioning keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and then
press the ENTER key, or
■ The POINT command. For example, if an EXCL display includes line 150 and
you want to display the lines following it, you would enter:
POINT LINE 15=
The resulting display will begin with line 150.

26.2 Locating Data
Doing either of these actions or entering any primary command terminates the
INCL/EXCL operation.
Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can enter
any function code(s). If a function results in another display (like attaching an
entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.
26.2.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.
26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String
The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the string specified
with FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL is to be treated. See Chapter 3,
“Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.
26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String
In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. With
these commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:
■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/),
■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or
■ Is the same as a keyword operand or operand abbreviation of the command (like
INCL /JOB/).

26.2 Locating Data
26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String
By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the search string. To
limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier operands. These operands are
WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX.
For example, assume the attached data set object contains the line:
BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you can
designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:
THE WORD Qualifies the string as a word; only THE matches.
THE PREFIX Qualifies the string as beginning a word; only THEIR matches.
THE BEGIN Qualifies the string as beginning or being a word; THE and THEIR
match.
THE EMBED Qualifies the string as contained within a word; OTHER and
BROTHER match.
TEST END Qualifies the string as ending or being a word; only CONTEST
matches.
TEST SUFFIX Qualifies the string as ending a word; only CONTEST matches.
26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String

X'string'
as in:
FIRST X'C1'
When using the primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL,
you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string.

■ Use the LITERAL operand with the FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or
EXCL primary commands, as in:
FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
/X'C1/ or /X'C1' /

26.2 Locating Data
26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning
If a line containing (or not containing) the search string is found, it becomes the first
displayed line of the resulting display. By specifying a screen positioning operand with
the command, you can control how the display is positioned. The screen positioning
operands are:
positioning.)
on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (for
example, less than 1), the display is not altered.


■ Reposition the currently attached data set object.
■ Assign names to specific lines within a sequential data set, PDS member or
CA-Librarian module and then later reposition the display to those named
locations.

If the data set object that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal
screen, you can reposition the display by:
■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to reposition
the display to begin with line 2500, you would enter:
POINT LINE 25==
POINT LINE T or
POINT LINE B
When browsing a Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected field
for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.
26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines

When you are browsing data (like a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian
module), you can assign a one- to six-character name to the line containing the string;
thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to assign the name LOC1 to
the first displayed line, you would enter:
NOTE LOC1 or
NOTE Q LOC1
The asterisk (*) is optional. If omitted or specified without qualification, it represents

the first displayed line.

To assign a name to a line that is not the first displayed line, qualify the asterisk. For
example, to assign the name LOC2 to the line that is five lines after the first displayed
line, you would enter:
NOTE Q+5 LOC2
Once you have assigned a name to a specific line, you can return to that line at any
time by using the POINT command. To return to the line noted as LOC1, you would
enter:
POINT LOC1
If you issue the command:

STATUS NOTES
a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed.
If you determine that you no longer need to note a specific line, you can eliminate the
NOTE name with the DROP command, as in:
DROP LOC2
Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the data,
attach another data set or go to a higher level (for example, if you display a PDS
Selection List after viewing a member of that PDS).

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object

While you are working with a data set object, you can attach an AWS, a library
member or a job, browse that data and then return to your data set object. The
following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and
then reATTACH the data set object you have been viewing.
7 ATTACH_
8
>
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================== T O P ============
7 ATTACH DSN )
8
> D PENDING
> AWS (PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================== T O P =================
7 >
8
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============

The center screen in previous example shows D PENDING. This note is provided to
remind you that the Data Set Facility can be reattached at any time.
When you reattach the Data Set Facility, the display begins with the first line of the
previous display. To reattach at a different location within the same data set object,
you can:
■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as in:
ATTACH DSN Q LINE 5==
■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a NOTE
name, as in:
POINT DSN NAME1
■ Use the DSN operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to
begin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST DSN /DD/
■ Use the DSN operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display
with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:
INCL DSN /DD/

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data
Management Tasks
This chapter describes how you can perform the following functions at any time during
your terminal session:
■ Allocating a data set.
■ Cataloging a data set.
■ Compressing a partitioned data set.
■ Copying a data set object into an AWS.
■ Defining an alias for:
1. a non-VSAM data set or ICF/VSAM user catalog, or
2. member of a partitioned data set.
■ Defining a Generation Data Group.
■ Deleting a data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module.
■ Inquiring about a specific data set or volume.
■ Printing a data set object.
■ Renaming a data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module.
■ Uncataloging a data set.
■ Writing to a data set.
These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Data Set Facility
menu or the appropriate Selection List.
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

You can use the ALLOCATE primary command or one of two Allocate Function
Panels to allocate space for a data set.
When allocating a data set, note that:

■ Data sets can be created only on DASD volumes that are mounted and online or
on mass storage volumes that can be staged.
■ VSAM data sets can be allocated only on systems that have IBM DFSMS
installed. At sites where DFSMS is not installed, use the IBM Access Method
Services DEFINE command to create VSAM data sets.

You can issue the ALLOCATE DSN command at any time during a terminal session
to allocate space for a data set, as in
ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR=2
INCR TRK PRIMARY 16 SECONDARY 1= DIR 5
DSORG PO RECFM FB LRECL 8= BLKSIZE 352=
Note: CA-Roscoe commands must be complete within a line (commands cannot be

continued.). While the ALLOCATE command example violates this rule, it is
provided to illustrate the type of information you can specify with the
command.
If the attributes, space requirements, or device location for your new data set are
similar to those of an existing data set, you can use the LIKE operand to establish the
existing data set as a model for the new one. For example:
ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR=2 LIKE TEST.OLD
uses the attributes, space parameters and device location of the existing data
(TEST.LOAD) as the model in allocating the new data set (TEST.NEW).
If DFSMS is installed at your site:

■ You can use DFSMS-related operands to further control the allocation of your
data set. For example, to allocate a data set with the attributes contained in the
DFSMS data class DATAF on one of the volumes referred to by the DFSMS
storage class STCLMAIN, you might issue the command:
ALLOCATE DSN TEST.SMSNEW DATACLAS DATAF STORCLAS STCLMAIN ...

■ You can also allocate certain types of VSAM data sets if the proper modeling
information is established in the DFSMS data classes. For example, assume that
the DFSMS data class CLUSTER contains the required information to allocate a
more commonly used type of VSAM key-sequenced data set. You can allocate
such a cluster with:
ALLOCATE DSN VSAM.CLUSTER DATACLAS CLUSTER KEYOFF 64 ...
Note that in this example, the KEYOFF operand is used to either override
information in the data class definition or to provide information that is not
present in it.
27.1.2 Using a Function Panel

From the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, or through the
DSN command, you can display either:
■ The standard Allocate Function Panel by issuing the function code AL, or
■ The Allocate SMS Function Panel by issuing the function code AM. This panel,
which is available only at sites where DFSMS is installed, can be used to allocate
VSAM data sets or specify SMS class construct information.
If the name you specify when requesting either panel is:

■ New, that name is shown in the DATA SET field. All other fields in the panel are
set to blanks.
■ Existing, that name and all of its allocation information is displayed.
You can then verify the data set name and add or change the appropriate information.
When you press the ENTER key, the data set will be allocated using the values
displayed.
The following example assumes you entered the AL function code and that you want
to allocate a new data set with the same attributes as an existing data set named
TEST.OLD. Once the information is displayed, you can change the data set name and
make any other necessary attribute changes. When you press the ENTER key, the
allocation is performed.

27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel
The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AL function
code.
Data Set: Allocating Through a Function Panel
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
ALLOCATE NEW DATA SET
DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD

VOLUMES ===> STOR=2
UNIT NAMES ===>
UNITS ===> TRK (BLK, TRK, or CYL)

PRIMARY ===> 16 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
SECONDARY ===> 1= (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
DIRECTORY ===> 6 (VALID FOR PDS DATA SETS ONLY)
DSORG ===> PO
RECFM ===> FB
LRECL ===> 8=
BLKSIZE ===> 352=
KEYLEN ===>
EXPDT ===> (MM/DD/YY)
CATALOG ===> YES (Y,N)
U V
The fields comprising this panel include:
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to
be allocated. The name may be further qualified with:
+v Relative generation number of GDG data set to be
allocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which
the data set is to be allocated. One to six serial numbers can be
specified.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified and the
volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If the volume is
not mounted and the unit name refers to a mass storage device,
an MSS mount is attempted.
■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted, only
those volumes within the designated generic or esoteric group
that have a Use attribute of STORAGE are eligible for
allocation.

Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine which

volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field of the resulting
display will contain STR if the volume's Use attribute is
STORAGE.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, an
allocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCB control
block is attempted. If ETSO is not active, an allocation is
attempted using the unit name SYSALLDA.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the
device type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can be
either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined
esoteric name (like SYSDA).
UNITS Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL or TRK.
PRIMARY Enter the number of units to be used for the primary allocation. If
omitted, the default is 0.
If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no space is
allocated on the designated volume or unit, however a format-1
DSCB is created in the VTOC.
SECONDARY Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary space
allocation. If omitted, the default is 0.
DIRECTORY Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space is to be
reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (like DSORG=PO or
DSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.
DSORG Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO, POU,
PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is undefined.
RECFM Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the record format
is undefined.
LRECL Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0 and
32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
BLKSIZE Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760. If
■ If UNITS BLK is specified, BLKSIZE is required and the value
may not exceed 65535.

KEYLEN Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. If
EXPDT Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent with the
format displayed on the panel. (This format is established by the
SET DATEFORM command.)
If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to represent a
year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999 can only be
specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At such sites, the
year must not exceed 2155.
If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.
CATALOG Designates whether the data set is to be cataloged by entering either:
YES Catalog the data set.
If the data set cannot be cataloged (that is, it is already
cataloged or you have insufficient access authority for
the catalog), the command is rejected. Reexecute the
command, specifying NO.
NO Do not catalog the data set.
If omitted, the data set is cataloged.

27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel
The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AM function
code.
Data Set: Allocating SMS Through a Function Panel
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
ALLOCATE NEW SMS-MANAGED DATA SET
DATA SET ==> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE

MGMTCLAS ==> SMS (BLANK FOR DEFAULT MANAGEMENT CLAS
STORCLAS ==> SMS (BLANK FOR DEFAULT STORAGE CLASS)
VOLUMES ==> SMS==1
UNITS ==> TRK (BLK, TRK, CYL, KB, OR MB)
PRIMARY ==> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
SECONDARY ==> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
DIRECTORY ==> (VALID FOR PDS DATA SETS ONLY)
DATACLAS ==> (BLANK FOR DEFAULT DATA CLASS)

DSORG ==> PO RECORG ==>
RECFM ==> FB KEYLEN ==>
LRECL ==> 8= KEYOFF ==>
BLKSIZE ==> 8== EXPDT ==> MM/DD/YYYY
SECMODEL ==> TEST.SMS.OLD1 GENERIC ==>

DSNTYPE ==> LIB
U V
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data
set to be allocated. The name may be further qualified with:
+v Relative generation number of GDG data set to be
allocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.
MGMTCLAS Enter the one- to eight- character DFSMS management class
to be assigned to the data set.
STORCLAS Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS storage class to be
assigned to the data set.
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of volume on
which the data set is to be allocated. One to six serial
numbers can be specified.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified and
the volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If the
volume is not mounted and the unit name refers to a mass
storage device, an MSS mount is attempted.

■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted,

only those volumes within the designated generic or
esoteric group that have a Use attribute of STORAGE are
eligible for allocation.
Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine
which volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field of
the resulting display will contain STR if the volume's Use
attribute is STORAGE.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, an
allocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCB
control block is attempted. If ETSO is not active, an
allocation is attempted using the unit name SYSALLDA.
UNITS Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL, TRK, KB or
MB.
With BLK, CYL and TRK, the primary and secondary
quantities are to be used as specified.
With KB, the primary and secondary quantities are to be
multiplied by 1024.
With MB, the primary and secondary quantities are to be
multiplied by 1024576.
PRIMARY Enter the number of units to be used for the primary
If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no space
is allocated on the designated volume or unit, however a
format-1 DSCB is created in the VTOC.
SECONDARY Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary space
DIRECTORY Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space is
to be reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (like
DSORG=PO or DSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.
DATACLAS Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS data class to be
assigned to the data set.

DSORG Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO,
POU, PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is
undefined.
RECFM Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the record
format is undefined.
LRECL Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0
and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
BLKSIZE Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760.
If omitted, the default is 0.
■ BLKSIZE is required if UNITS BLK is specified, and the
value cannot exceed 65535.
RECORG Enter the VSAM data set record organization, specified as:
ES VSAM entry-sequenced data set.
KS VSAM key-sequenced data set.
LS VSAM linear space data set.
RR VSAM relative record data set.
If omitted, a non-VSAM data set is assumed.
KEYLEN Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. If
KEYOFF Enter the VSAM key-sequenced data set key offset as a value
between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
EXPDT Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent with
the format displayed on the panel. (This format is established
by the SET DATEFORM command.)
If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to
represent a year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999
can only be specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher.
At such sites, the year must not exceed 2155.
If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.

SECMODEL Enter the name of a RACF discrete or generic profile that is to

be used in creating a discrete RACF profile for the data set.
DSNTYPE Designate whether the data set to be allocated will be a PDSE
by entering the value LIB When other data set types are
defined (non-PDSE), this field is blank.
GENERIC Designate whether the RACF profile identified in the
SECMODEL field is a generic profile by entering either:
Y The profile is generic.
N The profile is not generic.
If omitted, the profile is assumed to not be generic.

27.2 Cataloging a Data Set

You can catalog a data set using the CATALOG primary command. For example, to
add a catalog entry for the data set TEST.NEW on STOR01, you would enter:
CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1
You can also enter the CT function code, data set name and volume serial number on
the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> CT
DATA SET ===> TEST.NEW

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1
UNIT NAMES ===>
Or enter CT before the appropriate name on a VTOC Selection List, as in the

following example.
Data Set: Cataloging Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=
TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288
CT TEST.NEW PO FB 8== 8=

When using the CATALOG primary command or the Data Set Facility menu, you can
catalog a data set that resides on a maximum of six volumes, as in:
CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1 STOR=2 STOR=3
You cannot, however, catalog an SMS-managed data set using this facility.
Note: If the first (or only) volume specified is available for inspection, CA-Roscoe
verifies that the designated data set exists. If the data set does not exist, the
request is rejected. No check is made for any other volumes specified.
If the first (or only) volume specified is not available for inspection, no check
is made for the data set's existence; the request is honored. (This permits
catalog entries to be created for tape and DASD data sets residing on volumes
that are only accessible from another system.)

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

You can use primary commands, the Copy Function Panel (from the Data Set Facility
menu) or a Selection List to copy all or part of a data set object into an AWS.

You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or selected portions of a data
set object into an AWS.
One of these commands is COPY DSN, which allows you to copy all or selected lines
of the currently attached data or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS. The
following example illustrates how you can copy all of the attached data set object to
the top of the active AWS.
Data Set: Copying Attached Data
7 COPY DSN T_
8
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of the
following:
v Copy at or after the line specified by v.
T Copy to the top of the AWS.
B Copy to the bottom of the AWS.
* Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.
R Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.
Other primary commands allow you to copy:

■ Lines Containing/Not Containing a Specific String:
COPYS copies line(s) containing a specified character string from a data set object
into an AWS.
COPYX copies line(s) not containing the specified character string from a data set
object into an AWS.
For example, to copy every line from the currently attached data set object that
contains the string SAMPLE to the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter:
COPYX DSN /SAMPLE/ B

■ Between Split Screens:

XCOPY copies all or part of a data set object from one split screen into the active
AWS of the screen containing the command.
XCOPYS and XCOPYX copy selected lines from the data set object attached in
one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.
All of these commands allow you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as in:
COPYS DSN /DATE-FIELD/ 9== 18== 1==
which copies every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900 through
1800 of the currently attached data set object at or after line 100 in the active AWS.
27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List
When a Selection List is displayed, you can:

■ Copy a specific range of lines. Treat the Selection List as though it is numbered
from 1 by 1, as in:
COPY DSN 1= 5= T
■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are included in
a copy operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR operand, as in:
COPY DSN T NOHDR
■ Include all available information. By default, only the information available
through the current display format is included in the operation. To include all
available information, use the FULL operand, as in:
COPY DSN 1= 5= T FULL
For additional information about using these commands, see Chapter 15, “AWS:
Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”

27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data
The IMPORT command can be used to copy all or part of a specific data set into the
active AWS or a designated library member, without accessing the data set first. (Note
that when IMPORTing into the active AWS, the current AWS contents is overlaid by
the IMPORTed data.)
You can use IMPORT to:

■ Copy a sequential data set: enter IMPORT DSN= followed by the data set name,
as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER
If the data set is not cataloged, use the VOL= operand to identify the serial
number of the volume on which it resides, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER,VOL=SHAR=7
■ Copy a PDS member or CA-Librarian module: specify the appropriate name in
parentheses following the file name, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)
■ Copy selected lines to the active AWS or a library member: Use the RECORDS=
operand to specify the range of lines that is to be copied, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER RECORDS=(1==,7==)
To copy those same lines into a specific library member, use the TO= operand
with the appropriate library member name, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) RECORDS=(1==,7==) TO=WORKCOPY
■ Copy a formatted PDS directory or CA-Librarian master file index into the active
AWS:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD(Q) : PDS or CA-LIBRARIAN.
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD LIBRARIAN-I : CA-LIBRARIAN only.
■ Copy a particular archived version of a CA-Librarian master file module. Specify
the ARC= operand, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(INVREPT), ARC=-3
where the module archived three levels back is copied. (If ARC= is omitted, the
most current version is copied.)
■ Copy history records for a module. Use the LIBRARIAN-H operand, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(READSMR),LIBRARIAN-H


The Copy Function Panel is displayed when you specify the C function code on the
Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command.
The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to place one copy of
lines 1200 through 2500 of the data set TEST.SOURCE after line 500 of the active
AWS.
Data Set: Copying Through the Menu
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
COPY DATA SET
OPTION ===> C
DATA SET ===> TEST.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===>
PGMR NAME ===> MCD CODE ===>
MODULE TYPE ===> LANGUAGE ===>
1ST LINE ===> 12== LAST LINE ===> 25==
AWS TARGET ===> 5== AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1

LIST HEADERS ===> YES
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST C-COPY DATASET/INDEX S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

U V
OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to
perform. The codes are:
C Copy a sequential data set or PDS/CA-Librarian
Selection List.
S Copy a single member/module.
M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use
the PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and
LANGUAGE fields to produce a qualified
CA-Librarian Selection List.)

DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the
data set to be copied. The name may be further qualified
with:
dsnmem One- to eight-character PDS member or
CA-Librarian module name.
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set
to be copied, specified as 0 (most recent) or a
minus number (as in -1).
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume
on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be
specified. This field is required if the data set is not
cataloged.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with
the device type(s) on which the data set resides. It may be
either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a
site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA). This field is
required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a mass
storage device.
ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file
module to be copied. (The module must be in ARCHIE
format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is
copied. Specify the level using one of the following forms:
current.
yymmddhhmmss 0
Date and time the desired archive level was
current. An even number of digits (starting from
the right) can be omitted. They are assumed to
have the highest values consistent with the values
of specified digits.

PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by the site).

If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data
set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian
password.
PGMR NAME Enter a one- to 15-character programmer name. Only those
modules marked as owned by the specified program are
included in the resulting CA-Librarian Selection List. If
omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the other
modules.
MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules
to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List:
PROD0 Includes modules with PROD0 security status.
TEST Includes modules with TEST security status.
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other
LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programming
CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate
modules (as qualified by other fields) are included.
1ST LINE Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If omitted,
the operation begins with the first line.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If omitted,
the operation ends with the last line.

AWS TARGET Enter the destination of the operation by specifying:

v Number of the line at or after which the data are to be
copied within the active AWS.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently
positioned.
B After the last line in the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of active the AWS with the
copied data.
If omitted, the default is R.
AWS COPY COUNT Enter the number of copies of the attached data that are to be
placed in the AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.
LIST HEADERS Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List header
lines are to be included in the copy operation.


If the Selection List is produced Through the Copy Function panel, the only operation
you can perform is a copy. To do this, type a C before the name of each entry to be
copied. If you do not specify a destination in the STATUS field, the data replaces the
current contents of the active AWS.
If any other form of Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the functions
that are valid with that Selection List. When performing a copy operation, type a C
before the name of each entry in the list to be copied. Then, tab to the STATUS field
and enter a destination code. The destination codes are:
B Copy to the bottom of the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.
T Copy to the top of the active AWS.
The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple data sets from a
Selection List.
Data Set: Copying Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
C TEST.NEW ) PO FB 8=
C TEST.NEW1 T PO U 12288 1
C TEST.NEW2 B PO FB 8==
Note: Password-protected data sets cannot be copied from a Selection List. Use the
Copy Function panel or the COPY primary command.

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set
27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set

You can compress a partitioned data set using the COMPRESS command. If the PDS
is not cataloged, include the serial number of the volume containing the PDS, as in:
COMPRESS DSN TEST.SAMPLE VOL STOR=2
or, by entering the CM function code, data set name and volume containing it on the
Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.
Data Set: Compressing Through the Menu
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> CM
DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
or, by entering the CM code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the following
example.
Data Set: Compressing Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=2 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
TEST.ALPHA PO FB 8= 8=
TEST.BETA PO U 122 88 12288
CM TEST.SAMPLE PO FB 8== 8=
Your site management has the option of designating the utility program that is to
perform the compression processing. (As distributed, the IBM utility IEBCOPY is
used.) The designated data set must be eligible for compression processing by that
utility program. (See the description of the COMPRESS command in the CA-Roscoe
Command Reference Guide for a list of requirements.)
When the data set is compressed, messages are directed to a library member named
ZZZZZCMP. You can use the SET DSNCMLST command to designate the type of
messages you want written to that member.

27.5 Define Alias
27.5 Define Alias

You can use a primary command or function panel to define an alias for a:
■ Non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog, where:
– If an alias is being defined for a non-VSAM data set, the data set must be
cataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog accessible to CA-Roscoe.
– The catalog entry created for the alias must be in the same catalog as the
entry for the related non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user
catalog. Attempts to define an alias with a name that causes an entry to be
created in a different catalog are rejected.
■ PDS member, where:
– If the alias is being defined for a non-load module (or is an alias in a load
module), the PDS directory record for the alias is created by copying all
information from the related member's directory record and setting the alias
flag in the new directory record.
– If the related member is a load module, the related member's CESD
(Composite External Symbol Directory) records are read to determine if the
requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module.
If it is not defined as a symbolic name, the PDS directory record for the alias
is created by copying all information from the related member's directory
record and setting the alias flag in the new directory record.
If the requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module,
the request is rejected if it is not one of the following types:
Control Section Definition,
Entry Label Reference,
Common Control Section,
Resolved External Reference, or
Resolved Weak External Reference.
Additionally, if the load module is in overlay format, the symbol must refer to
a location in the root segment (like segment 1) of the load module.
– If the requested alias name is an eligible symbolic name in the load module,
the PDS directory record for the alias is created by first copying all
information from the related member's directory record, then overlaying the
following fields based on the information found in the ESD (External Symbol
Dictionary) data for the symbol:
Entry Point Offset,
Addressing Mode,
Overlay Control Information, and
Scatter Load Information.

27.5 Define Alias

You can use the DEFINE ALIAS command to:
■ Assign an alias to a PDS member. For example, to assign the alias XYZ to the
member ABCDEFGH on the cataloged partitioned data set TEST.ALPHA, you
would enter:
DEFINE ALIAS XYZ RELATE TEST.ALPHA(ABCDEFGH)
■ Assign a data set or catalog alias. For example, to establish TEST as the alias for
the catalog named CATALOG.TEST, you would enter:
DEFINE ALIAS TEST RELATE CATALOG.TEST

To display the Define Data Set Alias Function panel, specify the DA function code on
the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog Selection List, PDS Selection List or VTOC
Selection List or with the DSN command.
The following example illustrates how you might establish SAMPLE as the alias for
the user catalog named CATALOG.TEST.
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DEFINE DATA SET ALIAS
DATA SET ===> CATALOG.TEST

VOLUME ===>
UNIT NAME ===>
PASSWORD ===>
ALIAS NAME ===> SAMPLE

DATA SET Enter the: 1) fully qualified name of the PDS in which the alias is to
be created plus the one- to eight-character name of the member for
which the alias is to be created; or 2) name of the non-VSAM data
set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog for which the alias is to
be created.
VOLUME Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which
the PDS resides. (VOLUME is required if the data set is not
cataloged.)
UNIT NAME Specify the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the
device on which the PDS resides.
■ UNIT NAME is required if the data set resides on a mass
storage volume and is not cataloged.

27.5 Define Alias
PASSWORD Enter the site-defined OS password for the PDS.

ALIAS Enter either the: 1) one- to eight-character name of the alias to be
created for the PDS member, or 2) one- to 44-character alias for the
non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog.

27.6 Define GDG
27.6 Define GDG

You can define a generation data base (for ICF and VSAM catalogs) or a generation
data set index (for CVOL catalogs) using the DEFINE GDG command or the Define
Generation Date Group Function panel.
Notes:
■ The GDG must be cataloged in a catalog that is accessible to CA-Roscoe.
■ Both the primary command and the function panel allow you to specify a retention
period. The retention period may be any date up to the 365th day of the year 2155
at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites, the maximum retention
period is the 365th day of the year 1999.

You can use the DEFINE GDG command to create a GDG. By including the LIKE
operand, it can be modeled on the characteristics of an existing base or index. For
example, assume you want to create a new GDG named TEST.GDG.NEW and model
it on the existing GDG named TEST.GDG.OLD. The command you would enter might
look like:
DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD
If you omit LIKE, other operands of this command can be used to define all of the
appropriate characteristics. These operands can also be used to override specific
characteristics of the model you have specified through LIKE. For example, if you
want to use all of the characteristics of TEST.GDG.OLD except for the number of
generation data sets that may be associated with the new GDG, you might enter:
DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD LIMIT 1=

You can display the Define Generation Data Group Function panel by specifying the
DG function code on the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog Selection List or with
the DSN command.
If you specify the name of an existing GDG when you request the panel, the panel
will contain that name and the characteristics associated with that GDG (as illustrated
in the following example). You can then change the GDG name and make any other
necessary changes. When you press the ENTER key, the GDG is defined.

27.6 Define GDG
Data Set: Defining a GDG
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
DEFINE GENERATION DATA GROUP
GDG NAME ===> TEST.GDG.OLD
LIMIT ===> 15 (1-255)

EMPTY ===> NO (Y,N)
SCRATCH ===> NO (Y,N)
OWNER ===>
FOR ===> (1-9999)
TO ===> (MM/DD/YYYY)

GDG NAME Enter the one- to 35-character name of the generation data group to
be created.
LIMIT Enter the maximum number of generation data sets that can be
associated with the GDG. The value must be between 1 and 255.
EMPTY Designates the action that is to be taken when the maximum number
of generation data sets have been reached for the GDG and another
generation data set is to be cataloged. The action can be specified
as:
YES Uncatalogs all generation data sets.
NO Uncatalogs only the oldest generation data set when the
limit is reached.
Note: The disposition of the data set's format-1 DSCB
in the VTOC is controlled through SCRATCH.

27.6 Define GDG
SCRATCH Designates whether the generation data set's format-1 DSCB in the
VTOC is to be deleted when the data set is uncataloged (either
implicitly through EMPTY or explicitly through a delete or
uncatalog request). The action can be specified as:
YES Deletes the generation data set's format-1 DSCB from
the VTOC when the data set is uncataloged. (This
allows the space assigned to the data set to be made
available to other users.)
NO Prevents the data set's format-1 DSCB from being
deleted, causing the space to remain allocated to the data
set.
OWNER Enter the one- to eight-character owner identifier that is to be placed
in the GDG's catalog entry. OWNER is ignored if the GDG is to be
cataloged in a CVOL catalog.
FOR Enter the number of days for which the GDG is to be kept. It must
be a value between 0 and 9999.
TO Enter the date through which the GDG is to be kept.
■ FOR and TO are mutually exclusive.
They are ignored if a GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL. If an
SMS-managed data set is to be created in an ICF catalog, FOR
or TO can be overridden by the specifications in the data set's
SMS management class.
The date can resolve to any date up to the 365th day of the year
2155 at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites,
the maximum retention period is the 365th day of the year 1999.

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

You can use a primary command, the Delete Function Panel (from the Data Set
Facility menu) and/or a Selection List to delete:
■ One or more PDS members or CA-Librarian modules.
■ All of the members comprising a partitioned data set while retaining the data set
itself.
■ An entire data set or CA-Librarian master file.
You can also delete the following types of VSAM objects: ALIAS, AIX, CLUSTER,
GDGBASE, PAGESPACE and PATH.
Notes:
■ When deleting a data set or member/module through the Delete Function Panel or
a Selection List, you have the option of requesting that a Delete Confirmation
panel be displayed. You can control this option using the ATTACH DSN
command or the Data Set Facility menu.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel is
displayed. This panel contains the name of each data set or member/module
you marked for deletion. You must confirm this operation before it is
performed.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data set(s) or
member(s)/module(s) are deleted when you press the ENTER key.
Note: CONFIRM DELETE is always in effect when you attempt to delete all of
the members comprising a PDS.
See 27.7.4, “Delete Confirmation Panels” on page 27-33 for additional
information.
■ When deleting a data set, an uncatalog operation is:
– Always performed for an SMS-managed data set.
– Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be deleted is
cataloged and the volumes on which it resides match those specified in the
catalog.
■ When deleting from a Selection List, data sets, members, or modules having
unconventional names (for example, member names containing lowercase and/or
non-displayable characters,) will be deleted.


You can use the DELETE DSN command to delete:
■ A data set or CA-Librarian master file, as in:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD
The next example shows how you can delete a data set regardless of its expiration
or retention date:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD1 PURGE
where, if PURGE is omitted, the data set is deleted only if the expiration date has
passed.
■ A PDS member or CA-Librarian module. For example, to delete the
member/module MYMEMBER from the password-protected data set TEST.OLD2,
enter:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD2(MYMEMBER) PSWD MYPASS
If you omit the password, a message is displayed. You must specify the
appropriate password to delete a data set or a member/module from that data set.
■ All of the members comprising a PDS while retaining the data set itself, as in:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD3(Q)

When you specify the D function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN
command, the Delete Function panel is displayed.
The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to delete a
password-protected data set named TEST.OLD that has an expiration or retention date.

Data Set: Deleting Through a Function Panel
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
DELETE DATA SET
OPTION ===> D
DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD

VOLUME(S) ===>
UNIT NAME(S) ===>
OVERRIDE RETPD ===> YES PASSWORD ===> MYPASS
D - DELETE ENTIRE DATA SET S - DELETE SINGLE MEMBER

M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST X - DELETE ALL MEMBERS
U V
D Delete and uncatalog, if appropriate, the designated data set.
S Delete the designated member/module.
X Delete all of the members comprising the designated PDS.
(The data set itself is not deleted.)
M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the field
PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE to
produce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)
DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to
be deleted. The name can be further qualified with:
dsnmem One- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarian
module name.
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set to be
deleted, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus number
(like -1).

DATA SETS
(cont.)
* Deletes all members of the PDS; the data set itself is
retained and a compress operation is performed.
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which
the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified. This field
is required if the data set is not cataloged.
device type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either an
IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric
name (like SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is not
cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.
ARCHIVE LEVEL
Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to be
copied. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the
most current level of the module is copied. The level can be
specified as:
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The current
level is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.
yymmddhhmmss 0
current. An even number of digits (starting from the
right) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed to
have the highest values that are consistent with the
values of those digits that are specified.
OVERRIDE RETPD
Designates whether the data set's retention or expiration date is to be
overridden by entering either:
YES Delete data set, regardless of its retention or expiration
date.
NO Delete data set only if the retention or expiration date is
passed.
Note: If omitted, the default is NO.


If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set
password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password.
MCD CODE Enter the management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD is
only required when the master file contains PROD2 modules.
The following fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to display a
list of CA-Librarian module names.
when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection
List. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified
programmer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all
modules are included.
MODULE TYPE Enter the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian
Selection List by specifying one of the following:
PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0 security
status.
status.
status.
status.
LANGUAGE Enter the CA-Librarian language code designating the
programming language type of the modules that are to be
included in a CA-Librarian Selection List.


If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only operation
you can perform is a delete. Do this by typing a D or DX before the name of each
entry to be deleted.
If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you can

perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.
The following example illustrates how you can delete multiple data sets from a
Selection List.
Data Set: Deleting Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
=================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
D TEST.NEW PO FB 8= 8=
TEST.NEW1 PO U 12288 12288
D TEST.NEW2 PO FB 8== 8=
Note: You cannot delete a password protected data set through a Selection List. To
delete such a data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the DELETE DSN
command.
27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels

You can use the ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu to designate
whether delete confirmation is required at the data set or member/module level. (Note
that a delete confirmation panel is always displayed when you attempt to delete the
members comprising a PDS without deleting the data set itself.)
When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a confirmation panel is displayed whenever

you attempt to delete a data set or member/module via a function panel or Selection
List. (A confirmation panel is not displayed when you use the DELETE DSN
command.)

The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed when you
attempt to delete a data set.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE
DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER
TEST.NEW 12/19/85 STOR=1
TEST.NEXT 1=/3=/84 STOR=2
TEST.LAST 11/12/86 STOR=1
The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed when you
attempt to delete the members comprising a PDS (without deleting the data set itself).
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE OF PDS DIRECTO
DSN: TEST.PDS.SAMPLE
CREATED: 11/=1/88
VOLSER: STOR=2
MEMBERS: 1=
Finally, the following example illustrates the type of panel displayed when you attempt
to delete one or more PDS members or CA-Librarian modules.
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
TEST.CURRENT CREATED: =9/29/1986 VOLSER: STOR=1
MEMBER LAST MODIFIED
BADJCL =4/=5/88 =9:12
WIDGET =7/2=/86 16:=4

To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering any other
value in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to the Delete
Function panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of that Selection List
will contain *DENYDEL.)
If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is displayed, the
operation is either terminated or paused. If the command is:
■ Data set related (like SELECT MENU), the operation is terminated and the action
is performed.
■ Not data set related (like ATTACH LIB), the operation is paused. The panel is
redisplayed when the Data Set Facility is reattached, allowing you to complete the
operation.

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set

You can obtain detailed information about a data set that resides on one or more
volumes by issuing the INFO command, as in:
INFO DSN TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE
or, specifying the I function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, as
in the following example.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===>
or, specifying the I function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the
following example:
Data Set: Inquiring Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE
TEST.Q.SOURCE 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF
DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE
TEST.SAMPLE1.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR=1 338=
I TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR=1 338=
TEST.SAMPLE3.SOURCE ALIAS
================================ B O T T O M ================
U V

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. This example
assumes you are using a terminal that displays more than 24 lines. If you are using
split screens or your terminal displays only 24 lines, or if the data set has more extents
than fit within the screen, you may scroll to see the rest of the information.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET INFORMATION
DATA SET ===> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE
ENTRY TYPE ===> NONVSAM
MGMTCLAS ===> SMS
STORCLAS ===> SMS
VOLUMES ===> SMS==1
DEVTYPE ===> 338=
SEQ NO ===>
DATACLAS ===>
DSNTYPE ===> LIB
ALLOCATED TRACKS ===> 156 DSORG ===> PO

USED TRACKS ===> 15= RECFM ===> FB
ALLOCATED EXTENTS ===> 5 LRECL ===> 8=
USED EXTENTS ===> 5 BLKSIZE ===> 8==
ALLOCATED DIR BLKS ===> 25 KEYLEN ===> =
USED DIR BLKS ===> 22 KEY OFF ===>
NUMBER OF MEMBERS ===> 127 SECURITY ===> NONE
UNITS ===> TRK CREATED ===> 11/=4/85
1ST EXTENT ===> 1=8 ACCESSED ===> =3/2=/86
SECONDARY EXTENTS ===> 12 EXPIRATION ===>
EXTENT NO. 1ST TRACK (CCHH) LAST TRACK (CCHH) TRACKS

---------- ---------------- ----------------- ------
1 7425 (=1EF====) 7532 (=1F6===2) 1=8
2 12755 (=352===5) 12766 (=353===1) 12
3 12767 (=353===2) 12778 (=353===D) 12
4 12779 (=353===E) 1279= (=354===A) 12
5 12791 (=354===B) 128=2 (=355===7) 12
================================= B O T T O M ==============
U V
The information is divided into two parts. The first describes the data set itself; the
second provides specific information about each extent.
The data set information includes:

DATA SET Name of the data set about which information is desired.
ENTRY TYPE Catalog entry type. (For cataloged data sets only.)
MGMTCLAS SMS management class.
STORCLAS SMS storage class.

VOLUMES Serial number of the volume(s) on which the data set

resides. A maximum of six volumes can be shown.
DEVTYPE Name of the unit on which the data set resides. A
maximum of six units can be shown.
SEQ NO Sequence number of the data set on tape volume.
DATACLAS SMS data class.
DSNTYPE SMS data set type. This field will be LIB when the data set
is a PDSE, and will be blank when another data set type
(non-PDSE) has been defined.
ALLOCATED TRACKS
Total number of tracks allocated on the first (or only)
volume.
USED TRACKS Number of tracks used on the first (or only) volume.
ALLOCATED EXTENTS
Total number of extents allocated on the first (or only)
volume.
USED EXTENTS Number of extents used on the first (or only) volume.
ALLOCATED DIR BLOCKS
Number of directory blocks allocated.
USED DIR BLOCKS Number of directory blocks used.
NUMBER OF MEMBERS
Number of members in the PDS or modules in a
CA-Librarian master file.
DSORG Data set organization.
RECFM Record format or record organization (if a VSAM data set).
LRECL Logical record length or average record length (if a VSAM
data set).
BLKSIZE Block size or maximum record length (if a VSAM data set).
KEYLEN Key length.

KEYOFF Key offset.

SECURITY Security status of the data set, shown as:
nnnn Name of the site security package (like RACF,
ACF2, TOP SECRET).
PWWR Password required for WRITE access.
PWRD Password required for READ access.
UNITS Allocation unit type, shown as: ABS, BLK, BYT, CYL,
KB, MB or TRK.
1ST EXTENT Number of allocation units in the first extent.
SECONDARY EXTENT
Number of allocation units for each subsequent extent.
CREATED Creation date.
ACCESSED Date last referenced (for example, data set opened).
EXPIRATION Expiration date.
The information about the extents includes:

EXTENT NO. Extent number or SUL.
SUL appears if the data set has standard user labels. When
present, the fields ALLOCATED TRACKS, USED
TRACKS, ALLOCATED EXTENTS and USED EXTENTS
will not include the space allocated to the user label extent.
1ST TRACK (CCHH) Starting CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) and
the relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
LAST TRACK CCHH) Ending CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) and
the relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
TRACKS Number of tracks allocated.

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume

You can use the INFO command to obtain detailed information about a volume, as in:
INFO VOL STOR=1
or, specifying the I function code and volume serial number on the Data Set Facility
menu, as in the following example.
Data Set: Inquiring About Volumes Through a Menu
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR=1
Or specifying the I function code on a Volume Selection List, as in the following

example.
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES
STOR+ 338= PRIVATE 2
VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK
I STOR=1 4=1 338= 1 1 15
STOR=2 4== 338= 2 13 31
================================ B O T T O M ================
U V
The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. If you have split
the screen so that all of the information is not displayed, you can scroll the display.

Data Set: Volume Information Display
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
VOLUME INFORMATION
VOLUME ==> STOR=1 ADDRESS ==> 4== DEVTYPE ==> 338=
DEVICE STATUS => A VTOC INDEX => ACTIV

VOLUME STATUS => PRIV SMS CONTROL => NO
TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME => 2655= MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE => 3276=
TOTAL TRAKS USED => 26239 TRACK SIZE => 47968
PERCENT OF VOLUME USED => 96 TRACKS PER CYLINDER => 15
CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS => 8 DATA SETS => 647

TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS => 49 VTOC TRACKS => 15
CONTIG. FREE TRACKS => 127 TOTAL DSCBS => 795
TOTAL FREE TRACKS => 1311 FREE DSCBS => 117
FREE EXTENTS => 172 PERCENT OF VTOC USED=> 85
U V
The volume information includes:
VOLUME Serial number of the device.
ADDRESS Channel and unit address of the device.
DEVTYPE Physical device type.
DEVICE STATUS Status of the device at the time the information is
requested, shown in the form:
──┬───┬──┬──────┬──┬────┬────────────────────
└─x─┘ └─-yyy─┘ └─-z─┘
where one or all of the following information may be

displayed.
x is shown as:
A = Allocated.
C = Console.
F = Offline.
O = Online.
S = System Residence Volume.

yyy is shown as:

BOX = Hardware error.
BSY = Busy.
MTP = Mount pending.
NRD = Not ready
PND = Offline pending.
PUL = Unload pending.
RAL = Restricted to allocation.
SPD = Suspended due to ASM use.
SYS = Allocated to system.
z is shown as:
M = Multi-system assignment.
P = Reserve pending.
R = Reserved/shared/exclusive control.
VOLUME STATUS Status of the volume at the time the information is
requested, shown in the form:
ttt/uuuuu
where ttt is shown as:
PRIV = Volume mounted PRIVATE.
PUB = Volume mounted PUBLIC.
STRG = Volume mounted STORAGE.
uuuuu is shown as:
RSDT = Volume is resident.
RSERV = Volume is reserved.
REMOV = Volume is removable.
TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME
Maximum number of data tracks on the device.
TOTAL TRACKS USED
Number of tracks in use on the device.
PERCENT OF VOLUME USED
Amount of space used on the device rounded to the nearest
integer.
CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS
Number of free cylinders in the largest contiguous extent.
TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS
Total number of free cylinders on the device.

CONTIG. FREE TRACKS

Number of free tracks in the largest contiguous extent.
TOTAL FREE TRACKS
Total number of free tracks on the device.
FREE EXTENTS Number of extents not in use.
VTOC INDEX Code indicating whether the device has an indexed VTOC
and the current status if one exists. The code is shown as:
NONE = Device has no indexed VTOC.
ACTIVE = Device has an indexed VTOC that is in
use.
DISABLED = Device has an indexed VTOC that is
inactive.
CREATED = Device has an indexed VTOC that is
never used.
SMS CONTROL SMS status of the device shown as:
NO = Not SMS managed.
INIT = SMS managed in initial status.
YES = Volume is managed by SMS.
MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE
Largest valid block size for this device.
TRACK SIZE Number of bytes per device track.
TRACKS PER CYLINDER
Number of tracks per device cylinder.
DATA SETS Number of data sets defined on the device.
VTOC TRACKS Size of the device VTOC in tracks.
TOTAL DSCBS Maximum number of Data Set Control Blocks in the
VTOC.
FREE DSCBS Number of Data Set Control Blocks not used in the
VTOC.
PERCENT OF VTOC USED
Amount of space used in the VTOC rounded to the nearest
integer.

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Data Set Facility
menu) or a Selection List to print all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printer
or system printer.
When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains the
printing location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe.
Once scheduled, all references to a specific print request must be by its tag or number.

You can use the PRINT DSN command to print all or part of the currently attached
data set object. For example, to print the entire contents of the currently attached and
displayed data, all you need enter is:
PRINT DSN
All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing attached data.
For example, to print only lines 5 through 25 of the currently attached data, you would
enter:
PRINT DSN 5 25
Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the PRINT
command, and how requests can be monitored and controlled.

27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List
When a Selection List is displayed, you can:

■ Print a specific range of lines by treating the Selection List as though it is
numbered from 1 by 1, as in:
PRINT DSN 1= 5=
■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are included in
the operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR operand, as in:
PRINT DSN NOHDR
■ Include all available information. By default, only the information available
through the current display format is printed. To include all available information,
use the FULL operand, as in:
PRINT DSN 1= 5= FULL


The Print Function panel is displayed when you specify the P function code on the
Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command.
The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to print a copy of
TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE.
Data Set: Printing a Data Set Object
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6...
PRINT DATA SET
OPTION ===> P
DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===> MUROS1
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===>
1ST LINE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY ===>
TAG NAME ===> SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN ===> NO
DEST ===> PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS ===> =
PAGE WIDTH ===> PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS ===> YES
TYPE/FORMAT ===> DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN ===>
1ST COL ===> 1 LAST COL ===> 32767
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST P-PRINT DATESET/INDEX S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

U V
P Print a sequential data set, PDS/CA-Librarian Selection
List.
S Print a single member/module.
M Display a Selection List of members/modules.
DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data
set to be printed. The name can be further qualified with:
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set to
be printed, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus
number (as in -1).

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on

which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified.
This field is required if the data set is not cataloged.
device type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either an
IBM-defined generic name (as in 3350) or a site-defined esoteric
name (as in SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is not
cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.
ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to
be printed. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If
omitted, the most current level of the module is printed. The
level can be specified as:
current.
yymmddhhmmss
password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian
password.


when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection
List. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified
programmer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all
appropriate modules (as qualified by the other fields) are
included.
modules.
MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules to be
included in a CA-Librarian Selection List:
status.
status.
status.
status.
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields)
are included.
LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programming language
type of the modules that are to be included in a CA-Librarian
Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified
by other fields) are included.
You can use the following fields to customize the print operation.
1ST LINE Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is to
begin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be included in the print
operation. If omitted, the end of the data set object is assumed.
While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat them as
though they are numbered from 1 by 1.

NOTIFY Designate whether you want an RPS notification message

displayed when this data are printed by specifying either:
YES Display notification message.
NO Do not display message.
If omitted, the site defined value is used. Site management has
the option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY.
TAG NAME Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The name
cannot exceed eight characters, must start with an alphabetic
character and be bound by apostrophes (').
SEPARATOR Designate whether separators are required by specifying either:
YES Separators are required.
NO Separators are not required.
The default is site-defined.
FORCEALIGN Designate whether physical page alignment is required by
specifying either:
YES Physical page alignment is to be forced (for
example, there is to be a page eject for each
separator and body page).
NO Physical page alignment is not required.
If omitted, the site-defined value is used.
DEST Enter the name of the printing location where the request is to
print. Use this operand to override the current printing location
for this execution.
COPIES Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed. The
maximum number is a site-defined value between 1 and 255.
The default is 1 copy.
CLASS Enter the print class to be used at the location where the request
is to be printed. (Site management will tell you which classes are
valid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for system
printers.)
PAGE WIDTH Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a numeric
value between 0 and 255. The default is site-defined.

PAGE LEN Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as a
numeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the hardware
capability to set page length, the number must be the same
length as specified to the printer. The default is site-defined.
SEQ NUMBRS Designate whether sequence number are to be printed by
specifying either:
YES Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.
NO Designates that sequence numbers are not to be
printed.
If omitted, the default is YES.
TYPE/FORMAT Designate the format of the output by specifying either:
DEF (Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.
ANS ANSI print control characters are recognized.
MCC Machine printer control characters are recognized.
DUMP Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data and
CHEX Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal data
to the right of the line.
VHEX Format each line in character data with hexadecimal
data shown vertically below.
TOP MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank
lines to be skipped from the top of the page before printing
begins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.
BOT MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank
lines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v can be 0
through 99. The default is site-defined.

1ST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to start.
The value must be between 1 and the maximum length of the
line. If omitted, the default is 1.
LAST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to stop.
The value must be greater than the starting column and not
exceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the maximum line
length is assumed. (The maximum line length of data set objects
is 32,767.)

If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can only
perform a print operation.
If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS, Volume or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you

can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.
To print one or more entries, type a P before the name of each entry. By default, the
request will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal you are using. To
print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and enter the appropriate
destination name.
The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from a Selection
List.
Printing Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
P TEST.NEW PO FB 8=
TEST.NEW1 PO U 12288 1
P TEST.NEW2 PR99 PO FB 8==
In the preceding example, the data set TEST.NEW will print at the terminal's default
printing location. The data set TEST.NEW2 will print at the location identified (in the
STATUS field) as PR99.

27.11 Releasing Allocated Space
27.11 Releasing Allocated Space

You can release DASD space allocated to one of your data sets using the RELEASE
primary command, as in:
RELEASE DSN ABC.TEST.ASM
or, by entering the RL function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu,
as in the following example.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET SELECTION MENU
FUNCTION ===> RL
DATA SET ===> ABC.TEST.ASM

VOLUMES ===>
or, by entering the RL function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the
following example.
Data Set: Release Space Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
RL ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=
ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8== 8=

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Selection List to
rename a:
■ Data set (sequential or PDS) or CA-Librarian master file.
■ PDS member or CA-Librarian module.
You can also rename the following types of VSAM objects: AIX, CLUSTER, DATA,
INDEX, PAGESPACE and PATH.
Notes:
■ The volumes on which the data set resides must be mounted and online.
■ A recatalog operation is:
– Always performed for an SMS-managed data set.
– Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be renamed is
cataloged and the volumes on which the rename is performed match those
specified in the catalog.

Use the RENAME command to change the name of a:
■ Data set or CA-Librarian master file, as in:
RENAME DSN TEST.OLD NEWNAME TEST.NEW
■ PDS member or CA-Librarian module, as in:
RENAME DSN TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD) NEWNAME MEMNEW
If the designated data set is password-protected, you must include the password with
the command, as in
RENAME DSN TEST.OLDNAME NEWNAME TEST.NEWNAME PSWD MYPSS
If the password is omitted, a message will be displayed.


If you specify an R function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN
command, the Rename Function panel is displayed.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to rename a member
of a password-protected data set.
Data Set: Renaming Through the Menu
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
RENAME DATA SET
OPTION ===> S
DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD)

VOLUME(S) ===>
UNIT NAME(S) ===>
PASSWORD ===> MYPASS
NEW DATA SET ===> MEMNEW
M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S - RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

R - RENAME ENTIRE DATA SET
U V
OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired action.
The codes are:
R Rename a data set.
S Rename a single member/module.
M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the
field PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE
to produce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data
set to be renamed. The name may be qualified with:

DATA SET
(cont.)
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set to
be renamed, specified as 0 (most current) or a minus
number (like -1).
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on
which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified.
VOLUMES is required if the data set is not cataloged.
device type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can be
either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined
esoteric name (like SYSDA) This field is required if the data set
is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage volume.
ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to
be renamed. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If
omitted, the most current level of the module is renamed. The
level can be specified as:
current.
yymmddhhmmss
PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If one
password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian
password.

MCD CODE Enter the management code of the CA-Librarian master file.
modules.
The next three fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to display a
list of member/module names.
PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used when
selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection List.
Only those modules marked as owned by the specified programmer
are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all modules are
included.
MODULE TYPE
Enter the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian
Selection List by specifying one of the following:
status.
status.
status.
TEST Includes only those modules with TEST security status.
LANGUAGE Enter the CA-Librarian language code designating the programming
CA-Librarian Selection List.
NEW DATA SET
Enter the new data set or member/module name specified as either:
dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified new name for the
data set.
dsnmem One- to eight-characer new member/module name.
+v Relative generation number to be assigned to GDG
(Generation Data Group) data set, specified as a value
between 1 and 255.


If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function panel, the only
operation you can perform is a rename.
If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you can

perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.
27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules
As illustrated in the following example to rename one or more members/modules use

the R function code and type the member name in the STATUS field. (When the
Selection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field will contain *RENAMED, confirming
that the operation performed successfully.)
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
TEST.OLD1 STOR=1 3 PO U 12288 12288
MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES --------------
R JUNK1 NEW1 RENT REUS

JUNK2 RENT REUS REFR AM=31
R JUNK3 NEW2 RENT REUS REFR AC=1
27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets
To rename one or more data sets, use the R function code. Since the STATUS field is
not large enough to hold a 44-character data set name, all of the data sets that you
marked will be presented to you through a subordinate panel (such as the one
illustrated in the following example). To rename a data set, overtype the second
occurrence of the old name with the new name.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
ENTER NEW DATASET NAME ON LINE FOLLOWING OLD DATA SET NAME
DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER
TEST.OLD 12/11/84 STOR=2
TEST.NEW
TEST.OLD1 1=/3=/86 STOR=1
TEST.NEW1
TEST.OLD2 11/15/85 STOR=1
TEST.NEW2
You cannot rename a password-protected data set from a Selection List. To rename a
data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the RENAME DSN command.

27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set
27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set

You can uncatalog non-VSAM data sets or one of the following types of VSAM
objects: ALIAS and GDGBASE. To do this, you can issue the UNCATLG primary
command, as in:
UNCATLG DSN TEST.NEW
or, specify the UC function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, as
shown in the following example.
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> UC
DATA SET ===> TEST.NEW

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
You can also specify the UC code on a VTOC Selection List, as in the following
example.
Data Set: Uncataloging Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8=
UC ABC.TEST.NEW PO FB 8== 8=

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

You can update the contents of a data set using:
■ the EXPORT command, or
■ the EDSN command and related commands.
Using EXPORT: Use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing data set.
If the data are in:
■ The active AWS, you need only specify the name of the data set that is to receive
the data, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT
where the contents of the active AWS will replace the data in the sequential data
set named TEST.STAT.
The following example displays the type of confirmation message you would
receive after issuing this command, assuming that SET MSGLEVEL INFO is in
effect.
7 8
>
>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
EXP6= 25= RECORDS WRITTEN TO DATA SET
TEST.STAT
ON VOLUME STOR=3
EXP69 SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION OF EXPORT
■ A Library Member, use the INPUT= operand to name the desired member, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA
where the contents of TEST.STAT are replaced by the contents of the member
INDATA.

■ The active AWS and one or more library members, use the INPUT= operand and
the *, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA/Q/ABC.MORE
The asterisk (*) indicates where contents from the active AWS are to be placed in
the input. A maximum of ten different input sources can be specified and can be
any combination of the AWS contents and library members. Note that if any of
the members belong to another user, that individual's prefix must be specified.
Other operands of the EXPORT command allow you to:

■ Write to a PDS member by specifying the member name in parentheses after the
data set names, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) INPUT=MYPROG5
You can use the SET STATS command to control the SPF directory information
that is placed in the directory entry whenever a member is added or updated.
■ Write to an uncataloged data set by including the serial number with the VOL=
operand, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) VOL=SHAR=1
■ Add to the end of an existing data set by specifying MOD with the DISP operand,
as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.PROJ,DISP=MOD
where the contents of the active AWS is added to the end of the original contents
of the data set.
You can also use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing CA-Librarian
master file or to an existing CA-Panvalet member. For more information about
EXPORTing, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

Using EDSN: Use the EDSN command to edit a data set by establishing a data set
editing session.
■ If you do not specify any operands, as in:
EDSN
the Edit Data Set Facility, as shown in the following example, will be displayed.
Edit Data Set Facility Display
7 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.. 8
EDIT DATASET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===>
DATA SET ===>

VOLUME ===> PASSWORD ===>
UNIT ===> ARCHIVE LEVEL ===>
E - EDIT DATASET X - TERMINATE EDIT DATASET
You can only perform two functions from this panel: Edit or Terminate. To edit a
data set, specify E in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate data set name in
the DATA SET field. If a volume, unit, password, or archive level are required,
you will be prompted accordingly. Edit (E) will begin the data set editing session,
and the specified data set will be attached in a modifiable AWS.
■ If you specify a data set name with the command, as in:
EDSN TEST.STAT
the data set will be displayed in your AWS.
Once the data set is displayed, you can edit it using CA-Roscoe editing conventions.
(See Chapter 14, “AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS” for information about
editing and manipulating data within an AWS.)
If there is data in the AWS before the EDSN command is invoked, it is temporarily
replaced by the data set. That is, the AWS that the data set is placed in becomes
active, and your other AWS(s) is (are) placed in the background. (Use the STATUS
AWS command to display information about all AWSs in use. See Chapter 17,
“AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.)
Executing a command that causes output to the Execution Area (for example,
ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set Editing Facility in a
'pending' state. The data set can be edited again at any time by issuing:
EDSN Q
When you have completed editing the data set, save the data by entering:
SDSN

The data set will be saved (or updated if it already exists) and the editing session will
be discontinued. If you do not want to save the data set, enter:
CDSN
The Data Set Edit Facility remains active until explicitly deactivated using the SDSN
or CDSN commands, selecting X from the Edit Data Set Facility panel, or until the
CA-Roscoe session is ended. For complete information about the EDSN, CDSN, and
SDSN commands, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-6
28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
28.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-12
28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-13
28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
29.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
30.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17
30.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-17
30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-23
30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-26
30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities
CA-Roscoe provides facilities that allow you to:

■ Syntax check your jobs before submitting them.
■ Submit the contents of the active AWS and/or one or more library members for
execution.
■ Use a menu and selection lists to manipulate jobs and job output.
■ Display information about jobs in execution, job queues and initiators.
■ View jobs at the terminal. Once attached, you can browse the output and perform
such tasks as copying or printing individual files.

■ Syntax check the data you are about to submit for execution.
■ Control the submission of that data.
■ Use the Job Facility to monitor and process jobs.
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax
28.1 Check Syntax

CA-Roscoe provides commands that allow you to syntax check JCL and COBOL
source programs.
28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking

The job control language syntax checker is invoked by the JCK command. It can be
used to check JCL statements in the active AWS or a library member.
To check JCL that is in the active AWS, enter:

JCK
JCL in a library member can be syntax-checked by including the RUN command.

With RUN, you can define input from a source other than that normally used with a
command. For example, to syntax check JCL statements in the library member
ARJOB, enter:
RUN JCK ARJOB
The following example assumes the JCL to be checked is in the active AWS. The
resulting display shows the error messages provided after the JCK command is
executed.
Jobs: Syntax Checking a Jobstream
7 JCK
8
>
> AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ================================ T O P ============
=====1 //STARTJCL JOB ==2=5,ROBERTS,CLASS=X
=====2 // MSGCLASS=A
=====3 //COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL==
=====4 //SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS),
=====5 // UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5))
=====6 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
=====7 //SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4)
=====8 //SYSUT2 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))
=====9 //SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))
====1= //SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))
====11 //SYSIN DD Q
============================= B O T T O M ========
U V

28.1 Check Syntax
7 >
8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
// MSGCLASS=A
CAY6==6S VERB 'MSGCL' IS UNKNOWN
//SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS),
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5))
CAY6=87W BLKSIZE NO SPECIFIED FOR NEW OR DUMMY DATA SET -
POTENTIAL S=13 IN EXECUTION
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4)
CAY6=48E '4' IS ILLEGAL OPERAND FOR 'RLSE' PARAMETER OF
'SPACE'
CAY6=== 3 STATEMENTS FLAGGED IN JOB 'STARTJCL'. MAXIMUM

SEVERITY IS 12
U V
28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking

The COBOL syntax checker is invoked by the COB command. It can check COBOL
source code in the active AWS or in a specified library member.
To check source code that is in the active AWS, enter:

COB
To check source code in a CA-Roscoe library member, enter the command RUN COB,
followed by the library member name. For example, to check the contents of the
library member INVLIST, enter:
RUN COB INVLIST
Extensions to the COB command allow you to check:

1. The source code against various COBOL language standards. See the CA-Roscoe
Command Reference Guide for a list of the language standards available.
2. A particular division of the program. The codes to check a single division are also
described in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

28.2 Submitting Data

You can submit the contents of the active AWS or one or more library members to the
operating system at any time during the terminal session.
■ To submit the contents of the active AWS:
Enter the command SUBMIT with no operands, as in:
SUBMIT
■ To submit one or more CA-Roscoe library members:
Enter the command SUBMIT followed by the name(s) of the member(s) to be
submitted. You can submit a maximum of 21 members in a single execution of
the command. For example, to submit the library members COBJCL, INVLIST
and DATA1, you would enter:
SUBMIT COBJCL INVLIST DATA1
Based on the names of these members, they probably constitute a continuous
jobstream. It is valid to submit multiple members where each member represents a
separate job.
■ To submit a mixed jobstream consisting of one or more library members and the
contents of the active AWS:
Use the keyword AWS to indicate where the contents of the active AWS is to be
inserted in the jobstream. For example, assume the member COBJCL contains the
JCL statements needed to execute a COBOL program, the active AWS contains
the COBOL program, and the member DATA1 contains the test data to be used
by that program. The job submission would look like:
SUBMIT COBJCL AWS DATA1
28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages

When you submit a job, a message is displayed on the Response Line. It contains the
job name (taken from the JOB statement), job number (assigned by the system) and
time the job was submitted. If you do not want to receive this informational message,
you can suppress it by modifying the STATUS SESSION display or issuing the
command:
SET MSGLEVEL ERROR
By site option, you can receive JES2 or JES3 messages at your terminal when your
job completes execution. If your site permits this notification, your site management
will tell you what change needs to be made to the JOB statement in your JCL.

28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers

If the data you are submitting has the sequence number attribute NOSEQ, no sequence
numbers will be included in the data.
If the data has the attribute SEQ, you can use the SET SUBMIT command to control
whether sequence numbers are included, where:
■ SET SUBMIT NOSEQ excludes sequence numbers.
■ SET SUBMIT SEQ places sequence numbers in the location defined by the data's
sequence number attribute.
If you submit data without specifying the SET SUBMIT command and the data are in:
■ The active AWS; the AWS sequence attribute controls whether sequence numbers
are to be included.
Use the SEQ or NOSEQ command to change the sequence attribute of the active
AWS. NOSEQ suppresses the insertion of sequence numbers, while SEQ specifies
that sequence numbers are to be included and designates the location of those
sequence numbers.
■ A library member; the member's sequence attribute controls whether sequence
numbers are to be included.
The following table summarizes how you can control sequence numbers in submitted
jobs.

Data Source Attribute Command Override Action

AWS NOSEQ no command Numbers excluded.
SET SUBMIT NOSEQ No affect
SET SUBMIT SEQ No affect
NOSEQ No affect
SEQ Numbers included at
location designated by
command.
SEQ no command Numbers included at
atrribute.
SET SUBMIT NOSEQ Numbers excluded.
SET SUBMIT SEQ Numbers included at
atrribute.
NOSEQ Numbers excluded.
SEQ Numbers included at
command.
Library NOSEQ no command Numbers excluded.
Member(s) SET SUBMIT NOSEQ No affect.
SET SUBMIT SEQ No affect.
SEQ no command Numbers included at
attribute.
SET SUBMIT NOSEQ Numbers excluded.
SET SUBMIT SEQ Numbers included at
attribute.
28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements

You can include one or more +INC statements in the data you submit for execution.
This special CA-Roscoe statement identifies where to include the contents of the active
AWS or a library member within the jobstream.
■ Defining +INC Statements:
+INC statements must begin in the first position of the line and be the only data
on that line. The format of this statement is:

──+INC──┬─AWS───────────┬─────────────────────────────────
└──┬──────┬─mem─┘
└─pfx.─┘
where:
AWS Includes the contents of the active AWS.
mem Name of the library member whose contents is to be included. If the
member belongs to another user, that individual's prefix must be
included.
The data being submitted (like the active AWS and/or library members) can
contain any number of +INC statements. It can even contain only +INC
statements, as in:
+INC LEADJCL
+INC MYPROG
+INC ENDJCL
The included data can contain +INC statements. You are allowed 64 levels of
+INC nesting.
■ Enabling Expansion:
The SET SUBMIT command controls whether or not +INC statements are to be
expanded when the job is submitted.
To have +INC statements expanded (for example, to include the library member or
active AWS contents), specify the INCLUDE operand with SET SUBMIT before
issuing the SUBMIT command, as in:
SET SUBMIT INCLUDE
SUBMIT
Once you have enabled expansion, it remains in effect until you disable it or
terminate your session.
You can disable +INC expansion by specifying:
SET SUBMIT NOINCLUDE
28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements

You can include one or more CA-Librarian -INC statements in the data you submit for
execution.
The SET MASTER command controls whether these statements are to be expanded
when the job is submitted. For example, you might enter:
SET MASTER ROSCOE.LIBR : Activate and name master file
SUBMIT TEST1 : -INCs in member TEST1 expanded
SET MASTER OFF : Deactivate -INC expansion
SUBMIT TEST2 : -INCs in TEST2 not expanded
SET MASTER ON : Reactivate with same master file

Once you identify the CA-Librarian master file to be used, it remains in effect until
you:
■ specify another master file,
■ disable expansion, or
■ terminate your session.

28.3 Using the Job Facility

The CA-Roscoe AJOB command invokes a panel-driven RPF system, similar to the
DSN and LIB facilities. It is referred to as the Job Facility. The Job Facility can be
used to:
■ attach jobs,
■ display a job's execution status,
■ display job-related information,
■ alter file attributes,
■ copy jobs,
■ print jobs, and
■ cancel jobs.
It can also be used to execute operator commands and check the system console.
You can display the Job Facility by issuing the command:

AJOB
If you enter this command with no operands, the Job Facility primary menu is
displayed.
You can include a job name and job number with the AJOB command to qualify the
job display.
If a specified job can be found, it is attached and AJOB terminates. If the specified
job cannot be found, or if the job name uses a wildcard specification, then a Job
Selection list is presented based on the JOB/GRP NAME value.
When you are viewing job output, you can redisplay the primary menu at any time by
entering:
SELECT MENU
on the command line.
PA keys will take you back one level.
To end AJOB processing, select the function X (TERMINATE) from the main menu.
The CLEAR key will discontinue AJOB processing from any Job Facility panel or
display from which it is pressed (with the exception of a CONSOLE display caused by
a command from the OPERATOR COMMAND panel). It will leave the most recent
job attached that had been selected for viewing.
When CLEAR is pressed during a CONSOLE display, it will cause the CONSOLE
display to be cleared and will redisplay the OPERATOR COMMAND panel.

Jobs: Job Facility Menu
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===>
JOB/GRP NAME ===>

JOB NUMBER ===> DEST/CLASS ===>
FILE NUMBER ===> ACTIVE JOB TYPE ===> (ALL,JES,STC,TSO)
PAGE NUMBER ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO (Y,N)
LINE NUMBER ===> CONFIRM CANCEL ===> YES (Y,N)
A - ATTACH JOB C - COPY JOB I - INFO JOB OP - OPER CONTROL

AI - ATTACH INITIATORS CN - CANCEL JOB L - SYSTEM LOG P - PRINT JOB
AT - ALTER JOB X - TERMINATE
U V
FUNCTION The job function to be performed. Specify one of the codes
listed on the bottom of the menu. (See 28.3.2, “Using Job
Facility Functions” on page 28-12 for a complete description
of each function.)
JOB/GRP NAME The specific name or prefix (wildcard) of job(s) to be included
in the selected function.
JOB NUMBER Number of the job. Must be numeric or left blank.
FILE NUMBER Number of the file to qualify the selected display. Must be
numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.
PAGE NUMBER Number of the page to qualify the selected display. Must be
numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.
LINE NUMBER Line number of job data to qualify the selected display. Must
be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is
used.
DEST/CLASS The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, or
class of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.

ACTIVE JOB TYPE The qualification to show active TSO jobs (TSO), active tasks
submitted through JES (JES), active started tasks (STC), or all
active jobs (ALL) displayed for the ATTACH JOB function.
A value here causes the JOB/GRP NAME value to be ignored.
CONTROL CHARS Specifies whether control characters are included when a job is
attached, copied, or printed. A default of NO is used when the
AJOB facility is initially invoked.
CONFIRM CANCEL Specifies whether a confirmation panel is displayed for any
jobs selected for cancel. A default of YES is used when the
AJOB facility is initially invoked.
28.3.1 Wildcard Characters

The following table contains the wildcard characters that may be used to create the
criteria for an entry's inclusion in a Job Selection list. The job name used to create a
selection list may use the asterisk (*), plus sign (+), or wildcard characters, but not
both in the same wildcard.
Code Meaning and Examples

ROS*JCL* ROSAJCL
ROSJCL
ROSJCLEND
ROSXJCLX
DROS+ DROS
DROSCOE
DROSTSO

28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions

You can use the Job Facility to perform a variety of job functions. (Each function is
listed on the bottom of the AJOB menu. See “Jobs: Job Facility Menu” on
page 28-10) Some functions are performed explicitly. Many functions display a
corresponding panel on which you must enter information specific to that function.
The following table lists each function code and its corresponding description and
action.

A Attach a job. Performed, if job found. If
job not found, displays
selection list.
AI Request active initiator Panel displayed.
information.
AT Alter a job. Panel displayed.
C Copy a job. Panel displayed.
CN Cancel a job. Confirmation panel displayed
if CONFIRM CANCEL is
YES; or cancel the job with
no confirmation if CONFIRM
CANCEL is NO.
I Inquire about job information. Panel displayed
L Attach the System log. Panel displayed
OP Send OPERATOR commands. Panel displayed
P Print a job. Panel displayed
X Terminate AJOB processing. Performed

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists

When a job name (with or without wildcards) is specified with the AJOB command
and no job number accompanies it, a Job Selection list will be displayed. The
following example shows the selection list for all jobs beginning with the letters
SAMP:
Jobs: Job Facility Selection List
7 FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F - FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) 14.36.=8

8
JOB NAME ===> SAMPQ FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>
LINE ===1 OF ==13 HELD/
JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINES CPU TIME
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
__ 284 SAMPCSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 283 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 411= SAMPSTR1 AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 6843 SAMPLOGP AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 2993 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 7158 SAMPETC EXECUTING 24:42:53 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPETC 298.45
__ 716= SAMPCICS EXECUTING 24:42:48 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPCICS 63.13
__ 4596 SAMPCCCS EXECUTING 8:4=:5= 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC SAMPCCCS 18.79
__ 5477 SAMPDSTT EXECUTING 5:39:45 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL MUF8= 8.45
__ 7667 SAMPCSTT EXECUTING 3:24:35 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL CICS 36.23
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS
AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE
PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK
U V
The fields comprising the job selection list can be used to change or further qualify the
display, and include:
FUNCTION requires M, F, B, or X; M invokes the Primary Menu; X will
discontinue AJOB processing (exits to CA-Roscoe); F will cause a
scroll forward for a large display; B will cause a scroll backward
for a large display; F and B are retained in this slot for subsequent
scrolling by hitting the ENTER key; Any other value redisplays the
screen with new information (beginning with the first job).
The PF key numbers listed at the bottom of the display will
achieve the same result as the functions.
JOB NAME The name or prefix of jobs shown in the display. It can include a
wildcard character. Users can change this value to show jobs with
a different job name or job prefix. (This slot shows no value and
is unmodifiable if the ATTACH INITIATORS selections was made
from the Primary Menu.)
FILE Number of the file within the job to qualify the function request.
Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is
used.

PAGE Number of the page within the job to qualify the function request.
Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is
used.
LINE Line number within the job to qualify the function request. Must
be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.
You can manipulate the jobs in the selection list by using the line commands displayed
at the bottom. Specify the following codes in the field to the left of a job to invoke
the corresponding service (multiple selections may be made):
A ATTACH this job using the FILE, PAGE, or LINE values appearing in their
respective locations.
AT Present the ALTER JOB panel for the corresponding job.
C Present the COPY JOB panel for the corresponding job.
CN Present the CANCEL JOB confirmation panel for the corresponding job if
CONFIRM CANCEL is YES on the Primary Menu; or cancel the job with no
confirmation if CONFIRM CANCEL is NO on the Primary Menu.
L ATTACH JOB LAST FILE for this job using PAGE, and/or LINE values
appearing in their respective locations. The value appearing in the FILE ===>
slot is ignored, and is reset to LAST for subsequent displays of this panel.
P Present the PRINT JOB panel for the corresponding job.
S ATTACH the corresponding job using the STATUS JOB display.
NN ATTACH JOB FILE NN for the corresponding job using PAGE or LINE
values appearing in their respective locations; The value appearing in the FILE
field is ignored, and is reset to this value for subsequent displays of this panel.
Notes:
When you issue selections A, L, S, and NN, the AJOB facility is placed in a
suspended display state (you will see PGM(xx.AJOB) appearing on the CA-Roscoe
status line) and the following is true:
■ The job is attached and CA-Roscoe commands can be issued on the command line
to do any job or non-job processing.
■ RPFs are NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state.
■ The SCREEN command is NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state.
■ PF keys set to SPLIT, SWAP, and END will not be recognized, however, issuing
the corresponding :S or :W commands on the command line and pressing PF12
will cause the SPLIT and SWAP functions to take place.

■ Any PA key or any of the following commands cause a suspended AJOB to

continue:
AJOB
SELect MENU
SELect NEXT
SELect PREV
Next Job
PREV Job
FIRST Job
LAST Job
DETach Job (job is detached first)
28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control

The Job Facility contains an option that enables you to issue operator commands and
check the system console from a panel environment. If you have user privileges
which enable you to execute system and operator commands, you can use the Operator
Control function on the Job Facility primary menu.
To invoke the Operator Control display from the Job Facility menu, enter the code OP
in the FUNCTION field. The following example illustrates this.
Jobs: Job Facility Menu
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> OP
JOB/GRP NAME ===>


U V
When you select the OPER CONTROL function, the Operator Control panel will be
displayed. From this panel, you can:
■ Execute CONSOLE commands using the CMD and CMM subcommands.
■ Execute CONSOLE commands you may have in a CA-Roscoe library member.

■ Display the MVS Master Trace Table using the CONSOLE MTT command.
■ Display the UCB address of defined consoles currently active in the system.
■ Display messages written to a designated console.
This panel consists of four fields, as shown in the following example.
Jobs: Operator Control Display
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
OPERATOR CONTROL
OPTION ===> (CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, X - EXIT)
COMMAND ===>
- OR -
LIB MEMBER ===>
UCB ADDRESS ===>
Fill in the fields with the following information:

OPTION requires CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, or X.
X returns to Job Facility Primary Menu; CMD causes a CONSOLE
CMD command to be issued using the command in the
COMMAND slot; CMM causes a CONSOLE CMM command to
be issued using the command in the COMMAND slot; LIB causes
a RUN CONSOLE command to be issued using the library member
named in LIB MEMBER slot; MTT causes a CONSOLE MTT
command to be issued; STA causes a CONSOLE STATUS
command to be issued; UCB causes a CONSOLE UCB command
to be issued using the UCB address specified in UCB ADDRESS
slot; Any other value is diagnosed as an error.
COMMAND An operator command to be issued. Required with option CMD or
CMM.
LIB MEMBER A CA-Roscoe member containing operator command to be issued.
Required with option LIB.
UCB ADDRESS A UCB address of a console to be displayed. Required with option
UCB.
Note: CONSOLE is a Monitor command. For more information about the

CONSOLE command and the CMD and CMM subcommands, see the
CA-Roscoe System Commands Guide.

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related
Information
This chapter describes how to monitor the status of a job using the AJOB command or
the DISPLAY command.
■ AJOB enables you to display a job menu or selection list. From these displays
you can select functions to determine the status of a job and obtain information
regarding it.
■ DISPLAY can be used to directly monitor the status of a job.
AJOB and DISPLAY allow you to determine:

■ the job's execution status (awaiting execution, executing, awaiting print, and so
on),
■ the job's position in the job queue,
■ what initiators are assigned to each job class, and
■ how many jobs are associated with a specific job class or remote destination.
| Note: CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS
| JES2/JES3 1.2.
Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status

You can determine job execution status for:
■ All jobs with the same job name. For example, entering:
DISPLAY COMPILE
might result in the display shown below.
7 8
>
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+...
JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PRTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINE HELD CPUTIME
----- ------- ------------ - ---- ---- ------ --------- ---- -------
2=85 COMPILE AWAIT PRT(H) 1 SYSH R1=
4678 COMPILE EXEC =:==:2= X 6 SYSH R1= LINKMOD =1.44
5232 COMPILE AWAIT EXEC X 6 SYSH R1= QPOS(18) YES
The information displayed above can be displayed using the Job Facility. Enter:
AJOB COMPILE
The following example is displayed.
Jobs: AJOB Execution Status

8
JOB NAME ===> COMPILE FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
__ 2=85 COMPILE AWAITING PRINT(H) 1 SYSH R1=
__ 4678 COMPILE EXECUTING =:==:2= X 6 SYSH R1= LINKMOD =1.44
__ 5232 COMPILE AWAITING EXECUTION X 6 SYSH R1= QPOS(18) YES
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
■ All jobs containing your prefix in the site-designated location of the job name.
Enter:

DISPLAY or AJOB
If your site requires your CA-Roscoe prefix to be part of the job name, the
resulting display shows the status of all jobs that contain your prefix in the
designated location.
■ All jobs beginning with specific characters. For example,
DISPLAY ROS+ or AJOB ROS+
displays status information about all job names beginning with ROS. (The plus
sign (+) indicates that additional characters may follow those specified.
■ All jobs that contain specific characters in a specific location. For example,
entering:
DISPLAY MASK=R*SC*E or AJOB R*SC*E
might display the status of jobs named ROSCOE or RASCAE. (The asterisk (*)
represents any character that is valid in a job name. See 28.3.1, “Wildcard
Characters” on page 28-11 for information on using wildcard characters in job
names.)
■ Any job whose name matches a DISPLAY subcommand, as in:
DISPLAY JOB=QUEUE

29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status
29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status

Use the NAME subcommand to display the names of jobs directed to a specific job
class or destination. For example, to display the names and status of each job in class
0, enter:
DISPLAY NAME =

29.3 Displaying Initiator Status
29.3 Displaying Initiator Status

Use the INIT subcommand, as in:
DISPLAY INIT
to display information about all initiators used by the operating system and the names
and number of executing jobs.
You can also specify: AJOB INIT and receive the same result.

29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status

Use the QUEUE subcommand to display the number of jobs waiting to execute in a
particular job class. For example, to display the number of jobs waiting to execute in
class X, enter:
DISPLAY QUEUE X

29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information

Use the Job Facility Job Information panel to display accurate updates of data related
to a specific job. Specify the AJOB command to invoke the Job Facility. From the
main menu, specify I in the FUNCTION field, and the name of the job to be
referenced, as shown in the following example.
7 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
8
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
JOB/GRP NAME ===> COMPILE


U V
Information about the specified job will be displayed in the format shown in the
following example.
Jobs: Information Display (Job Facility)
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
JOB INFORMATION
OPTION ===> I (I - INFO; R - AUTOREFRESH; X - EXIT)
JOB NAME ===> COMPILE

JOB NUMBER ===> 1234
REFRESH INTERVAL ===> =4 (=1 - 6=)
JOB STATUS : EXECUTING 27:49:5= STEP/LINES : CICS

JOB CLASS : 3 CPU TIME : 1=.56
PRIORITY : 11 HELD :
SYSID : XXX1 ORIGIN : SYSTEMX
The first four fields of the Job Information panel are variable. They will contain the
name and number of the job you entered on the primary menu. If you would like to
display a different job, you must change the following job information:

29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information
OPTION requires I, R, or X; X returns to Primary Menu; I indicates to show

current information for this job; R indicates to begin autorefresh
mode; Any other value redisplays the Job Information screen.
JOB NAME The name of the job for which information is required.
JOB NUMBER The job number corresponding to the job name specified.
REFRESH INTERVAL
The number of seconds to wait during autorefresh mode before
showing updated information. Must be a number from 1 to 60; the
default is 4.
The remaining fields display information specific to the job you have indicated. The
screen will be automatically refreshed according to the value you specify in the
REFRESH INTERVAL field.
To exit this panel, select the option X (EXIT). You will be returned to the Job
Facility main menu.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output

■ Attach a job at your terminal.
■ Browse the job output to:
– Locate and note the specific occurrences of a string.
– Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned
a name.
– Reattach the job after viewing an AWS, data set object or library member.
– Finally, detach the job.
■ Perform such tasks as copying all or part of a file into an AWS, changing file
attributes, controlling the printing of the files comprising the job, and cancelling a
job.
Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output

You can use a primary command, the Job Facility menu, or a job selection list to
attach job output.

Use the ATTACH JOB command to view the files comprising a job at your terminal.
To attach the job named SAMPLE, enter:

ATTACH JOB SAMPLE
If there are multiple jobs with the same name, include the number of the job you want
to examine, as in:
ATTACH JOB SAMPLE 2=85
| Note: CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS
| JES2/JES3 1.2.
If you do not include a job number, the first available job is selected and attached.
You can also attach a job by specifying just its job number, as in:
ATTACH JOB 2=85
When a job is attached, the display begins with the first line of the first file. The files
are presented to you in a format that is similar to a hard-copy listing. For example,
assume that the job SAMPLE compiles, link-edits and executes a COBOL program in
an MVS/JES2 environment. Its output is divided into the following files:
File 1 JES2 job log.
File 2 Listing of JCL statements.
File 3 Allocation and condition code messages.
File 4 Listing produced by the COBOL compiler.
File 5 Listing produced by the linkage editor.
File 6 Output produced by the COBOL program.
You can begin the display at any location within the job by including the number of
the appropriate file, page and/or line with the ATTACH JOB command. For example,
to begin the display of the job SAMPLE with the tenth line on the second page of the
third file, enter:
ATTACH JOB SAMPLE FILE 3 PAGE 2 LINE 1=

30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility
To attach a job from the Job Facility menu, enter the code A in the function field and
the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following example
illustrates this.
Jobs: Attaching Through the Job Facility
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===>A
JOB/GRP NAME ===> SAMPLE


U V

30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List
To attach a job from a job selection list, enter the code A in the command field on the
far left, next to the job to be attached. The following example illustrates this.
Jobs: Attaching Through a Job Selection List

8
JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
A_ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 5=41 SAMPLE EXECUTING 27:38:11 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC $$$$$$@ 1=.53
__ 7158 SAMPLE EXECUTING 24:42:53 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPLE 298.45
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed?
If your site is:

JES2 The output files of your job can be attached at any time. (If an output file's
attributes are to be modified, you must submit the job with a special
site-defined SYSOUT class.) If your job is:
AWAITING EXECUTION: The JCL and all SYSIN data can be viewed.
(This is the only time this information is displayed.)
EXECUTING: The JCL and that much of the job log and SMB that is
currently written to the spool can be viewed, plus all available files. (If a
file is open and empty, only the end of file message is presented when that
file is displayed.)
AWAITING PRINT: All SYSOUT files that have not been printed or
purged can be viewed.
JES3 If an output file exists, you can examine it at any time. You can only modify
attributes of files routed to a SYSOUT class held for an external writer
(when ETSO is not active) or TSO (when ETSO is active). (A special
site-defined SYSOUT class designates that the output is to be held.)

30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class?
Your site management will tell you what special SYSOUT class(es) they have
established.
The following example assumes the site has defined T and H as special SYSOUT
classes. As illustrated, you can specify one of the special SYSOUT classes with the
individual DD statements or with the MSGCLASS= operand on the JOB statement.
(DD statements containing SYSOUT=* use the SYSOUT class specified with
MSGCLASS=.) Notice that two of the SYSPRINT files are directed to class T while
the third is directed to class H.
Jobs: Sample Jobstream Using MSGCLASS Parameter:
7 >
8
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
==================================== T O P =================
//SAMPLE JOB (account-info),CLASS=X,PRTY=6,MSGCLASS=T
//COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL==

...
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=H
//SYSIN DD Q
COBOL program inserted here
//LKED EXEC PGM=LINKEDIT
...
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=Q
//GO EXEC PGM=Q.LKED.SYSLMOD,...
//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=Q
//SYSIN DD Q
test data
U V

30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job?
To determine your job's status, you can:

1. Receive notification at your terminal when your job completes execution. (If you
can use this facility, your site management will tell you what change needs to be
made to your JCL to receive the JES2/JES3 messages.)
2. Use the DISPLAY command. For example, to determine the status of a job named
SAMPLE, you would enter:
DISPLAY SAMPLE
30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job?
Unless restricted by site management, any user can attach any job.
Also, the same job can be attached by multiple users.

■ If you are the first person to attach the job, you have control over the:
– File Disposition: You can use the modifiable STATUS display or the ALTER
command to change the attributes of the files comprising the job.
– Job Disposition: If you issue the DETACH JOB command, the job is released.
Other users will be notified the next time they press the ENTER key or use a
PF key to scroll.
■ If you are not the first person to attach the job, you cannot change the disposition
of the job's files or release the job.
If you attempt to change the disposition of a file, you will receive a message
indicating the user who has control. If the message does not identify a specific
user and you detach and then attach the job, you may get control of the job.

30.2 Browsing Job Output

This section describes how, while browsing a job, you can:
■ Detach the job.
■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string in a file.
■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned a
name.
■ Reattach the job after browsing an AWS, data set object or library member.
30.2.1 Detaching Job Output
You can explicitly detach a job by entering the command:

DETACH JOB
With this form of the command, all files from the hold queue are released and all
user-assigned NOTE names are deleted. Each file is disposed of according to its
PRINT/NOPRINT status. (Files marked PRINT are routed to the appropriate printer;
files marked NOPRINT are deleted.)
Other forms of this command include:

■ DETACH JOB HOLD
Releases the job and deletes all files marked NOPRINT. (Those files marked
PRINT are kept on the hold queue and can be viewed again at a later time. NOTE
names associated with these files are retained.)
■ DETACH JOB NOACT
Releases a job without deleting any files. (In addition to retaining the files on the
hold queue for later viewing, all associated NOTE names are retained.)
If you are the first person to attach the job and you release it, the job is released.
Other users will be notified the next time they press the ENTER key or use a PF key
to scroll.
an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the attached job is placed in a pending state
and can be reattached at any time.

If you are using the Job Facility, you can detach a job from the Alter Job/File
Attributes panel. Select the function AT from either the Job Facility menu, or from a
job selection list. This will display the Alter Job/File Attribute panel.
Note: See 30.3.1.2, “Using the Job Facility” on page 30-18 for more information
about the Alter Job panel.
From the Alter Job display, you can select the options DETACH (DJ) or DETACH
HOLD (DH). Enter the appropriate code in the OPTION field and the corresponding
job name in the JOB NAME field and press ENTER. The request will then be issued.
The DETACH commands can also be issued while the Job Facility is in a suspended
state.
30.2.2 Locating Data

This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a job for all or
specific occurrences of a string.
you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See the section,
30.2.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 30-10 for details.
30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences
You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of a
string within the currently attached file.

FIRST DIVISION
The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached file will be the
first line of the resulting display.
LAST
include a string.

By default, the entire file (for example, the full length of every line) is searched for
your string. You can include column and/or line numbers with the command to qualify
the search for a single operation. For example:
NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE
examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After the
command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundaries
for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4,
“Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)
By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific number of
lines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of
currently displayed data, you would enter:
LAST SAMPLE 2==
30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String
You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular string
within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the string
TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data, you would enter:
INCL TEST-DATA 1==
If you do not specify a number, the site-defined number of lines are searched. (You
can use the SET JOBCNT command to establish your own search limit. See the
CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for details.)
You can also also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. For
example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string
operation resumes scanning for the previously specified string (for example,
TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key.
(The search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line
number limits apply only to the command with which they are specified.)

POINT LINE 15=

30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation
Translating the String
Delimiting the Search String
these commands, delimit the string only when it:
INCL /JOB/).
Qualifying the Search String
By default, CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters and/or spaces that exactly
match the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier
operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX.
For example, assume the attached file contains the line:
BROTHER and THEIR match the search string.
By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as
in:
match.
BROTHER match.
matches.


X'string'
as in:
FIRST X'C1'

FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
/X'C1/ or /X'C1' / or /X'C1'/
operands are:
positioning.)

30.2.3 Positioning the Display

■ Position between the files comprising a job.
■ Position to a specific line within a file.
■ Assign names to specific lines within a file and then later reposition the display to
begin with a named location.
30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files
The files comprising your job are presented to you individually. For example, assume
you are currently viewing a file and now want to view the next sequential file, you can
do this by entering:
NEXT FILE
Note: You can display a list of the files in your job by issuing the STATUS JOB
command.
When using these commands to locate a string, once you have specified the object of
your search (like FILE in this case), it is remembered. To return to the previous file,
you only need enter:
PREV
To view the last file, you would enter:

LAST
To then return to the first file, you would enter:

FIRST
You can also use the POINT command to position to a specific file. For example, to
view the fifth file in your job, enter:
POINT FILE 5
If you want to begin the display with the second page of the fifth file, you would
enter:
POINT FILE 5 PAGE 2
Caution:
The number of the currently displayed file and page are shown above the Scale
Line to assist you in keeping track of your location within your job output.

30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File
If the contents of the file you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal
screen, you can position the display within the file by:
■ Using the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands with the PAGE or LINE
keyword operand. For example, to position the display to begin with the last page
of the currently displayed file, you would enter:
LAST PAGE
While to position to the first line of that file, you would enter:
FIRST LINE
■ Using the POINT command with the PAGE or LINE operands. For example, to
position the display to begin with line 500 of the currently attached file, you
would enter:
POINT LINE 5==
To position to the first or last line, you would enter:
POINT LINE T or
POINT LINE B
30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines
When you are browsing a file, you can assign a one- to six-character name to the line
containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to
assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter:
NOTE LOC1 or
NOTE QLOC1

NOTE Q+5 LOC2
enter:
POINT LOC1

STATUS NOTES

the resulting display shows each assigned name and the file, page and line to which it
is assigned.
DROP LOC2
Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the member,
attach another member or return to the menu.

30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output

Using Primary Commands: While you are working with job output, you can
attach an AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data and then
return to your data. The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the
active AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data you have been viewing using the
ATTACH JOB command.
Jobs: Reattaching Job Output
7 ATTACH_
8
>
> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 F 4 P 1
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
============================== T O P ============
7 ATTACH JOB )
8
> J PENDING
> AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================== T O P =================
7> 8
> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 F 4 P 1
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
============================= T O P =============
The center screen in the previous examples shows J PENDING. This note is
provided to remind you that the job may be reattached at any time.

When you reattach the job, the display begins with the first line of the prior display.
To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:
■ Use the FILE, PAGE and/or LINE operands of ATTACH to specify the desired
starting location, as in:
ATTACH JOB Q FILE 3
ATTACH JOB Q FILE 3 LINE 12==
ATTACH LIB Q FILE 3 PAGE 2
■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with a specific location, as in:
POINT JOB FILE 4
POINT JOB FILE 4 LINE 12==
POINT JOB FILE 4 PAGE 2
or with the line assigned a NOTE name, as in:
POINT LIB NAME1
■ Use the JOB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to
begin the display the the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST JOB /DD/
■ Use the JOB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display with
a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:
INCL JOB /DD/
If you are working with jobs using AJOB and the Job Facility, you can also attach an
AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data and then return to
job output. AJOB will be suspended while you process other data. You can issue any
of the following commands to return to the job data and continue AJOB processing:
AJOB PREV Job

ELect MENU FIRST Job
SELect NEXT LAST Job
SELect PREV DETach Job
Next Job
Note: You can enter the commands shown above as listed, or you can use their
abbreviations which are shown in uppercase (for example, SEL MENU).

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

This section describes how you can perform such tasks as:
■ Altering the attributes of one or more files comprising a job.
■ Copying all or part of a file into an AWS,
■ Display information about the files comprising the currently attached job.
■ Printing the currently displayed file.
■ Canceling a job.
These tasks can be performed using primary commands, the Job Facility menu, or a
job selection list.
30.3.1 Altering File Attributes
Multiple users can attach the same job. If you are not the first person to attach the job,
you cannot change the attributes of its files.
If you are the first person to attach the job, you can change the attributes of its files by
using:
■ The modifiable STATUS JOB display.
The display produced by STATUS job can be used to control the printing of a file
at a system or 328x-type printer. (See section, 30.3.3, “Displaying File Attributes”
on page 30-23 for additional information.)
■ The ALTER command.
Use ALTER to change the system printer attributes associated with one or more
files, as in:
ALTER JOB PRINT CLASS A
which changes the SYSOUT class for the currently displayed job to A. If the file
is not currently displayed, you must identify it, as in:
ALTER JOB FILE 3 NOPRINT
which prevents the third file in the job from being printed.
To mark all files to be printed, use the ALL operand. (Use of this operand may
be restricted by site management.) For example, to mark all files to be printed in
Class V, enter:
ALTER JOB ALL PRINT CLASS V
Other operands permit you to change the printer ID (DEST), the number of copies
to be printed (COPIES), and the output form number (FORM).

To alter file attributes from the Job Facility menu, enter the code AT in the
FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The
following example shows how to alter a job from the Job Facility menu.
Jobs: Alter Job Through the Job Facility
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> AT


U V
When you select the ALTER JOB function, the Alter Job panel will be displayed. It
will contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu, as shown in
Jobs: Alter Job Panel Display
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
ALTER JOB/FILE ATTRIBUTES
OPTION ===> (AT - ALTER; DJ - DETACH; DH - DETACH HOLD; X - EXIT)
JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE

FILE NUMBER ===> (NN, ALL)
PRINT STATUS ===> (P, NOP) CLASS ===>
DESTINATION ===> FORM ===>
COPIES ===>
Select one of the four OPTIONs listed on the screen and fill in all appropriate fields,
which consist of the following:
OPTION Requires AT, DJ, DH, or X; X returns to invoking Primary
Menu or Job Selection display; AT will issue an ALTER JOB
request; DJ will issue the DETACH JOB request; DH will issue

the DETACH JOB HOLD request; Any other value redisplays

the Alter Job screen.
JOB NAME The specific job name to be altered.
JOB NUMBER The specific job number to be altered.
FILE NUMBER File to be altered; must be numeric or ALL.
PRINT STATUS Must be P for PRINT or NOP for NOPRINT. Required only if
changing the print status is desired.
DESTINATION The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, or class
of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.
COPIES Must be numeric or left blank. Required only if altering the
number of copies desired.
CLASS Print class to be assigned to a job file.
FORM Form to be assigned to a job file.
To alter file attributes from a job selection list, enter the code AT in the command
field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The
following example shows how to alter a job from a job selection list.
Jobs: Alter Job Through Selection List

8
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
AT 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
AT 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC SAMPLECS 18.79
__ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL MUF8= 8.45
__ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL CICS 36.23
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
When you select the ALTER function, the Alter Job/File Attributes panel will be
displayed. It will contain the name of the first job which was selected from the
selection list. See the Alter Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Alter Job Panel
Display” on page 30-18.

30.3.2 Copying Job Output
You can use a variety of commands to copy all or part of the currently attached job
output file into the AWS. These commands include:
COPY JOB Copies all or part of a file into an AWS, as in:
COPY JOB T [TO SAMPLE]
which copies all of the currently attached job to the top of the AWS
named SAMPLE. (If an AWS name is not included, the data are
copied to the active AWS.)
COPYS JOB Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from the
attached file into an AWS, as in:
COPY JOB /DD/ 28== 53== 1==
which copies every line containing the string DD between line 2800
and 5300 to (or after) line 100 in the active AWS.
COPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string from the
attached file into an AWS.
XCOPY JOB Copies all or part of the attached file from one split screen into the
active AWS of the screen containing the command.
XCOPYS JOB Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from the
attached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen
XCOPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string from the
attached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen
For additional information about these commands and how they may be used, see
Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”
You can use the Job Facility menu to copy all or part of a job into the AWS. Enter
the code C in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP
NAME field. The following example shows how to copy a job from the primary
menu.

Jobs: Copy Job Through Job Facility Menu
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> C


U V
When you select the COPY JOB function, the Copy Job panel will be displayed. It
will contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu and its
corresponding job number, as shown in the following example.
Jobs: Copy Job Display
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
COPY JOB
OPTION ===> C (C - COPY; X - EXIT)

FILE NUMBER ===>
FIRST LINE ===> AWS TARGET ===>
LAST LINE ===> AWS NAME ===>
COPIES ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO (Y, N)
Select the Copy option and fill in all appropriate fields, as listed below:
OPTION requires C or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or Job

Selection display; C indicates to issue a COPY JOB request;
Any other value redisplays the Copy Job screen.
JOB NAME The specific job name to be copied.

JOB NUMBER The specific job number to be copied.

FILE NUMBER File to be copied; Must be numeric.
FIRST LINE First line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left blank.
LAST LINE Last line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left blank.
COPIES Number of times to copy file to AWS. Defaults to 1.
AWS TARGET Location in the AWS to which the file is copied. Must be a
line number, T (Top), B (Bottom), or R (Replace).
AWS NAME Name of AWS to receive the copied file. It must be the
name of an existing AWS.
CONTROL CHARS Specifies whether control characters are included when the
file is copied. Value is initially set to that specified on the
Primary Menu.
To copy a job from a job selection list, enter the code C in the command field to the
left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following
example shows how to copy a job from a selection list.
Jobs: Copy Job Through Selection List

8
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
C_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
C_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
When you select the COPY function, the Copy Job panel will be displayed. It will
contain the name of the first job which was selected from the selection list. See the
Copy Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Copy Job Display” on page 30-21.

30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes
30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command
You can display information about the currently attached job by entering:
STATUS
If your job is attached but not currently displayed, you can display the same
information by including the JOB keyword, as in:
STATUS JOB
The following example shows the type of information that is displayed using either
method.
Jobs: STATUS JOB Display
7 >
8
> STA(SAMPLE,2=85) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 JOB PENDING
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+
ROSCOE ALTER/STATUS PROCESSOR
JOB NAME NO FILE LINE PAGE/ LINE FIND LIMIT I/O COUNT
SAMPLE 2=85 1 1 1 1 2== 1=
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

A FILE STA C DEST LINES FORM CPY NOTES
1 NOP T R1! 5 STD.
2 NOP T R1! 36 STD.
3 NOP T R1! 1=4 STD.
4 NOP T R1! 263 STD.
5 NOP T R1! 18 STD.
6 NOP T R1! 6 STD.
===================== END OF OUTPUT FILES ======================
U V
The status information includes:
JOB NAME Name of the job currently attached.
NO Number of the job currently attached.
FILE Number of the file currently pointed to.
LINE Number of the line within the file currently pointed to.
PAGE/ Number of the page currently pointed to.
LINE Number of the line within the page currently pointed to.

FIND LIMIT Current search limit (the number of lines to be searched).

This value is used when an EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST,
NEXT or PREV command is entered with no search limit. It
is either the site default or the number you specified with the
SET JOBCNT command.
I/O COUNT Current number of blocks read from the system spool. (This
field is meaningless at JES3 sites.)
A (Modifiable) Use this field to:
1. Redisplay the job beginning with a specific file by
entering, before the appropriate file.
A or S Attach file.
2. Alter the printing status of a file by entering:
P Print file at system or 328x-type printer.
D or N Do not print the file.
FILE CA-Roscoe-assigned file number.
STA Printing status (disposition) of each file. (The disposition can
be modified as noted with A.)
C (Modifiable) Use this field to change the SYSOUT class of a file by
overtyping the character with any class valid for the
designated system or 328x-type printer.
DEST (Modifiable) Use this field to change the printing destination of a file by
overtyping with:
1. A system printer ID.
2. A 328x-type printer destination.
To use the default destination associated with your
terminal, enter an R. (Erase any other characters
appearing in the field.)
If there is a name conflict between a 328x-type printer and a
system printer, the system printer is assumed. To force the
328x-type printer to be used, precede the name with an R. For
example, if LOCAL is the name of both a system and
328x-type printer, enter R LOCAL to direct the file to the
328x-type printer.
LINES Number of print lines in each file or N/A if the number is
unavailable.
FORM (Modifiable) Use this field to indicate the FORMAT or TYPE status of a
file by entering ANS, MCC, DUMP, CHEX or VHEX. For a
file directed to a system printer, this field can be used to
change the output form number.

CPY (Modifiable) Use this field to change the number of copies of a file to be
printed.
NOTE CA-Roscoe-assigned file description.
If you change one or more of the modifiable fields and then decide that these changes
should not be applied, you can:
1. Overtype the appropriate field(s), or
2. Press PA1 or the CLEAR key to refresh the display.
30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List
To display the status of a job from a job selection list, enter the code S in the
command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be
selected. The following example shows how to display status information from a job
selection list.
Jobs: Job Status Through Job Selection List

8
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
S_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
S_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
When you select the STATUS function, the first job selected will be ATTACHed to
the STATUS JOB display. See the STATUS Job display and its description in “Jobs:
STATUS JOB Display” on page 30-23.

30.3.4 Printing Job Output
There are a variety of commands you can use to request that one or more files be
printed at a system or 328x-type printer.
■ Use the PRINT command to direct all or the currently attached file to a system or
328x-type printer. For example, if you enter:
PRINT JOB
All of the currently attached file is printed at the 328x-type printer associated with
your terminal.
For a detailed description of the PRINT command and how requests can be
monitored and controlled, see Chapter 7, “Printing Data.”
Use the ALTER command to change a file's print status and alter its system
printer destination. When the job is released, the file will be printed.
■ Use the modifiable STATUS JOB display or a Job List 'A' panel to designate
whether a file is to print at a system or 328x-type printer.
■ Use the CK function of the Job List Facility. The job is terminated, and a listing
of the job output is produced.
You can use the Job Facility menu to print a job. Enter the code P in the FUNCTION
field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following
example shows how to print a job from the primary menu.

Jobs: Print Job Through Job Facility Menu
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> P


U V
When you select the PRINT JOB function, the Print Job panel will be displayed. It
will contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu, as shown in
Jobs: Print Job Display
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
PRINT JOB
OPTION ===> P (P - PRINT; X - EXIT)

FILE NUMBER ===>
DESTINATION ===> TAG ===> COPIES ===>

CLASS ===> OUTPUT TYPE ===> NOTIFY ===> (Y, N
FIRST LINE ===> TOP MARGIN ===> SEPARATOR ===> (Y, N
LAST LINE ===> BOT MARGIN ===> ALIGN ===> (Y, N
FIRST COLUMN ===> PAGE LENGTH ===> SEQ NUMS ===> (Y, N
LAST COLUMN ===> PAGE WIDTH ===>
U V

Select the PRINT option and fill in all appropriate fields, which consist of the
following:
OPTION requires P or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or Job
Selection display; P indicates to issue a PRINT JOB request;
Any other value redisplays the Print Job screen.
JOB NAME The specific job name to be printed.
JOB NUMBER The specific job number name to be printed.
FILE NUMBER File to be printed; Must be numeric.
DESTINATION The printer destination used to print the job file.
CLASS Print class to be assigned to the job file.
FIRST LINE First line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left
blank.
LAST LINE Last line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left blank.
FIRST COLUMN First column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left
blank.
LAST COLUMN Last column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left
blank.
TAG Name to be assigned to print request. Defaults to user's
CA-Roscoe ID.
OUTPUT TYPE Specification of print format. Must be DEF, ANS, or MCC,
or left blank (defaults to DEF).
TOP MARGIN Number of blank lines to be skipped from the top of the page
before printing begins. Must be numeric or left blank.
(Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).
BOTTOM MARGIN Number of blank lines to be skipped at bottom of page.
Must be numeric or left blank. (Applicable only when
OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).
PAGE LENGTH Length of paper in number of print lines. Must be numeric
or left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is
specified DEF).
PAGE WIDTH Width of paper in printing columns. Must be numeric or left
blank.
COPIES Number of times to print file. Defaults to 1.
NOTIFY Specifies whether a notification message is displayed when
the request is printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.
SEPARATOR Specifies whether separator pages are included. Must be
YES, NO, or left blank.
ALIGN Specifies whether a physical page alignment is forced. Must
be YES, NO, or left blank.

SEQ NUMS Specifies whether sequence numbers are included when the
data are printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.
To print a job from a job selection list, enter the code P in the command field to the
left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following
example shows how to print a job from a job selection list.
Jobs: Print Job Through Selection List

8
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
P_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
P_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
When you select the PRINT function, the Print Job panel will be displayed. Fill in the
appropriate fields there to print the job. See the Print Job display and its description
in “Jobs: Print Job Display” on page 30-27.

30.3.5 Canceling a Job
The PURGE monitor command can be used to cancel a job from the system queue.
Note: Sites have the option of restricting the use of this command; check with your
site system programmer for more information about using PURGE.
For example, to cancel the job named SAMPLE, enter:
PURGE SAMPLE
If there are multiple jobs with the same name, you must specify the number of the job,
as in:
PURGE SAMPLE 1234
You can use the Job Facility menu to cancel a job. Enter the code CN in the
FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. Check
the value displayed in the CONFIRM CANCEL field to see whether a confirmation
panel will be presented. The default, YES, will present the Cancel Job Confirmation
panel from which you can confirm the job information. If you do not want to confirm
job cancellations, overtype this value with NO. The following example illustrates
how to cancel a job from the Job Facility menu.
Jobs: Cancel Job Through Job Facility Menu
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> CN


U V

When you select the CANCEL JOB function, and the CONFIRM CANCEL value is
YES, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel will be displayed:
Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel
7 8
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
CANCEL JOB CONFIRMATION
CONFIRM CANCEL ===> N (Y - YES, N - NO)
JOB INFORMATION:
1234 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 15 ANY LOCAL
From this screen, select Y (YES) to cancel the job listed under JOB INFORMATION.
If you do not want to cancel the job, select N (NO) and you will be returned to the job
menu.
To cancel a job from a job selection list, enter the code CN in the command field to
the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following
example shows how to cancel a job from a job selection list.
Jobs: Cancel Job Through Selection List

8
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
CN 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
CN 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
U V
When you select the CANCEL function, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel will be
displayed. Select YES to cancel the job. See the confirmation display and its
description in “Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel.”


Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing
Local Data)
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
31.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . . 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
32.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
32.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-6
32.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-11
32.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-12
Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
33.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . . 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-14
34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
34.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-17
34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-22

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility
The CA-Roscoe library system provides a permanent storage area for data that is in an
AWS. The data are stored in a library member that you create through the SAVE
command. This chapter describes how you can:
■ Attach a library member or Selection List of members.
■ Browse through the attached member or Selection List. While browsing, you can
locate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can also browse
other types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to the data you were
browsing.
■ Perform a variety of library management functions which include:
– Copying all or part of a library member or Selection List into an AWS.
– Printing all or part of a library member or Selection List at a system or
328x-type printer.
– Renaming or deleting a library member.
– Changing library member attributes.
You can perform all of these operations using the Library Facility or primary
commands. Many of these operations can also be performed using the Selection List
provided through the Library Facility.
Note: See Chapter 23, “AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member” for
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System
31.1 Notes About the Library System

■ When you attach a library member, the contents of that member is not modifiable.
To modify it, you must first bring a copy of it into an AWS. When you have
finished modifying the copy in that AWS, you must explicitly update the member
to alter its contents.
■ You need not attach a member to:
– Submit the contents of one or more members to the operating system for
execution.
– Write the content of one or more members to a data set.
– Copy one or more members into an AWS.
– Print one or more members.
■ When you create a library member, your CA-Roscoe prefix is associated with it. It
is this prefix that guarantees your library member name is unique. For example, if
you and another user each create a member named TESTJCL, the names are
unique because of the addition of your unique prefixes.
You do not need to specify your prefix when working with your library members.
When working with members belonging to another user, you must include that
person's prefix, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL : attach your own member
ATTACH ABC.TESTJCL : attach another user's member
■ CA-Roscoe provides a multi-level security system which allows:
– you to assign an access attribute to your members. For example, if you assign
the access attribute EXECONLY to a member containing an RPF program,
other users can execute your member but cannot access it in any other way.
– site management to assign you to a security group. These security groups
define the type of access people have to members that you have defined as
shareable.
This system thus ensures the integrity of your library members from deletion or
modification by unauthorized users.

31.2 Attaching the Library Facility

You can attach the Library Facility menu by issuing the command:
ATTACH LIB or
LIBRARY
You can include a function code and library name with this command.
If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it, you can
bypass the Library Facility menu and display the function panel. For example, if you
enter:
LIBRARY C COBTEST
the Copy Function Panel is displayed with COBTEST in the MEMBER field.
If you are currently using the Library Facility, you can redisplay the menu by entering:
SELECT MENU
The variable information shown on the menu is determined by the format of the menu.
To change the format, you can use the command:
SELECT ALT [v]
If you omit the number v, you will proceed sequentially through the different formats.
If you specify a number, it can be:
1 To show the last specific member name.
2 To show the last executed RPF program name.
3 To show the last generic member name.
4 To show the last prefix or key.

Library: Library Facility Menu
7 >
8
> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ==>
PREFIX ==> LIB ALTER ===> EXPLICIT

MEMBER ==>
SIGNON KEY ==>
FORMAL KEY ==>
SEARCH ==> (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)
CONFIRM DELETE ==>
A - ATTACH LIBRARY D - DELETE MEMBERS P - PRINT MEMBER

C - COPY MEMBERS I - INFO MEMBERS R - RENAME MEMBERS
X - TERMINATE LIB
U V
FUNCTION Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired action. The
codes and their related actions are shown at the bottom of the
menu.
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix associated with the
individual whose members are to be involved in the
operation.
MEMBER Enter the one- to eight-character name of the member to be
involved in the operation. (This name may be composed of
one or more wildcard characters.)
SIGNON KEY Enter the sign-on key associated with the individual whose
members are to be involved in the operation.
FORMAL KEY Protected field containing the formal key associated with the
individual identified through the PREFIX or SIGNON KEY
field.

SEARCH Enter one or more of the following codes to qualify the

search operation. If omitted, all members are included in the
operation. The codes are:
SHR Members with a shared access attribute.
RES Members with a restricted access attribute.
EXE Members with an execute-only access attribute.
NOD Members that have no description.
CONFIRM DELETE Designate whether delete operations are to be confirmed prior
to execution by specifying:
YES Operation should be confirmed. (Can be
abbreviated as Y.)
NO Operation should not be confirmed. (Can be
abbreviated as N.)
The first time you use the Library Facility, this field is set to
YES. The setting in effect when you sign-off is remembered
and reinstated when you sign back on.
LIB ALTER Designate whether altering the DESCRIPTION, ATtRibute,
or sequence number(SEQNO) fields of the Library Selection
List is to be done explicitly. Specify:
EXPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List, using
the AT line command and overtyping the data
to be altered.
IMPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List by
directly overtyping the data to be altered.

31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels
31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels

You can use the Library Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each function is
identified by a specific code. The codes can be specified with the LIBRARY
command or through the Library Facility menu.

A Attach a member or Selection List. Performed.
C Copy a member or Selection List. Panel displayed.
D Delete a member. Panel displayed.
I Inquire about a member. Performed.
P Print a member or Selection List. Panel displayed.
R Rename a member. Panel displayed.
X Terminate the Library Facility. Performed.
The field ACTION in indicates whether the function is performed directly or requires
additional information. For example, the information you provide through the menu is
sufficient to attach a member (function code A) but is insufficient to rename a member
(function code R).
When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed. When

such a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to the menu by
entering in the first panel field:
=[code.code]
■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu.
■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.
■ If you specify any other code (like =C), the appropriate function-related panel is
displayed.
If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can use PF
keys to scroll the panel.
All of the Library Facility functions are described in detail in Chapter 34, “Library:
Performing Library Management Tasks.”

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List

You can use the Library Facility or a primary command to create and attach:
■ A list of all or selected members that you own.
■ A list of all or selected members belonging to another user.
The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the screen.
This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area while working with
the Selection List.
The first line of a Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the bottom
marker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of members in the list exceeds
the screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the List.
The information displayed in the Selection List is separated into specific fields. Some
fields contain Library information and remain constant as you scroll through the
Selection List (for example, the SIGNON KEY and MEM fields.) There are also
fields which contain member-specific information. By default, these fields are
displayed alphabetically by member name, or by the order designated by the SET LIB
ORDER command.
To designate a specific Selection List order, enter the field and order criteria, as in:
SET LIB ORDER LINES ASC
See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for more information about using the
SET LIB ORDER command.
The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the width of
80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate display
formats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the command:
SELECT ALT
To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command, as in:
SELECT ALT 2
See Chapter 32, “Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal,” for information
about displaying each type of Selection List. The information includes a description of
the fields comprising each list. The alternate display numbers shown with the
description are for 80-column screens. Additional formats (containing variations of the
information) are available at terminals supporting wider screen sizes.

31.4.1 Entering Function Codes

You can use the Selection List to perform a variety of functions. Each function is
identified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection List. As
illustrated in the following figure the function codes are entered in the shaded area
shown at the left of the display.
If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed sequentially.
If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially within the
following function hierarchy:
X Terminate Library Facility.
D Delete member.
R Rename member.
AT Alter member attributes/description.
P Print a member.
I Inquire about member.
C Copy a member.
A Attach member.
| E Edit a member
| SU Submit a member
The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes on a
Selection List. You can further qualify any function by specifying information in the
STATUS field (the second shaded area). (See Chapter 34, “Library: Performing
Library Management Tasks” for information about each of the functions you can
perform through a Selection List.)
Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example
7 >
8
> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO
XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR N
A XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1=
I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR =
XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR =
D XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N
R XYZ.MYRPF DOJCL RPF: Builds JCL 519

Using the example in “Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on

page 31-8, the functions are processed in the following order:
1. The member JUNK will be deleted. (A delete confirmation panel may be
displayed.)
2. The member MYRPF will then be renamed using the name specified in the
STATUS field (for example, DOJCL).
3. An information panel for COBTEST1 is then presented and any remaining
unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing the information,
you can:
■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT NEXT.
The next function (for example, attach BEGINJCL) will be performed.
■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the Selection
List) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Library Facility menu). In either
case, any unexecuted functions are ignored.
4. Finally, the member BEGINJCL is displayed.
Notes:
■ All function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid or
incomplete function is specified, the functions are placed in a pending state and a
message is displayed. To resume execution, you must either:
1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or
2. Remove it by typing a space over.
■ If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the other
function codes are ignored. The Library Facility is immediately terminated.

31.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List

After a function is performed, the STATUS field contains the appropriate completion
message. The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear after
performing the actions noted in the previous figure.
Library: Selection List Before REFRESHing
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR NOSEQ

XYZ.BEGINJCL )ATTACH JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =73,8
XYZ.COBTEST1 )INFO Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6
XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR ==1,6
XYZ.JUNK )DELETE 87 SHR NOSEQ
XYZ.MYRPF )RENAME RPF: Build JCL 519 SHR NOSEQ
U V
The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more completion
messages will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay the Selection List with the
most current information (for example, the deleted members removed and renamed
members shown with their new names). To do this, enter the command:
REFRESH

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the
Terminal
This chapter describes how you can display:

■ A Library Member Selection List, or
■ A library member directly.
Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

You can use a primary command or the Library Facility menu to display a Selection
List containing information about all or selected members that either belong to you or
to another CA-Roscoe user.

You can use the ATTACH LIB command to produce a Selection List containing
information about:
■ All Members:
To display a list of all of your own members, enter:
ATTACH LIB +
To display a list of all members associated with another individual, enter:
ATTACH [LIB] KEY SMITH
where SMITH is the sign-on key assigned to the individual whose members are to
be listed, or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.
where XYZ is the prefix assigned to the individual whose members are to be
listed. (When specifying a prefix, you must include the terminating period.)

■ Selected Members:
You can use wildcard characters to produce a qualified Selection List containing
specific information about members that belong to you or another user. For
example, to display a Selection List containing only those names that include the
characters JCL, you would enter:
ATTACH LIB QJCLQ or ATTACH LIB XYZ.QJCLQ
or
ATTACH LIB XYZ.QJCLQ
The following table shows the wildcard characters that you can specify through
the primary command or the Library Facility menu.
Code Meaning and Examoles

Example: Matches:
RO? ROE
ROS
ROW
*JCL* AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
RO+ RO
ROE
ROSCOE
These wildcards can be used in the same search string, as in:

ATTACH [LIB] S?AQJCL+
where the member names STARTJCL1 would match. Note that consecutive
asterisks (**) or an asterisk and plus sign (*+) are invalid.
You can further qualify the list by using:
– Access attributes (like SHARED, EXECONLY and RESTRICTED) to limit
the Selection List to members assigned specific access attributes. For example,
to limit the List to only those members with an EXECONLY access attribute,
enter:
ATTACH LIB + EXECONLY or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. EXECONLY
(Site management can limit the amount of information you receive about
another user's members.)

– NODESC to limit the display to those members that have no descriptions, as

in:
ATTACH LIB + NODESC or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. NODESC
– The ORDER operand to sort the display by specific criterion. You can sort a
Library Selection List by fields or parts of fields (prefixes, suffixes, or parts
of dates) in ascending or descending order. For example, to attach a Library
Selection List and order it by member name suffixes in descending order, and
by their attributes, enter:
ATTACH LIB + ORDERED BY MEMBER COL 7 9 DESCENDING AND ATR or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. ORDERED BY MEM COL 7 9 DES AND ATR
Finally, you can combine several qualifiers, as in:
ATTACH LIB QJCLQ SHARED EXECONLY NODESC or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.QJCLQ SHARED EXECONLY NODESC
where only these members whose names contain the characters JCL are initially
selected. This group is then further qualified so that only those matching members
with a shared or execute-only access attribute or no description are included in the
resulting Selection List.
Using the LIB Operand:
As illustrated in the preceding examples, LIB is required only when the selection
criteria begins with a wildcard character.

32.1.2 Using the Library Facility

To attach a Selection List containing all members that you or another user own, type
the code A in the FUNCTION field. Then, enter the appropriate prefix or sign-on key,
as illustrated in below.
Library: Attaching a Selection List (All Members)
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===>
SIGNON KEY ===>
To create a qualified Selection List, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the
appropriate prefix in the PREFIX field. Then use wildcard characters with the name
typed in the MEMBER field.
As illustrated in the following example, you can use the SEARCH field to further limit
the members that are to be included in the List.
Library: Attaching a Qualified Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ==> A
PREFIX ==> XYZ

MEMBER ==> RO+
SIGNON KEY ==>
FORMAL KEY ==>
SEARCH ==> SHR (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

32.1.3 Format of Selection List

The following example illustrates the format of the Library Facility Selection List.
Library: Selection List Description
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR NO
XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =7
XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==
XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR ==
XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR NO
XYZ.MYRPF RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR NO
U V
You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following function:
A Attach a member
AT Alter attributes
C Copy a member
D Delete a member
I Display member information
P Print a member
R Rename a member
X Terminate Library Facility
Type the appropriate code(s) in the first shaded area shown in the previous figure.
With Alter, Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the
STATUS field. (See the appropriate sections for details.) After performing a function,
the STATUS field will indicate the result of the operation.
Screens which do not contain STATUS fields are not modifiable.

SELECT ALT [v]
as you scroll through the Selection List and show:
SIGNON KEY Sign-on key associated with the individual whose members are
included in the display.
MATCH Optional field included only when selection criteria was used to
produce the List.
MEM Number of library members included in the Selection List.
EXCL Number of library members that site management excluded from the
display.
BLOCKS Number of library blocks used by the members included in the List.
M-LINES Maximum number of lines the owner of these members may save in
the library or N/A if the owner has no limit.
LINES Number of lines contained within all of the members included in the
display.
The remaining fields identify the individual members comprising the List, and include
the information shown in the following table.

Field Name Description Alt Attrib.

MEMBER Name of the member matching the All Asc
selection criteria
DESCRIPTION Description of the member, if available ALL Asc
LINES Number of lines the member contains 1 Des
ATR Member's access attribute 1 Asc
SEQNO Member's sequence number attribute 1 Asc
CREATED Date the member was created 1 Des
UPDATED Date the last member was updated 2/3 Des
ACCESS Date the member was last accessed 3 Des
If your terminal screen displays more than 80 characters, you can issue SELECT ALT
4 to view all of the preceding information. At all terminals, you can place all of this
information into an AWS by using the FULL operand of the COPY (LIB) command.
An additional field is provided when you view or copy all of the library information.
The field is named CRT and indicates how the member was created. It will contain:
■ Blanks, if the member was created online.
■ BCH, if the member was created by a batch program.
■ MON, if the member was created by a Monitor command.
■ POS, if the member was created by an obsolete post-processor.

32.1.4 Reordering the Display

The fields listed in the previous table can be used to qualify the Library Selection List
display. Each field has a default sorting attribute (ascending or descending). By
default, a Selection List is sorted by member names, in ascending order. Use the
ORDER command to change the display and order it by any one (or more) of the
fields. For example, to reorder a Selection List by the number of lines in members, in
descending order (default), enter:
ORDER LIB LINES
The 'LIB' operand is required if the Library Facility is not active. For example, to
sort a displayed Selection List by year of member creation date, in ascending order,
enter:
ORDER CREATED COL 7 8 ASC
Notice that the CREATED field is on the second alternate screen. The list will be
reordered even if the CREATED field is not displayed. Use the SELECT ALT
command to display the CREATED field.
You can also reorder more than one field at a time. For example, to reorder a
Selection List by sequence attributes and ascending line count, enter:
ORDER LIB SEQNO LINES ASC
Sorting is done in order of the operands specified. So, in the last example, the
Selection List is reordered by sequence attributes, and then by line counts.
Note: A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.
You can set the default order of a Library Selection List to a specific field. Every
time you attach a Library Selection List, it will be sorted by that criterion. Use the
SET LIB ORDER command, as in:
SET LIB ORDER LINES
Any subsequent order commands will override this setting. To reset the Library
Selection List display to the site default, specify:
SET LIB ORDER DEFAULT

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly

You can use the ATTACH primary command, the Library Facility menu or the
Selection List to view a library member.

You can attach a library member by entering the ATTACH command and the
appropriate library member name, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL
To browse a member that belongs to another user, you must include that user's prefix.
For example, to attach the member COBPROG that belongs to the individual assigned
the prefix ABC, you would enter:
ATTACH ABC.COBPROG
Operands of this command allow you to control the display. For example, you can:
■ Begin the display with a specific line, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL LINE 12==
■ Begin the display with the first line containing a specific string, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL /SYSOUT=/
Additional operands allow you to qualify the string. For example, to begin the display
with the first line containing a word that begins with SYS, you would enter:
ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX
All of these operands can be used together, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX LINE 12==
which will start at line 1200 of the member TESTJCL to search for the first word
beginning with the prefix SYS.

32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu

As illustrated in the following example, to attach a member from the Library Facility
menu, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the MEMBER
field. (If the member belongs to another individual, that person's prefix must be
specified in the PREFIX field.)
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
PREFIX ===> ABC

MEMBER ===> COBPROG
SIGNON KEY ===>

To attach a member through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach) function code
to the left of the member name, as illustrated below.
Library: Attaching a Member Through a Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 352 = 971 2==== 117=1

XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =73,8
A XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6

32.2.4 Format of Member Display

The following example illustrates the display format used when a library member is
attached.
7 8
>
> LIB(XYZ.COBTEST1) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE =====1
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
============================= T O P ================
=====2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST.
The System Information Line begins with LIB and is followed by the prefixed name of
the currently attached library member.
The attached data itself is delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==)
marker. You can position the display by using primary commands and/or the PF keys
to which scrolling functions are assigned.


When you are viewing either attached data or a Selection List, you can use the
SELECT command to reposition the display between various levels of the Library
Facility. You can enter:
SELECT MENU To display the Library Facility menu.
SELECT DIR To display the Library Selection List.
SELECT mem To display a specific library member. The name must have
appeared in a previously displayed Library Selection List.
SELECT PREV To display the previous level in the processing hierarchy.
SELECT NEXT To perform the next function specified on the Selection List. For
example, suppose you indicated on the Selection List that you
wanted to attach three members. If you are now browsing one of
those members, you can see the next one by entering SELECT
NEXT.
When you are browsing a Selection List, you can use the SELECT command to
change the display by entering:
SELECT ALT To position to the next sequential alternate display format. To
position to a specific alternate format, specify a number with the
command, as in:
SELECT ALT 3

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data
This chapter describes how, while browsing the contents of a library member or
Selection List, you can:
■ Detach the Library Facility.
■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string within the attached member or
Selection List.
■ Position the display to a specific line, or to a line to which you have assigned a
name.
■ Reattach the library member or Selection List after browsing an AWS, a data set
object or job output file.
Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility
33.1 Detaching the Library Facility

You can explicitly detach the Library Facility by entering the command:
DETACH LIB
The Library Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the menu,
any function panel or the Selection List. (If you enter X on the Selection List with
other function codes, those functions will be ignored.)
ATTACHing another library member implicitly detaches the currently attached

member. If you have assigned NOTE names to the member, those names are deleted
when the member is detached.
an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Library Facility is placed in a pending
state and can be reattached at any time.

33.2 Locating Data
33.2 Locating Data

This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a member or
Selection List for all or specific occurrences of a string.
you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See 33.2.3,
33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

When you initially attach a library member, you can cause the display to begin with
the first line containing a specific string by including that string with the command, as
in:
ATTACH COBTEST1 /PROCEDURE/
In this example, the first line containing the string PROCEDURE in the member
COBTEST1 will be the first displayed line.
Once attached, you can use the following commands to find and display specific
occurrences of a string.

FIRST DIVISION
The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached member will be
the first line of the resulting display.
LAST
include a string.
By default, the entire member (for example, the full length of every line) is searched
for your string. You can include column and line numbers with the command to
qualify the search for a single operation. For example:
NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE
examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE.

33.2 Locating Data
After the command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column
boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See
Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)
By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific number of
lines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of
currently displayed data, you would enter:
LAST SAMPLE 2==
33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String

You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular character
string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the
string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data, you would
enter:
INCL TEST-DATA 1==
If you do not specify a number, every line is searched. You can also limit the search
for the character string to particular columns.
For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string
operation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like TEST-DATA).
The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The search
string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limits
apply only to the command with which they are specified.)
POINT LINE 15=

33.2 Locating Data
Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can enter
any function code(s). If a function results in another display (that is, attaching
an entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.
33.2.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.
33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String
33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String
these commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:
INCL /JOB/).

33.2 Locating Data
33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String
By default, CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters or spaces that exactly match
the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier
operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX
For example, assume the attached member contains the line:

BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you can
designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:
match.
BROTHER match.
matches.

X'string'
as in:
FIRST X'C1'

33.2 Locating Data

FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hex notation. This method can be
used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find the character
string X'C1' you might specify:
/X'C1/
or
/X'C1' /
operands are:
positioning.)


■ Position to a specific line within a library member.
■ Assign names to specific lines within a library member and then later reposition
the display to begin with a named location.

If the contents of the member or Selection List you are viewing exceeds the number of
lines in your terminal screen, you can position the display by:
■ Using the POINT command. For example to position the display to being with
line 500 of the currently attached data, you would enter:
POINT LINE 5==
POINT LINE T or POINT LINE B
When browsing the Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected field
for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.
33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines

When you are browsing a member, you can assign a one- to six-character name to the
line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to
assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter:
NOTE LOC1 or NOTE Q LOC1
or
NOTE Q LOC1


NOTE Q+5 LOC2
enter:
POINT LOC1

STATUS NOTES
a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed.
DROP LOC2
Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the member,
attach another member or return to the menu.

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility

While you are working with a member or Selection List, you can attach an AWS, data
set object or a job, browse that data and then return to your data. The following
example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and then
reATTACH the data you have been viewing:
7 ATTACH_
8
>
> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE ==1
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....
============================== T O P ============
7 ATTACH LIB )
8
> L PENDING
> AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS !!!!7 !!!72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================== T O P =================
!!!1!! IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
!!!2!! PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT.
!!!3!! ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
7 >
8
> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE ==1
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....
============================= T O P =============
The center screen above shows L PENDING. This note is provided to remind you that
the Library Facility may be reattached at any time.

When you reattach the Library Facility, the display begins with the first line of the
prior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:
■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as in:
ATTACH LIB Q LINE 5==
■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a NOTE
name, as in:
POINT LIB NAME1
■ Use the LIB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to
begin the display the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST LIB /DD/
■ Use the LIB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display with
a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in:
INCL LIB /DD/

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library
Management Tasks
This chapter describes how you can perform any of the following functions during
your terminal session:
■ Alter a member's access attribute, sequence number attribute or description.
■ Copy all or part of the attached member or Selection List.
■ Delete one or more library members.
■ Inquire about a member.
■ Print all or part of the attached member or Selection List.
■ Rename one or more members.
These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Library Facility menu
or the appropriate Selection List.
You cannot modify the contents of a library member. To change a member's contents,
you must place a copy of it in an AWS. When you have finished making your
changes, you must use the UPDATE command to update the original member contents
with the contents of the active AWS. For example, to renumber the contents of the
member SAMPLE, you might enter:
FETCH SAMPLE
RENUMBER
UPDATE Q
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes

You can change the attributes and description of a library member through a primary
command, the INFO panel or the Selection List.

You can use the ALTER command to change the description, sequence number
attribute and/or access attribute of a library member, as in:
ALTER COBTEST2 /Test COBOL Prog./ NOSEQ
ALTER does not affect any attributes that are not specified with the command.
The following table summarizes the values you can specify with this command. These
values can also be used when using a primary command to rename a library member.
DESCRIPTION 1 to 30 characters bound by a special character not found

within the description itself.
SEQUENCE SEQ Include sequence number in columns 73
NUMBER through 80 when the data are submitted.
ATTRIBUTE
SEQ COBOL Include sequence numbers in columns 1
through 6.
SEQ s l Include sequence numbers, starting in
column s for a length of l.
NOSEQ Do not include sequence numbers.
ACCESS SHARED Allow anyone to access and/or execute
ATTRIBUTE your member.
EXECONLY Allow anyone to execute your member.
(Meant for members containing RPF
programs.)
RESTRICTED Prevent anyone from accessing or
executing your member.


You can use the Library Member Information panel to change a member's description
or attributes. To do so, overtype the currently displayed values of the fields with a
value listed below.
ATTRIBUTE The access attribute can be set to: SHR (for SHARED), EXE (for
EXECONLY) or RES (for RESTRICTED).
SEQUENCE The sequence number attribute can be set to: NOSEQ (to omit
sequence numbers) or s,l (to include sequence numbers in the
designated location), where:
s One to three digits indicating the starting position of the
field. (Leading zeros may be omitted).
l One digit between 1 and 8 indicating the length of the field.
DESCRIPTION The description can be one to 30 characters in length.

You can use a Library Selection List to change a member's description or attributes.
The LIB ALTER field of the Library Facility Main Menu determines how list
members are to be altered. As illustrated in the following example, it will contain
either EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT.
EXPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List using the AT line command
and overtyping the field to be altered.
IMPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List by directly overtyping.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ==>
PREFIX ==> LIB ALTER ===> EXPLICIT

MEMBER ==>
SIGNON KEY ==>
FORMAL KEY ==>
SEARCH ==> (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

The following example illustrates how you can use the Selection List to change the
description and attributes of a member EXPLICITly.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6
AT XYZ.COBTEST2 test cobol prog._ 4=3 SHR =
After typing an AT before the name of the appropriate member, tab to the
DESCRIPTION, ATR or SEQNO field and overtype the current values. (You can use
the values described in the table in the first subsection of 34.1, “Altering Member
Attributes” on page 34-2.

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

You can use primary commands, the Copy Function panel or a Selection List to copy
all or part of a member or Selection List into an AWS.

You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or portions of the currently
attached data into an AWS. The following example illustrates how the COPY LIB
command can be used to copy lines 1 through 200 to the top of the active AWS.
Note: See Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” for
additional information about these commands.
Library: Copying Attached Data
7 COPY LIB 1 2!! T

8
>
> LIB(XYZ.COBTEST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE =====1
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
============================= T O P ================
=====2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST.
If no line numbers are included, all of the attached data are copied to the designated
destination within the active AWS.
You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of the
following:
T Copy to the top of the AWS.
B Copy to the bottom of the AWS.
R Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.

Other primary commands that you can use include:

COPYS Copies line(s) that contain a specified character string from a
member or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS.
COPYX Copies line(s) not containing the specified character string from
library data into the active or a specific AWS.
XCOPY Copies all or part of attached library data from one split screen into
the active AWS of the screen containing the command.
XCOPYS and XCOPYX
Copies selected lines from attached data in one split screen into the
active AWS of the screen containing the command.
Each of these commands allows you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as in:
COPYS LIB /DATE-FIELD/ 9== 18== 1==
which causes every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900 through
1800 of the currently attached data to be copied at or after line 100 in the AWS.
When copying from a Selection List, you can designate whether you want the header
portion of the list included with the data. (By default, the header is included.) For
example, if a Selection List is displayed:
COPYX LIB /JCL/ T NOHDR
copies every line not containing the string JCL within the currently attached Selection
List to the top of the AWS. No header information is included in the copied data.

34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data
You can also use these same commands to copy a library member that is not currently
attached into an AWS. To do so, specify the member name with the command, as in:
COPY COBTEST1 ... or
COPYS COBTEST1 /DATE-FIELD/ ...
Other commands that you can use to bring one or more library members into the
active AWS include:
FETCH Brings all or part of a library member into the active AWS, as in:
FETCH INVLIST or
FETCH INVLIST 5== 27==
where all (or lines 500 through 2700) of the member named INVLIST are
copied into the active AWS. If the active AWS contained data, that data
are overlaid by the contents of the member.
To bring in data from a library member owned by another individual,
include the person's CA-Roscoe prefix with the member name, as in:
FETCH RLM.LISTSEQS
Optionally, you can renumber the data that you bring into the AWS, as in:
FETCH INVLIST START 1== BY 5=
where the data, after being placed in the AWS, is renumbered starting with
100 and incremented by 50.
CHAIN Brings one or more members into the active AWS in the order specified in
the command, as in:
CHAIN MEM1 MEM2 MEM3
MERGE Brings one or more members into the active AWS and merges the contents
of those members by their line numbers.
A library member's access attribute determines the extent of access (like ATTACH,
COPY, and so on) other CA-Roscoe users have to that member. If a member has an
EXECONLY or RESTRICTED access attribute, only the owner of that member can
access it. While site management has the option of changing the extent of access their
users have to SHARED members, the default is that any CA-Roscoe user can access
members with this attribute.


The Copy Function panel is displayed when you specify the C function code on the
Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to place one copy of
lines 900 through 1800 of the member COBTEST1 at the top of the active AWS.
Library: Copying Through the Menu
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
COPY LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> COBTEST1
1ST LINE ===> 9== LAST LINE ===> 18==

AWS TARGET ===> T AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1
LIST HEADERS ===> NO
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

U V
S Copy a single member.
M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified,
the Selection List will contain all members associated
with that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a
name that includes wildcard characters, a qualified
Selection List is displayed.)
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the
individual whose member is to be copied. (Required only if
the displayed prefix is inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the name of the member to be copied. (Required only
if the displayed member name is inappropriate.)

1ST LINE Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If omitted,
the operation begins with the first line.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If omitted,
the operation ends with the last line.
AWS TARGET Enter the destination of the operation by specifying:
v Number of the line at or after which the data are to be
copied within the active AWS.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently
positioned.
B After the last line in the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the
copied data.
Unless changed, the default is R.
AWS COPY COUNT Enter the number of copies of the attached data are to be
placed in the active AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.
LIST HEADERS Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List header
lines are to be included in the copy operation.

If the Selection List is produced through the Copy Function panel, the only operation
you can perform is a copy.
If the Selection List is not provided through the Copy Function panel, you can
perform any of the functions that are valid with the Selection List.
To copy members, place a C before the name of each appropriate member. Then, tab
to the STATUS field and enter a destination code. (If the Selection List is produced
through the Copy Function Panel and you omit a destination code, the member
replaces the current contents of the active AWS.)

The destination codes are:

B Copy to the bottom of the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.
T Copy to the top of the active AWS.
The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple library members from a
Selection List.
Library: Copying Through a Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ

C XYZ.BEGINJCL B JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =
C XYZ.COBTEST1 T Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR =
XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR =
XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N
C XYZ.MYRPF T RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR N
U V

34.3 Delete a Member

You can use a primary command, the Delete Function panel (from the Library Facility
menu) or the Selection List to delete a member.
Notes:
■ If you delete a member and then determine that you need it, contact your site
management. As long as the member has been saved on a library system backup,
it can be restored.
■ When deleting a member through the Delete Function panel or the Selection List,
you have the option of requesting that a Delete Confirmation panel be displayed.
You can control this option using the ATTACH LIB command or the Library
Facility menu.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel is
displayed. This panel contains the name of each member you marked for
deletion. You must confirm this operation before it is performed.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data members are
deleted when you press the ENTER key.
See 34.3.4, “Delete Confirmation Panel” on page 34-14 for additional information.

You can use the DELETE command to delete a member, as in:
DELETE JUNK


Type the D function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY
command to display the Delete Function panel.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to delete the member
named JUNK.
Library: Deleting Through the Menu
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
DELETE LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> JUNK

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform.
The codes are:
S Delete the designated member.
M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, the
Selection List will contain all members associated with that
prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes
wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual who
owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is
inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the name of the member to be deleted. (Required only if the
displayed name is inappropriate.)


If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only operation
you can perform is a delete. If the Selection List is not produced through the Delete
Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection
List.
As illustrated in the following example, you can delete one or more members by
typing a D before each appropriate member name.
Library: Deleting through a Selection List
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
D XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6

D XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR NOSEQ

34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel

You can use the ATTACH LIB command or the Library Facility menu to designate
whether delete confirmation is required.
The following example illustrates the confirmation panel that might be displayed when
CONFIRM DELETE is in effect and you attempt to delete one or more members
through a Selection List.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
MEMBER CREATED UPDATED ACCESS DESCRIPTION
COBTEST1 =6/=4/87 11/=9/88 11/=9/88 Sample COBOL Prog.
JUNK 12/=1/85 =6/=6/86 =6/=6/86
To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering any other
value in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to the Delete
Function panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of that Selection List
will contain *DENYDEL.)
If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is displayed, the
operation is either terminated or paused. If the command is:
■ Related to the Library Facility (for example, SELECT MENU): the operation is
terminated and the action is performed.
■ Not related to the Library Facility (for example, ATTACH DSN): the operation is
paused. The panel is redisplayed when the Library Facility is reattached, allowing
you to complete the operation.

34.4 Inquiring About a Member

You can obtain detailed information about a library member by issuing the INFO
command, as in:
INFO LIB COBTEST1
or, specifying the I function code and member name on the Library Facility menu, as
in the following example.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
PREFIX ===> XYZ

or, specifying the I function code on the Selection List, as in the following example.
Library: Inquiring Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ
I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6
The following example illustrates the type of information displayed.

Library: Member Information Display
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY MEMBER INFORMATION
PREFIX ===> XYZ

LAST ACCESS ===> 11/=4/88

LAST UPDATE ===> =5/29/87
CREATION ===> =5/23/86
RECORD COUNT ===> 193
BLOCK COUNT ===> 3
ATTRIBUTE ===> SHR
SEQUENCE ===> ==1,6
DESCRIPTION ===> Sample COBOL Prog.
U V
The member information includes:
PREFIX Prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member.
NAME Name of the library member.
LAST ACCESS Date the member was last accessed.
LAST UPDATE Data the member was last updated.
CREATION Date the member was created.
RECORD COUNT Number of lines in the member.
BLOCK COUNT Number of library blocks used by the member.
ATTRIBUTE Member's access attribute.
SEQUENCE Member's sequence number attribute.
DESCRIPTION Member's description, if available.
The last three fields are unprotected. See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on
page 34-2 for information about changing these fields.

34.5 Printing a Library Member

You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Library Facility
menu) or the Selection List to print all or part of a member or Selection List at a
system or 328x-type printer.
When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains the
printing location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe.
Once scheduled, all references to a specific print request must be by its tag or number.

To print all of the currently attached member or Selection List, enter:
PRINT LIB
All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing attached data.
For example, to print only lines 500 through 2500 of the currently attached data, you
would enter:
PRINT LIB 5== 25==
While Selection Lists do not include line numbers, you can treat them as though they
are numbered from 1 by 1.
Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the PRINT
command and how requests can be monitored and controlled.

When you specify the P function code on the Library Facility menu or with the
LIBRARY command, the Print Function panel is displayed.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to print a copy of the
member named MYPROG.

Library: Printing a Member
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6...
PRINT LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> MYPROG
1ST LINE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY ===>

TAG NAME ===> SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN ===> NO
DEST ===> PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS ===> =
PAGE WIDTH ===> PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS ===> YES
TYPE/FORMAT ===> DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN ===>
1ST COL ===> 1 LAST COL ===> 32767
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

U V
S Print a single member.
Selection List will contain all members associated with
that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that
includes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is
displayed.)
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual
who owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is
inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the member name. (Required only if the displayed name is
inappropriate.)
You can use the following fields to customize the print operation.
1ST LINE Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is to
begin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be included in the print
operation. If omitted, the end of the member/Selection List is
assumed.
While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat them as
though they are numbered from 1 by 1.

NOTIFY Designate whether you want an RPS notification message

displayed when this data are printed by specifying either:
YES Display notification message.
NO Do not display message.
If omitted, the site-defined value is used. Site management has
the option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY.
TAG NAME Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The name
cannot exceed eight characters, must start with an alphabetic
character and be bound by apostrophes (').
SEPARATOR Designate whether separators are required by specifying either:
YES Separators are required.
NO Separators are not required.
The default is site-defined.
FORCEALIGN Designate whether physical page alignment is required by
specifying either:
YES Physical page alignment is to be forced (for
example, there is to be a page eject for each
separator and body page).
NO Physical page alignment is not required.
If omitted, the site-defined value is used.
DEST Enter the name of the printing location where the request is to
print. Use this operand to override the current printing location
for this execution.
COPIES Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed. The
maximum number is a site-defined value between 1 and 255.
The default is 1 copy.
CLASS Enter the print class to be used at the location where the request
is to print. (Site management will tell you which classes are
valid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for system
printers.)
PAGE WIDTH Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a numeric
value between 0 and 255. The default is site-defined.
PAGE LEN Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as a
numeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the hardware
capability to set page length, the number must be the same
length as specified to the printer. The default is site-defined.
SEQ NUMBRS Designate whether sequence numbers are to be printed by
specifying either:
YES Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.

NO Designates that sequence numbers are not to be

printed.
If omitted, the default is YES.
TYPE/FORMAT Designate the format of the output by specifying either:
DEF (Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.
ANS ANSI print control characters are recognized.
MCC Machine printer control characters are recognized.
DUMP Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data and
CHEX Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal data
to the right of the line.
VHEX Format each line in character data with hexadecimal
data shown vertically below.
TOP MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank
lines to be skipped from the top of the page before printing
begins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.
BOT MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank
lines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v may be 0
through 99. The default is site-defined.
1ST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to start.
The value must be between 1 and the maximum length of the
line. If omitted, the default is 1.
LAST COL Number of the column at which the print operation is to stop.
The value must be greater than the starting column and not
exceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the maximum line
length is assumed. (The maximum line length of a library
member is 255.)


If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can only
perform a print operation. Otherwise, you can perform any of the functions that are
valid with that Selection List.
To print one or more members, type a P before the name of each member. By default,
the request will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal you are using.
To print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and enter the appropriate
destination name.
The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from the
Selection List.
7 >
8
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1
P XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR

XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR
P XYZ.COBTEST2 PR99 4=3 SHR
In this example, the member BEGINJCL will print at the terminal's default printing
location. The member COBTEST2 will print at the location identified as PR99.

34.6 Renaming Library Members

To change the names of one or more library members, you can use a primary
command, the Library Facility menu or the Selection List.

You can use the RENAME command to change the name of a library member. For
example, to change the member name from TESTJCL to PRODJCL, you would enter:
RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL
Optionally, you can also change the description or attributes of the member, as in:
RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL /Production JCL/ SHARED SEQ
See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2 for additional information.

Function Panel If you specify an R function code on the Library Facility menu or with
the LIBRARY command, the Rename Function panel is displayed.
Library: Renaming Through a Function Panel
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
RENAME LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> ABC

NAME ===> TESTJCL
NEW PREFIX ===> ABC

NEW MEMBER ===> PRODJCL
M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S - RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

U V
This example illustrates how you can use this panel to change a member name from
TESTJCL to PRODJCL.
The fields comprising the panel include:

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired action. The
codes are:
S Rename a single member.
Selection List will contain all members associated with that
prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes
wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual
who owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is
inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the member's current name. (Required only if the displayed
name is inappropriate.)
NEW PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual
who owns the member. (Site management may allow users to
rename members belonging other users.)
NEW NAME Enter the new member name. The name must comply with the
CA-Roscoe member naming conventions and must not currently
exist in your library.

If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function Panel, the only
operation you can perform is a rename. If the Selection List is not produced through
the Rename Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with
the Selection List.
To rename one or more members, use the R function code and type the member name
in the STATUS field. (When the Selection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field will
contain *RENAMED - confirming the operation performed successfully.)
Library: Renaming Through a Selection List
7 8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS LINES
SMITH 352 = 971 5=984
XYZ.A 1 SHR N
XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =
XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR =
R XYZ.COBTEST2 INVREPT 4=3 SHR =
XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N
XYZ.MYRPF RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR N


Part VI. Additional Facilities
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.1.1 What can you do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-3
35.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-5
35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-6
35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-8
35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-11
35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-16
35.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
35.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-18
35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-21
35.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-22
35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-24
35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-25
35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-27
35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface . . . . 35-28
Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3
38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
38.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-8
38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-9
38.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-10
Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System
The BulletinBoard System is an online message system, established to support the

interchange of technical information between CA-Roscoe users.
The facilities provided with BulletinBoard System can be used by all CA-Roscoe
users, and can be performed in conjunction with other CA-Roscoe activities.
You can use the BulletinBoard System to:

■ view general news announcements that are broadcast by your site,
■ view posted message threads and any thread entries they contain,
■ create new threads,
■ add entries(replys) to existing threads,
■ send messages to other CA-Roscoe users.
The BulletinBoard System follows CUA standards. It is a mode dependent system, so

you must move from one mode to another to perform each task. All tasks associated
with a BulletinBoard component are PF-key functions, and are listed on the bottom of
each screen.
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session
35.1 Beginning a Session

To begin a BulletinBoard System session, enter: pfx.BBSX.
where:
pfx is the prefix of the profile containing the panels and programs comprising
this facility. The default is RBX.
This is the distributed RPF program that invokes the BulletinBoard System.
At initial sign-on, the BBS (BulletinBoard System) News Announcement screen will
be presented. After you view this screen, it will not be presented again unless you
specifically request it (using PF2/14 for NEWS or through UTILITY.) If any new
announcements are posted, this screen will be presented automatically at your next
sign-on.
35.1.1 What can you do?

After viewing the announcements, press ENTER, and you will be placed into the
Message Selection List. This screen contains all existing message threads. From here,
you can view any message, create a new message thread, or send another CA-Roscoe
user a message.
Note: Sending another CA-Roscoe user a message makes use of the CA-Roscoe
SEND command. The message goes only to the specified user (or ID) and
does not get posted on the BulletinBoard system.
All tasks available in each mode are PF-key functions and are displayed at the bottom
of each screen. To send a message or perform any function, use the corresponding
PF-key. Some screens have functions which are specific to one task only. Many
screens have the same PF-key options. This means that a particular PF-key number
may have several different functions, changing from screen to screen, according to the
mode level. If a PF-key is blank, it has no function.
The following PF-keys have the same function on every screen (or are disabled):
PF7/19 Backward Scrolls the display backward, toward the top of the member.
PF8/20 Forward Scrolls the display forward, toward the bottom of the member.
PF10/22 Top Makes the base entry for the thread the first line of the screen.
PF11/23 Bottom Displays the bottom of the message text.
And on every screen except the one that is used to create a thread title,
PF3/15 Exit Returns to the previous mode level. (On the "create a thread title"
screen, PF3/15 CANCEL cancels the thread that was just created.)

35.2 Message Selection List

The Message Selection List is the first screen you will see once you have signed on
and viewed the BBS News Announcement screen.
Message Selection list
7 8
-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Thread Titles
New Message Thread Entry-2 ZZB New Message Thread Entry-1 ZZC
No Threads------------------ ZZD
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Lastread 5 Firstnew 6 Addmsg
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg
U V
The top line, containing hyphens, is the Error/Status line. It contains the current
processing RPF ID. In this case, it will be BBS, for BulletinBoard System. Any
messages returned from BBS will appear on this line.
The portion of the screen just below the Error/Status line contains the titles of all
message threads. A thread is a series of one or more related messages. The threads,
as listed here, are the initial message topics. All related responses are threaded to this
message entry.
Each thread can contain 999 messages. All threads have prefix codes, beginning with
ZZZ, through AAA. Each new thread is given a corresponding code. This can be
used as a quick reference, to associate the thread by code instead of its title. This
code will be the prefix of all of the thread's entries.

By default, the threads that have not been viewed will be in high intensity. If you
have already viewed the thread and all of its corresponding messages, the thread will
be in low intensity.
Note: The threads are highlighted following CA-Roscoe standard panel attribute
coding. The Utility function (PF1/13) allows the changing of these thread
attributes. By default, unread threads and messages are unprotected and high
intensity (UH), and the threads and messages that have been read are
unprotected and low (normal) intensity (UL).
All of the possible tasks a user can perform from the Message Selection list are listed
at the bottom of the screen as PF-key functions. The PF-keys that are specific to this
screen are:
PF1/13 Utility Brings up the BulletinBoard Utility menu from which options may
be set, messages and threads can be printed, the News can be
viewed, or the user profile can be condensed.
PF2/14 Ignore! Marks a selected thread in low (normal) intensity, as if it was
read. If there are any new entries added, they will not be marked
by high intensity. No entries will be highlighted, so the entire
thread can be "ignored."
If Ignore! is already active, PF2 will deactivate Ignore!
PF4/16 Lastread Brings up the last message you read.
PF5/17 Firstnew Brings up the first new message you have not read. (NEW
denotes not yet viewed).
PF6/18 Addmsg Adds a thread or a message to a thread, using the AddMsg panel.
PF9/21 Refresh Refreshes the screen with any new information.
PF12/24 Zmsg Sends another CA-Roscoe user a message, using the Zmsg panel.
Many of these functions are duplicated throughout BBS.

35.3 Viewing a Thread

To view any of the threads listed on the Message Selection list, place the cursor in the
field containing the thread title and press ENTER. This is the same as using the
function PF5 FIRSTNEW, if you have not previously viewed a message in that thread.
This will take you to the screen containing all messages composing the thread. The
Message Thread Selection List is shown below.
Message Thread Selection list
7 -- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
8
New Message Thread Entry-1 Prefix:
New Message Thread Entry-1 === This will be entry #1 =>ZZC ==1
This will be entry #2 =>ZZC ==2 This will be entry #3 =>ZZC ==3
This will be entry #8 =>ZZC ==8
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevnew 5 Nextnew 6 Addmsg
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg
U V
The first line following the error/status line is the title of the thread you selected from
the previous screen. The prefix of that thread is on the far right of the same line.
The title is also the first thread of the list, and will have the code 000. Each
subsequent entry is given a code incremented by one. This code is added to the prefix
to create a member name for the thread entry. Each thread entry can be associated by
its member name, and its title.
This screen also has PF-key functions listed on the bottom. The PF-keys specific to
this screen are:
PF4/16 Prevnew Displays the first new message that precedes the thread you are
currently displaying. (NEW is the same as not yet viewed.)

PF5/17 Nextnew Displays the next new message that follows the thread you are
currently displaying.
Note: If there are no new (unviewed) messages within that
thread, Prevnew and Nextnew will not execute. You
should receive a message on the Error/Staus line that will
tell you there are "no new messages that way," (where
that way will either be before the message - Prev, or
following the message- Next). Use Enter to view the
message.
35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry

To view one of the listed thread entries, place your cursor on the desired entry and
press ENTER. The following panel displays the text of the selected thread.
A Message Thread Entry
7 -- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
8
Title: This will be entry #7 =>ZZC LAST Name: ZZC==7 Date&co
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL
Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.2=.27
This will be message number 7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevmsg 5 Nextmsg 6 Addmsg
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg
U V
The fields of this panel are:
Error/Status line This is the line of hyphens at the top. It contains the
mode BBS on the left. Any messages issued by
BBS will be displayed on the right.
Title This is the thread title that appeared on the previous
screen.

Conditional data field

The field to the right of the title will contain conditional data.
This data can be FIRST, LAST, or ONLY. If the thread entry
you are viewing is the first, last, or only thread entry, the
corresponding word will be displayed. If the entry is not one of
the above items, this field will be blank. Note that on the screen
above, the word LAST is in this field. This thread entry is the
last entry under the thread ZZC.
Name field This field contains the member name of the thread entry you are
viewing, made up of the prefix and thread code. You can
associate each thread entry by name.
Date This is the date the member was created.
Entry Text The thread entry text follows the second line of hyphens. The
text consists of:
■ the ID and key that created the message, listed in the From
field,
■ the date and time the message was created, and
■ the message.
The PF-key functions specific to this screen are the same as the previous screen,
except for PF4, PF5, and PF9:
PF4/16 Prevmsg Displays the thread entry that precedes the currently displayed
entry.
PF5/17 Nextmsg Continues to the next sequential message.
PF9/21 Is not used.

35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry

Note: Only users having Library Administration privileges may create or update
threads.
You can add a new thread to the Message Selection List or a new thread entry to an
existing thread from any screen that has PF6/18 Addmsg.
With the cursor on any thread or entry, press PF6/18. You will be placed in the Reply
mode; the error/status line will have Reply in the left corner.
Create a New Thread -- Insert Mode
7 -- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------
8
New Message Thread Entry-2
Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.==.=4
This will be a new message number 2
Insert Mode 7 lines

Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
--- Q
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg
U V
As shown in the above panel, Reply is a split screen mode. The top half of the screen
displays the thread or entry your cursor was on (when you press PF6/18). This part of
the screen is protected. It contains:
■ the original thread or message title,
■ the CA-Roscoe ID and key the message was sent from,
■ the date the original thread or message was created,
■ the time the original thread or message was created,
■ the original thread or message text.
The bottom half of the screen is in the Insert mode, and is open for entering text.
There is a sequence line number at the top of the insert area. It is much like the
sequence line number in your CA-Roscoe Edit session. All of the parameters you
have set for CA-Roscoe editing are propagated in the BBS Editor session (that is, tab
settings and the tab character).

The line just above the sequence line number will display the Insert Mode, and the
number of lines that are available for entering data. To the left of the insert area is the
sequence number field and a one character command area. This single character field
will contain asterisks when you are in the insert mode. Once you press ENTER or a
PF-key, you will be in the Edit mode, and this field will contain a period that is
Unprotected Low-intensity.
Enter the text of the message you want to create. You can then edit the message
either by typing over the existing text of the message, or by issuing line commands in
the single character command area. There are two edit commands that can be used in
this field:
d deletes any line it is placed next to.
i opens the lower portion of the screen to the insert mode, just after the line
on which it was entered.
Create a New Thread -- Edit Mode
7 -- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------
8
New Message Thread Entry-2
Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬
==1 . This is the message text.
==2 . It can be any message.
==3 . It can be as long as you want.
==4 . End of message.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6
U V
After you have completed entering the text, you can select one of the commands listed
at the bottom of the Reply screen. The functions specific to this screen are:
PF1/13 Help Invokes the Help facility.
PF2/14 CopyMem Copies a member you specify into the message text.
PF4/16 Bwd (Top) Scrolls the top half of the screen backward one screen.
PF5/17 Fwd (Top) Scrolls the top half of the screen forward one screen.

If you do not want to use any of the functions, and the thread or message text is
complete, Exit from the Reply panel using PF3/15. This will take you to a screen that
has only one open field. This is the thread title panel of the BBS.
Enter the title of your thread or message. The title field will accept up to 30
characters.
Create a Thread Title
7 8
-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Thread Prefix: ZZB - title: New Message Thread Entry-2

Message title: New Message Thread Entry-2
Your message title: <
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 2 NewThread 3 Cancel 4 5 6 EditAgain
7 8 9 1= 11 12
U V
There are only four functions you can perform from this screen.
1. If you created a new thread, use PF2/14 NewThread. This will add your thread to
the Message Selection list, under the title you issue on this screen.
2. If you do not want to add a thread or message at this time, you can use PF3/15
Cancel, and cancel the entire message. You will return to the panel you were on
before using PF6/18 Addmsg.
3. If you want to go back to the message text and edit it, use PF6/18 EditAgain.
You will return to the Reply panel, and will be in Edit Mode.
4. If you want to create the thread or message that will be added to an existing
thread, press ENTER. This will add your thread or message, and you will return
to the panel you were at when you selected PF6/18 Addmsg.

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

The BulletinBoard System includes a Utilities panel that provides access to basic
BulletinBoard functions, such as:
■ setting session specific options.
■ redisplaying the BBS News Announcements.
■ printing an entire thread (thread and all entries).
■ printing a single message entry.
■ pruning (or condensing) your profile.
Each utility is described further on the following pages.

35.5.1 The Utility Screen

The BulletinBoard utilities are listed in a menu format. To display this menu, press
PF1/13 UTILITY from any BBS mode screen. To select a Utility, place the cursor on
that utility and press ENTER.
The Utility Menu
7 8
-- BBS ----------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit
Current message: ZZB=== - New Message Thread Entry
Place the cursor on the desired utility and press ENTER.
Set Options Show News Prune Profile Print Message

Print Thread
Note: The BBS index data are NOT refreshed after any of these functions.
U V
The Utility display has several fields:
Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. It will
contain any messages issued by Utility.
Current message: This is the thread entry you were viewing or pointing to when you
entered the Utility panel. The display will contain the member
name of the message (thread prefix + code), and the message title.
Utilities The five BBS utilities:
1. Set Options
2. Show News
3. Prune Profile
4. Print Message
5. Print Thread

35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options

To set up BulletinBoard parameters that will be specific to your session, select the first
Utility option: Set Options. This will place you in the BBSOpt mode. The BBSOpt
panel ( shown below) contains seven BBS options. The default values are initially
listed. As noted on the panel, entering a null field will restore the default values.
The parameter values you set will be saved from one BulletinBoard session to the
next. They will remain in effect until you change them again.
BBS Options Panel
7 8
-- BBSOpt -------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit
Save AWS on entry (Y/N)? Y
Saved AWS name prefix: BBSAWS Panel member name prefix: ZZZZZP
Unread messages attribute: UH Read messages attribute: UL
ROSCOE printer name: DEFAULT. Message editor: BBM.REX.....
Note: Enter a null field to restore the default values.
U V
The BBSOpt fields are:
■ Save AWS on entry(Y/N)?
Before entering the BBS, the AWS can be saved so that you can resume
processing when you exit. This is important if you do not want to lose the data
in your active AWS. The default is set to 'Y', to save the AWS.
■ Saved AWS name prefix:
This is a prefix you can give to the saved AWS that was saved on entry to the
BBS. You can give the AWS a six-character prefix so you will know it was
created by BBS. The default prefix is BBSAWS.

■ Unread messages attribute:

All threads and thread entries you have not read will have a high intensity setting.
This allows you to easily select those entries you have not seen. The default
attribute for unread messages is UH. This will make all unread messages
Unprotected and Highlighted.
■ Read message attribute:
All threads and thread entries that you have read will be highlighted according to
this setting. This helps you to identify the messages you have already viewed.
The default attribute for read messages is UL. This makes all messages you have
read Unprotected and Low (normal) Intensity.
Note: The attributes follow CA-Roscoe standard panel attribute coding.
BBSOpts accepts the following attributes:
UH Unprotected, High Intensity
UL Unprotected, Low (normal) Intensity
SH Skip protected, High Intensity
SL Skip protected, Low Intensity
BBS will accept the same attribute for both read and unread messages.
■ CA-Roscoe printer name:
Specify the name of the printer that you want to print all requested threads and
entries. The default will be set by your site.

35.5.3 View News Announcements

The BBS News Announcement screen allows a site to broadcast news and information
to all BulletinBoard System users. It can contain whatever data your site chooses to
be relevant to BBS users.
The BBS News panel is displayed to you the very first time you sign onto the
BulletinBoard System. You will not be presented with the announcements again
unless you specifically request it or new announcements are posted. When this
information is updated, you will be presented with the BBS News screen when you
sign-on BBS.
There may be times when you need to refer to this information again. The Show
News utility will allow you to specifically request to view the announcements.
You can redisplay the BBS News Announcement panel from the Utility Option menu.
The field Show News will place you in the ZAnn mode. This is the Announcement
mode. The screen will contain all current BBS news and information that is posted by
your site. Shown below is a sample of the information that a site can 'Broadcast.'
BBS News Announcements -- Show News
7 8
-- ZAnn ----------------------------------------------------------------------
more =>
Current BBS News
============== S T A R T O F A N N O U N C E M E N T S =============
91/=6/27 - This BulletinBoard System System has been established

to support interchange of technical information within
the L1== Technical Group.
You may view messages on the bulletin board, add messages

to existing threads, and create new threads.
===> You will not be presented with this 'news' again unless
you request it or it changes.
Now, PRESS PF3 to Exit this 'news' and enter the Bulletin
Board System.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 5 6
U V

35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile

A BBS session can accumulate too much data and it may be necessary to clean up a
profile. All information stored in your BBS profile will be revised to include only the
last thread viewed and the date of the last News Announcement. The Utility to do this
is Prune Profile. No user input is required; just select Prune Profile, and you will
receive the message:
PRUNING IN PROGRESS
on the Error/Status line, on the right side. After BBS has finished the Pruning
function, you will remain in the initial BBS Utility menu panel.
| Note: Pruning deletes all but the last viewed thread entry.
| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread

To delete specific unwanted threads, you must manually delete the thread numbers
from the BBS library.

35.5.6 Print a Message

To print one of the message entries listed on the BBS, select the Print Message
Utility. The message entry your cursor was on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY will
be the Current message. The Current message field must contain the member name
and title of the message you want to print. If this member is incorrect, EXIT the
Utility screen and select the correct message entry.
The Print Message Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, and will display the screen
shown in the panel below.
Print a Thread Entry
7 8
-- DoPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------
Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB===..
------------------------------------------------------------------ Line 1 of 9
=================================== T O P ====================================
--------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2

================================ B O T T O M =================================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6
U V
The Print Message screen contains the following fields:
Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. The mode
on the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the line will display any
messages issued by DoPrint.
Destination: The destination output is sent to. If this is blank, the default set with
the Set Options utility will be used.
PRINT Tag The name that will identify the printed output.
Message text The text of the message you want to print will be displayed in the
bottom portion of this screen. The first line of the message will
contain its title.
To print the message, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and press
PF4/16 PRINT. You will receive a response on right side of the Error/Status line that
will tell you if the print request was successful.

35.5.7 Print a Thread

You can print an entire thread; this includes the thread and all of its entries. To do
this, invoke the last utility on the menu, Print Thread. The thread your cursor was
on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY will be selected. Or, if you are viewing only a
message entry, the thread that the entry is listed under will be selected for printing.
The Print Thread Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, shown in the following panel.
Print Entire Thread
7 8
-- DoPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------
more =>
Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB.....
----------------------------------------------------------------- Line 1 of 36
=================================== T O P ====================================
Thread title: New Message Thread Entry-2
--------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2
-------------------------------------------- This will be entry #1 =>ZZB
Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.19.36
Add this the zzc Thread
-------------------------------------------- This will be entry #2 =>ZZB
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6
U V
The Print Thread screen contains the following fields:
Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. The
mode on the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the line will
display any messages issued by DoPrint.
Destination: The printer destination the output will be sent to. If this is blank,
the default set with the Set Options utility will be used.

PRINT Tag The name that will identify the printed output. The thread prefix
code will be the first three characters.
<= more => This field will be displayed if the threads comprise more that one
screen.
Thread entries The rest of the display will contain the thread and all the thread
entries comprising it. Each thread will be separated by a line of
hyphens; the thread entry title will be on the right side and the
thread it defines will be below.
To print the thread, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and press
PF4/16 PRINT. You will receive a response on right side of the Error/Status line telling
you if the print request was successful.

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities
35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User

The CA-Roscoe/BulletinBoard contains a feature that allows you to send messages to
other CA-Roscoe users, and still remain in your BulletinBoard session. These
messages are like any other CA-Roscoe SEND messages. This is done through the
ZMsg Mode. ZMsg functions include:
■ Sending and/or receiving one-line messages to and from other CA-Roscoe users.
■ Viewing all of the messages in your ZZZZZMSG member.
■ Viewing an account of all of the messages you have sent.
■ Deleting all ZZZZZMSG messages; clearing this file allows you to keep daily,
weekly, etc., accounts of messages sent and received.
■ Checking to see if another CA-Roscoe user is signed on, and what command they
last executed.
Note: To inquire about another CA-Roscoe user requires that the CA-Roscoe/
CA-SysView interface be active.

35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions

ZMsg is a facility that allows you to carry on a conversation with one or more
CA-Roscoe users. The ZMsg panel displays the current contents of your ZZZZZMSG
member in a full-screen environment. It also records any messages you send to other
users and puts them in the same member as your messages. This gives you a
complete record of the conversation(s) you have. Because the display is your
ZZZZZMSG member, you can receive all of your CA-Roscoe console messages to this
same member.
To view all messages in your ZZZZZMSG member, or to send another CA-Roscoe

user a message while you are in the BulletinBoard System, use the following function:
PF12/24 ZMSG.
This function is listed on all screens, in all modes (except when already within the
ZMsg mode), and is always PF12/24. Issuing the ZMsg command will place you in
the ZMsg mode.
Some other information regarding ZMsg:

■ ZMsg requires a screen which contains at least 13 lines.
■ Sending another CA-Roscoe user a message through ZMsg makes use of the
CA-Roscoe SEND command. The message(s) you send does not get posted on
the BulletinBoard, but goes only to the CA-Roscoe prefix or ID you specify.
■ The first time you enter ZMsg mode, you will be presented with the latest ZMsg
News Announcements. After you view this screen, press ENTER to continue to
your messages. This announcement screen will not be presented to you again,
unless you specifically request it (using PF2/14 News). If any new ZMsg
announcements are posted, this screen will be issued the next time you enter the
ZMsg mode.
■ ZMsg will run in split screen mode; you may keep it active in one screen while
you work in another.
■ If you have suppression set, it is possible (but not likely) that you will miss a
message between the time you press PF3/15/CLEAR to exit ZMsg and the time
ZMsg restores your original SEND option.

35.6.3 ZMsg Function

The ZMsg Mode Screen
7 -- ZMsg ------------------------------------------------------------- 11.14.44

8
Enter prefix: or key:
Message:
GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1
=================================== T O P ==================================
JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST =====3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3
================================ B O T T O M ===============================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh
U V
The ZMsg display shown above has several fields:
Error/Status The first line of hyphens at the top. If you request an invalid
function, ZMsg will issue a highlighted error message in this
field. Otherwise, the field will contain the time the screen was
last updated.
Prefix/Key Enter the 2- or 3- character CA-Roscoe prefix, or the CA-Roscoe
key of the user to which you are sending a message. If you
enter data in both fields, only the prefix is used. ZMsg then
checks that a valid prefix or key was entered. If it is invalid,
you will be notified in the Error/Status line.
<= more => This field and its arrows are displayed when there are more
messages to be viewed, but do not fit on the screen. If '<=' is
shown, press PF7/19 to scroll backward to view more messages.
If '=>' is shown, press PF8/20 to scroll forward.
Message The line on which you enter the text of the message to be sent to
another CA-Roscoe user.

Options This is the second line of hyphens. It has two fields:

1. on the far left: GetMsgs active and/or Suppress active
2. on the far right: COLUMN N.
GetMsgs active Indicates that the GetMsgs processing is
active. The contents of ZZZZZMSG are
processed to make them easier to read. If
GetMsgs is not active, the message text will
not be modified.
Suppress active Indicates the Suppress (CA-Roscoe message)
processing is active. This will prevent any
messages you receive, while in ZMsg, from
being redisplayed to you when you exit the
BBS.
Note: The function PF9/21 SETOPTS will
allow you to set GetMsgs and
Suppress on or off.
Column n The columns to be displayed on the screen.
This number will be either 1 to display
columns 1 through 40, or 40 to display
columns 40 through 80.
The displayed columns can be changed using
the SWAP function (PF9/21).
The current messages
This area contains all of the messages you sent, received, and
those which are in your ZZZZZMSG member. They are
surrounded by the TOP and BOTTOM file markers.

35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg

When you invoke ZMsg, you are presented with all of the messages currently in your
ZZZZZMSG member. This message display is updated every time you press ENTER
or a PF-key. The time posted in the left corner of the Status/Error line will contain
the time of the last screen update.
If you want to begin your ZMsg message communications with a clear message
display, use PF5/17 Delete. This will delete all messages contained in the display (the
ZZZZZMSG member).
About the messages:

■ If GetMsgs processing is not active, the contents are shown exactly as they appear
in the member. The newest messages are displayed first.
■ If GetMsgs is in effect, messages are shown in chronological order, with the
oldest shown first.
■ You can distinguish which messages you received from those you sent by the
character notation that precedes the message, as well as the highlighting of the
message.
– The messages you send have a low intensity attribute setting (default) and are
denoted by the following characters: *>> . These characters are directly
followed by the prefix of the recipient, and then the message text. For
example, if you send a message to the prefix USR, you will see the following
in your ZMsg member:
*>>USR : THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.
If GetMsgs is not active, the date, time, and your key will be on the line
directly above the message(the message will be in ZZZZZMSG format):
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS MYKEY
(*>>USR) THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.
– The messages you receive are highlighted, and contain the first eight
characters of the sender's CA-Roscoe key, followed by the message text (and
the date and time if GetMsgs is inactive.)

35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User

To send a one-line message to another CA-Roscoe user, fill in the ZMsg fields. Enter
the CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the message to. If the
key or prefix does not exist, you will receive an error message on the Error/Status line.
Enter the message text in the Message field.
To send the message, press ENTER. The message will be sent, and your message
field will be immediately updated to include this information. The following panel
displays this activity.
Message Sent Results
7 8
-- ZMsg ----------------------------------------------- Message sent to pfx=ro
Enter prefix: RO or key:

Message: send this message to myself
GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1
=================================== T O P ==================================
JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST =====3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3
ROSCOE.C: send this message to myself
Q>>RO : send this message to myself
================================ B O T T O M ===============================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh
U V
You can see that the Status line on the top of the screen tells you that the message was
sent, and to what prefix. Because GetMsgs is active, you see only the message and
key or prefix. Notice that the new messages are added after the existing message from
the Console. In this example, the user sent a message to himself, so the display
contains both messages sent and received.
From this ZMsg panel, you can also choose any of the PF-key functions listed on the
bottom. The following functions are specific to this ZMsg screen:
PF1/13 Help Displays Help for ZMsg.
PF2/14 News Displays the current News Announcements specific to the ZMsg
mode.
PF4/16 Swap Switches text display from column 1 to 40, and back.

PF5/17 Delete Deletes your ZZZZZMSG member.

PF6/18 FindUser Checks if a specified CA-Roscoe user is signed on.
PF9/21 SetOpts Invokes ZMsgOpts, to set up specific ZMsg options.
PF12/24 Refresh Updates the display.
ENTER Sends a message to a specified user.
CLEAR Exits ZMsg.

35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options

You can set up your ZMsg environment to support your processing needs or
preferences. Use PF9/21 SETOPTS, to display the ZMsgOpts panel.
ZMsg Options Panel
7 8
-- ZMsgOpts ------------------------------------------------------ PF3 to exit
Suppress ROSCOE messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N): N

GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N): Y
Save AWS on entry to ZMsg for ROSCOE 5.6 and lower (Y/N)? N
U V
The above panel shows the ZMsg options:
1. Suppress CA-Roscoe messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N):
This controls whether you receive all of the messages that were sent to you while
you were in the BBS. If this is set to 'Y', or YES, the words "Suppress active"
will appear on the right side of the Options line. When Suppress is active, a
CA-Roscoe SET SEND OPR command is issued. This command permits only those
messages sent by the operator to be displayed at your terminal, and therefore
suppresses all other messages. When you exit the BBS, you will not receive the
CA-Roscoe messages you already viewed in the ZMsg member.
If it is set to 'N', all CA-Roscoe messages will be redisplayed on the Response
line, one at a time, after you exit the BBS.
2. GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N):
This controls how the ZMsg member is displayed. When this is set to 'Y'(default),
the words "GetMsgs active" will appear on the right side of the Options line. The
contents of ZZZZZMSG are processed to make them easier to read. The message
text will only contain the key you sent the message to or received the message
from, a colon, and the message text. If GetMsgs is not active, the message text
will not be modified. It will contain the time and date, and will be in the original
ZZZZZMSG format.
Note: When GetMsgs is active, ZMsg will be slower, especially if there are
many messages.

35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface

If the CA-SysView interface for CA-Roscoe is active at your site, you can check if
another CA-Roscoe user is signed on. From any of the ZMsg panels, press PF6/18
FindUser. This will display the FindUser mode. Enter the CA-Roscoe prefix or key
for the user. You will receive the information shown in the following panel/
Find User Information
7 8
-- FindUser ------------------------------------------------------------------
Enter the prefix: djh or the key:
Job name Status Time S Last command, if any

-------- ------------------------- - --------------------
ROSCOE1 TERM IO WAIT ==:==:=8.86 1 A L+ (COMM)
ROSCOE2 DSN SUBTASK ==:==:=3.31 1 A D ROSCOE.+ (COMM)
ROSCOE3 TERM IO WAIT ==:=1:57.64 1 i b (COMM)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 5 6
U V
The information provided through FindUser is the same as the data you receive when
you issue the following command.
LOO D ROS ST Key(or PFx)=Id
All other functions that can be executed from this panel have been previously
described.

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2
CA-Roscoe supports the IBM program product DATABASE2 (DB2). This means that
you can execute the DB2 Command Processor. (This is controlled by site management.
See your site management to determine if this facility is available and how you can
execute the DB2 Command Processor.)
The option CA-Roscoe/DB2 may also be available at your site. It provides facilities
that can be used by application developers and data base administrators for the creation
of DB2 applications and objects. With this interface, these DB2 activities can be
performed during your CA-Roscoe session with other CA-Roscoe activities.
DB2: Sample Menu
7 ROSCOE TO DB2
8
1. ROSCOE USING SQL TERMINAL INPUT (RUSTI)
2. SOURCE LANGUAGE DECLARES (DECLGEN)
3. CREATE APPLICATION PLAN (BIND)
4. REPLACE APPLICATION PLAN (REBIND)
5. REMOVE APPLICATION PLAN (FREE)
6. ISSUE DB2 COMMANDS (CMNDS)
7. EXECUTE PROGRAM UNDER ETSO (RUN)
DESIRED FUNCTION ===> _ DB2 SYSTEM ===> ____
<CLEAR> PFK3
REFRESH EXIT
U V
As illustrated by this sample menu, you can use this facility to execute the following
DB2 services:
■ Dynamic SQL Execution:
SQL statements entered into the active AWS or saved in a CA-Roscoe library
member can be executed and the results displayed at the terminal.
Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 36-1

■ High-Level Language Structure Definition:
COBOL, COBOL2, C or PLI language structures and SQL table declares can be
created from existing DB2 table or view definitions.
■ Application Plan Services:
Data Base Request Modules (DBRM) created through the DB2 pre-compiler can
be bound to create an application plan. Application plans can also be replaced
and removed.
■ DB2 Command Execution:
Authorized DB2 commands can be executed to request the DB2 subsystem to
perform an operator function.
■ User-Program Execution:
User-written DB2 application programs can be executed under the
CA-Roscoe/DB2 execution environment.
For detailed information about using this facility, see the CA-Roscoe/DB2 User Guide.

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility
DMF (Dialog Management Facility) is an application subsystem written in the RPF

language. It is designed to assist you in creating and maintaining applications that are
heavily panel-oriented.
When developing an application, you are presented with a series of prompt panels that
allow you to:
■ Paint the panels that you want to use in the application.
DMF takes the information you supply and builds a panel which it then saves as a
member in your library. It places no restriction on the type of panel you can
define.
■ Designate the sequence in which the panels are to be used.
All you have to do is provide the name of the member containing the next panel
to be displayed. DMF generates the linkage between the panels to ensure that they
are displayed in their proper sequence.
■ Designate how the panel information is to be processed.
When creating a panel, you can specify validation criteria for the input fields.
DMF generates an RPF program to verify those fields and invokes the program
when appropriate.
You can preset a panel field while defining the panel or through an initialization
RPF program. This flexibility means that you can include, for example, specific
default values (such as account numbers) when defining the panel or writing an
initialization program that provides variable values (such as a user's sign-on key).
The only RPF program you need to write is the execution program that evaluates
and processes the contents of the panel. Once you have associated this program
with your panel, DMF ensures that it is invoked at the appropriate point during the
execution of your application.
Since DMF builds the panels, you only have to be concerned with formatting the
information unique to each panel. DMF provides each panel with a title line, error
message line and lines for displaying PF key assignments.
Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility 37-1

DMF also provides a set of basic functions that you can assign to any of the PF keys.
Once you have made the assignments, DMF includes them in every generated panel. If
the terminal user presses a PF key to which you have assigned a function, DMF
handles the processing.
One of the PF key functions is a Help facility. To use this facility, all you need do is
tell DMF which DMF Help panel to use. If the individual executing the application
requests Help, DMF will display the appropriate Help panel.
With these features, DMF frees you from doing the repetitive or routine portions of
your panel-driven application.
For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide.

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System
ETSO (Extended Time-Sharing Option) is an application execution system that is

distributed as part of CA-Roscoe. You can use it to execute online under CA-Roscoe
most purchased or site-developed applications without modification.
Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications
38.1 Determining Executable Applications

The types of applications that can be executed include:
■ Applications that provide an interactive environment of their own. For example,
applications that use the Statistical Analysis System (SAS) from the SAS Institute.
■ Applications for data entry/inquiry against a data base.
■ Applications to handle site-specific tasks that extend CA-Roscoe capabilities. For
example, an application might be written that uses a batch program to process data
in an AWS.
■ Applications that use CLISTs and REXX execs. Both explicit (EXEC) and
implicit (%) invocations are supported.
ETSO can also be used to execute interactive applications. Many of the applications
that currently run under TSO execute successfully under ETSO.
If you are interested in executing a specific application, you should contact your site
management to determine:
1. If the application is already defined to ETSO.
2. If not, what procedures should be followed to have the site evaluate the
application for execution under ETSO.
If you are interested in executing an application containing CLISTs or REXX execs,

you should contact your site management to determine if the TSO command is
supported at your site. A requirement to execute those facilities is TSO/E 2.1 or
above.

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

Conceptually, there is little difference between executing an application in background
through CA-Roscoe or online through ETSO. In both cases, you must allocate the files
used by the application and then initiate execution of that application.
Frequently, sites provide RPF programs that handle file allocation and application
invocation. Thus, all you need to do is execute the RPF program. The sample RPF
programs shown in the following example illustrate two methods of executing the IBM
utility IEBCOPY.
ETSO: Application Execution Comparison
7 IEBCOPY1
8
>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P ==============
===1== <<IEBCOPY1>> : Execute Via ETSO
===2== ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=T
===3== ALLOCATE INDD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR
===4== ALLOCATE OUTDD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR
===5== ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)
===6== ALLOCATE SYSUT4 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)
===7== ALLOCATE SYSIN DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR
===8== CALL IEBCOPY
) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) )
IEBCOPY2
>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P ==============
===1== <<IEBCOPY2>> : Execute Batch Job
===2== WRITE AWS T
===3== '//BATCHJOB JOB . . . '
===4== '// EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY'
===5== '//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=T'
===6== '//INDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR'
===7== '//OUTDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR'
===8== '//SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)'
===9== '//SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)'
==1=== '//SYSIN DD DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR'
==11== ENDWRITE
==12== SUBMIT
U V
As illustrated in the upper portion of the screen, the ALLOCATE command allocates
the needed files and assigns them DD names that will be referenced by the application
during execution. The CALL command is then used to identify and initiate execution
of the application.

38.2.1 Allocating Files

ETSO dynamically allocates the files that you designate (through the ALLOCATE
command) for use by the application.
Note that the term file has a special meaning to ETSO. With ETSO, you can allocate
data sets and CA-Roscoe-managed files (like an AWS, a library member, or the
terminal).
38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS
You can allocate one or more AWSs. An AWS can be used as either an input or
output file or it can be both. To allocate the active AWS, use the AWS keyword with
the command, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS
To allocate a specific AWS, use the AWS= keyword to identify the appropriate AWS,
as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS=SAMPLE
If an AWS is defined as an input file, the application will read from that AWS until
the end of the AWS is reached.
If an AWS is defined as both an input and output file, the input data in that AWS is
overlaid by the output data written to it when the application ends (either successfully
or unsuccessfully) or the application closes the output file.
38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member
A library member can also be used as both an input and output file. To allocate a
library member, include the member name with the keyword MEM=. If the library
member belongs to another user, include that user's prefix, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN MEM=XYZ.CONTROL
If a library member is designated as an input file, the contents will be read until the
end of the member is reached.
If you designate a library member as an output file and that member does not currently
exist, the member is created when data are written to it. (If the non-existent member is
defined as an input file, the application will terminate.)

38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal
To designate that the terminal is to be used as an input and/or output file, include an
asterisk (*) with the command, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN Q
When the terminal is used as an input or output file, you should determine what
escape sequence you want before executing the application. You need the escape
sequence to:
■ Indicate the end of input. When the application begins executing, the keyboard is
locked. The keyboard unlocks when the application requests input. To force an
end-of-input condition, enter the escape sequence in response to a prompt for
input.
■ Terminate an application. If the terminal is defined as an output file, the keyboard
is unlocked when output exceeding a screen is written to the terminal. At that
time, you can terminate the application by entering the escape sequence.
While site management has the option of changing the default, it is usually two
consecutive periods (..). To change the escape sequence, use the SET ESCAPE
command, as in:
SET ESCAPE //
which changes the escape sequence to two consecutive slashes.
38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets
Any sequential data set, PDS member or temporary data set can be designated by the
ALLOCATE command. For example:
■ To designate that all read/write operations to a file are to be ignored, follow the
DD name with the keyword DUMMY, as in:
ALLOCATE IGNOREDD DUMMY
■ To designate an output file, include the appropriate SYSOUT information, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=(W,,LTRH) DEST=ABCD COPIES=2
■ To allocate space for a data set that is to be referenced by the application, you
might specify:
ALLOCATE SAMPLE DSN=ROSCOE.TEST
DISP=SHR VOL=STOR=2 UNIT=338= SPACE=(TRK,(2=,2=))
RECFM=FB LRECL=122 BLKSIZE=798
This example illustrates the type of information you can specify with the
command. It does, however, violate the rule that a command entered from the
terminal cannot exceed the width of the screen (it cannot be continued).
■ To use the attributes associated with a previously defined data set, use the LIKE=
operand. If the IBM DFSMS is not installed at the site, the existing data set's
DCB parameters are used. If DFSMS is installed, the attributes copied from the

existing data set are AVGREC, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, LRECL, RECORG (or
RECFM) and SPACE.
ALLOCATE SAMPLE2 DSN=ROSCOE.TEST2@LIKE=ROSCOE.TEST
SPACE=(TRK,(1=,5))
In this example, the SPACE= operand is used to override the space allocation in
the existing data set.
■ To allocate a data set that is defined in the CA-Roscoe JCL, use the JCLDD=
operand, as in:
ALLOCATE MYDD JCLDD=SITEDD
where SITEDD is the DD name associated with the data set. This form of
allocation is useful for data sets that are frequently referenced by one or more
users.
■ To concatenate data sets, list the data set object names in the appropriate order.
You can concatenate a maximum of ten names. They must be bound by
parentheses.
ALLOCATE SITELIB DSN=(ROSCOE.TEST1, ROSCOE.TEST2)...
■ To allocate a temporary data set, omit the keywords DUMMY, SYSOUT= and
DSN=, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)

38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files

By default, you can allocate a maximum of 19 files during your session. (Your site
management has the option of defining the maximum number of files that a user may
allocate.) This includes any combination of CA-Roscoe-managed files and data sets.
If, during the course of your session, you want to find out what files are allocated, you
can use the command:
QUERY ALLOCATE
The following example illustrates the type of information that might be displayed.
ETSO: Sample QUERY ALLOCATE Display
7 >
8
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DDNAME TYPE DISP MEMBER DATA-SET NAME
------ ---- ---- ------ -------------
SYSIN AWS
SYSIN1 LIBRARY pfx.CONTROL
IGNOREDD DUMMY
SYSPRINT SYSOUT CLASS=W FORM NAME=LTRH
DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST
DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST2
SYSUT3 DATASET NEW
When your application completes its execution, you should release all of the files that
you allocated. You can use the FREE command to release these files. For example, to
release the file with the DD name SYSIN, you would enter:
FREE SYSIN
To release all of the files you have allocated, enter:

FREE ALL
If any of your files are still allocated when your terminal session ends, they are
automatically released. Also, if your application dynamically allocates any files, they
are freed when your application ends.

38.2.3 Initiating Execution

To initiate execution of an application under ETSO, enter the CALL command and the
application name, as in:
CALL IEBCOPY
You can pass information to the application through the CALL command. For
example, if the application TEST expects an inventory number to be passed, you might
invoke the application by entering:
CALL TEST /SR2O5==/
If, after initiating execution, you decide to end the program, you can do so by pressing
the Attention key.
You also have the option of suspending application execution when it is prompting
you for input. To do so, enter:
:U
in any unprotected field and press PF12. The cursor must immediately follow the
command. (Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the CA-Roscoe defaults.
Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to determine if your site management has changed
these defaults.)
When an application is suspended, an E is displayed at the right of the Response Line.
If you originally initiated application execution by entering a CALL command, you

can resume execution by entering:
RESUME ETSO
If you initiated execution through an RPF program, that program will tell you how to
resume execution.

38.3 Executing Distributed Application
38.3 Executing Distributed Application

One of the sample applications distributed with CA-Roscoe is named MORTGAGE.
This application, written in FORTRAN, computes the rate, life, amount borrowed or
monthly payment of a mortgage loan. If your site has made this application available,
you can perform the following steps to execute it.
1. Allocate the necessary input and output files.
MORTGAGE uses three files. To assign FT05F001 and FT06F001 to the terminal
and FT07F001 to the active AWS, enter:
2. ALLOCATE FT=5F==1 Q
3. ALLOCATE FT=6F==1 Q
4. ALLOCATE FT=7F==1 AWS
where:
■ FT05F001 is the DD name of the input file.
■ FT06F001 is the DD name of an output files that writes the prompts and
computed results.
■ FT07F001 is the DD name of a second output file that writes the computed
mortgage tables.
5. Initiate execution of the application.
The CALL command initiates execution of applications defined to ETSO.
Therefore, to execute MORTGAGE, enter:
CALL MORTGAGE
Because of the allocations, MORTGAGE writes prompts to the terminal requesting the
necessary input and reads your responses from the terminal. After you have entered all
of the information, MORTGAGE performs its calculations and writes the results to the
terminal and the active AWS.
When the applications end, you should use the FREE command to deallocate the files.
If you do not, your allocated files are automatically released when you sign off
CA-Roscoe.
If you want to change an allocation or execute another application that uses a file with
the same DD name, you must release it before reallocating it. For example, to
reexecute MORTGAGE and have the output written to the terminal instead of the
active AWS, you would enter:
FREE FT=7==1
ALLOCATE FT=7==1 Q
CALL MORTGAGE

38.4 Executing TSO Commands
38.4 Executing TSO Commands

An extension to ETSO has been created to allow you to easily switch between the use
of TSO facilities and native CA-Roscoe facilities. You can execute CLISTs and
REXX execs. These procedures are executable directly from the CA-Roscoe command
line, from within each other (nesting), and from within ISPF dialogs. Both explicit
(EXEC) and implicit (%) invocations are supported.
Use the TSO command to execute TSO commands from within an RPF or from the
CA-Roscoe command line. The TSO command can be used in place of or in
conjunction with a CALL command. For example, to allocate files necessary for
logging onto ISPF, enter:
TSO EXEC 'TSTPRN.TSTPRN)=1.CLIST(LOGTSO)'
Or, to execute the CLIST MYEXEC from your TSO CLIST library, enter:
TSO %MYEXEC
If the TSO command invokes a full-screen process, that process will take over the
screen. If the process is a line-mode TSO command, output will be written to the
execution area.

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility
RPF is a high-level, interactive structured programming language. It supports a full

arithmetic capability, built-in functions and a variety of variables that are assigned
values by RPF and the user. Its commands can be used to:
■ Converse with the terminal user by issuing line-by-line and/or full-screen displays.
■ Validate data entered by the user against specified criteria.
■ Choose among several possible courses of action based upon the data entered by
the user.
■ Transfer control to another location within the same program or to other programs.
Perhaps its most important feature is that RPF is designed to take full advantage of all
CA-Roscoe commands and facilities. All of the commands can be incorporated
without modification into RPF programs. By using CA-Roscoe commands with RPF's
interactive language, error-prone and complicated tasks can be simplified so that it
becomes easy to:
■ Enter, verify and edit data.
■ Create, save, access and modify library members.
■ Build, verify, submit and track jobs.
■ Retrieve, examine and, optionally, save resulting output.
■ Control utility functions and housekeeping tasks performed against OS data sets.
RPF programs are stored in the CA-Roscoe library, with names that follow standard
CA-Roscoe naming conventions.
Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility 39-1

To execute an RPF program, enter its name in the Command Area and press the
ENTER key. For example, assume the RPF program that updates a customer master
file is saved as the member CUSTOMER. To execute this program, you would enter:
CUSTOMER
It might prompt for information by displaying a full-screen panel such as the one
shown in the following example.
RPF: Sample Full-Screen Panel
7 8
U P D A T E C U S T O M E R M A S T E R F I L E
COMPANY NAME: _ TELEPHONE:
CONTACT: ADDRESS:
TITLE:
CONTRACT NO: LAST ORDER DATE:
ENTER "X" IF NO MORE UPDATES:

U V
If the RPF program you wish to execute belongs to another user, you must precede the
name with that user's prefix (for example, AAA.CUSTOMER).
Occasionally, an RPF program may be given a name that is also the name of a
CA-Roscoe command (SAVE, for example). When this occurs, more explicit
invocation of the program is required to avoid executing the CA-Roscoe command. To
explicitly execute an RPF program, precede the program name with the EXEC
command. For example, to execute an RPF program named SAVE, you would enter:
EXEC SAVE
For additional information about the RPF language and how to write RPF programs,
see the CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide. You can also use TRAINING, which is an
interactive application that introduces RPF. For information about using this learning
aid, enter:
HELP TRAINING

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator
SKETCH is a menu-driven RPF application that simplifies the generation of panels

used by programs running under:
■ CICS. SKETCH generates BMS (Basic Mapping Support) macros that define
panels to CICS applications.
■ IMS. SKETCH generates the MFS (Message Format Services) statements that
define panels to IMS applications.
Using just a few prompt panels, you can use SKETCH to:
■ Design a BMS or MFS map. The input can be from: 1) your responses to
SKETCH prompts, 2) an RPF panel, or 3) an existing map.
■ Specify individual fields within a map. Default values for the fields (for example,
attributes and colors) are automatically supplied by SKETCH.
You have the option of modifying the site-defined default values that are used in
generating the macros/statements defining: 1) all maps and map fields, or 2) a
particular map.
■ Generate the macros/statements used in creating the map(s).
Before generating the macros, you have the option of displaying a prototype map,
thus ensuring that the map you are about to generate is correct.
■ Generate the JCL to:
– Assemble and link-edit the BMS macros. You can also designate whether the
resulting output is to be used in an Assembler, COBOL or PL/I application
program.
– Create the online blocks for the MFS statements. You can designate whether
the resulting output is to be placed in the production or test library.
While a familiarity with BMS or IMS is helpful, it is not essential when defining the
panels and then generating them to create maps. SKETCH allows you to create and
maintain panels by using the WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) method.
For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe Extended Development Tools Guide.
Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator 40-1

Appendixes
Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With
CA-Roscoe
To CA-Roscoe, a 'typewriter device' is an IBM 3767 or any device that operates in a

manner similar to a Teletype terminal.
Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-1

A.1 Beginning a Session
A.1 Beginning a Session

Before signing on to CA-Roscoe, you must first establish connection between your
typewriter device and your site's computer.
A-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.2 Establishing Connection
A.2 Establishing Connection

Your site management will tell you what telephone number to dial to establish
connection with the computer. After dialing the number, the computer 'answers' with a
high-pitched tone. Turn the terminal on. Place the hand set in the acoustic coupler
(located by, or as a part of, the terminal), or put the mode on data mode, depending on
the type of terminal connection. When the green terminal connection light lights up, or
the terminal clicks the keyboard open, depress the RETURN key one or more times
until CA-Roscoe responds with a sign-on prompt message.

A.3 Signing On
A.3 Signing On
At typewriter devices, CA-Roscoe issues a sign-on prompt like the one below:
SON03 ENTER KEY FOR CA-Roscoe version - date time
To sign on, type the sign-on key given to you by your site management and depress
the RETURN key.
If RACF protection is in effect at your site and group codes are used, the group code
should be entered with the sign-on key (separated by a slash), as in:
sign-on key/group code
If the account has previously been assigned a password (either by you or site
management), the following prompt is issued:
SON04 ENTER PASSWORD
After this prompt is issued, the terminal types meaningless characters in the field
where the password is to be entered. This provides a mask, so that other users will not
be able to see your password as you enter it.

A.3 Signing On
A new password can be entered at the same time as the current password. The two
passwords must be separated by a slash, as follows:
current password/new password
Once you have signed on, CA-Roscoe responds in a manner identical to that found at
3270-type terminals (that is, sign-on procedures are executed, the sign-on message is
displayed, and so forth.).

A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session
A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session

To sign off of CA-Roscoe, enter:
OFF
To sign off of CA-Roscoe and redisplay the sign-on prompt, enter:
OFFON

A.5 Using a Typewriter Device

Teletype terminals operate in half-duplex mode (that is, the terminal can either send or
receive data but not both at once). When CA-Roscoe is reading data from the
terminal, the terminal is locked. It is unlocked when CA-Roscoe is either writing to the
terminal or waiting for a response from the terminal. CA-Roscoe normally notifies you
that the terminal is unlocked and ready for input by typing the prompt character, the
backarrow (<-). On some terminals, the backarrow is replaced by an underscore (_).
If a line sent from the terminal to CA-Roscoe cannot be received due to noise on the
phone line, CA-Roscoe displays the following message:
CMD27: TERMINAL I/O ERROR - DATA LOST
Retype and resend the line. If such an error occurs while the terminal is executing an
RPF program, the program is terminated. If the error occurs while CA-Roscoe is
attempting to send data to the terminal, retry procedures are executed. In the rare case
that errors are found during the retry procedures (indicating severe communication
problems), CA-Roscoe signs the terminal off. Attempt to reestablish connection from
another terminal.
Signoff procedures may be forced by CA-Roscoe in response to any of the following

conditions:
■ The operator requests CA-Roscoe to sign you off.
■ You turn the power off or hang up the phone.
■ Unrecoverable error conditions occur on the phone line, leaving the line
inoperable.

When any of these conditions occur, your are signed off. Any data in an AWS is
saved in your library as the member SAVAWSnn where 'nn' is a unique identifier.
Teletype Terminal Keyboard:

CTRL-E Keys Depressing the CTRL and E keys in unison cancels an input line,
causing CA-Roscoe to reissue a sequence number prompt.
CTRL-I Keys Depressing the CTRL and I keys in unison simulates a hardware
TAB key. This action is recognized only if tab positions have
been defined through the TAB command. On most Teletype
terminals, the carrier or cursor is not moved by this action.
CTRL-S Keys Depressing the CTRL and S keys in unison simulates a RETURN
key, transmitting data from the terminal to CA-Roscoe.
RETURN Key (or CR)
Transmits data from the terminal to CA-Roscoe.
Backslash Key Erases the last character entered. It can also be used to erase
entire words. (On some models, this function is handled by the
shift-L keys.)
In addition to the above, the software BREAK feature is supported as follows:

■ To terminate output, depress the RETURN key.
■ To resume listing after a pause, depress the CTRL-S keys.

A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities
A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities

The following commands are available only at typewriter devices:
BREAK Controls the number of lines written to the terminal before pausing.
BREAK should only be used if the terminal does not have a hardware
BREAK key. Output is continued upon receiving a CTRL-S. Output is
terminated upon receiving a carriage return.
SCALE Writes a Scale Line identical in function to the Scale Line displayed at
3270-type terminals.
TTY Sets the speed characteristics for the terminal. Site management will tell
you of the value associated with each terminal type and the site defaults.
WIDTH Physically changes the width of the print line from the default value to a
value between 72 and 132 characters.

A.7 Using the Data Set Facility
A.7 Using the Data Set Facility

Primary commands (such as READ DSN) that do not cause a full-screen display are
supported. Commands that require interaction through a panel (for example, DSN) may
not be used at a typewriter device.
If a PAUSE state is entered without a DETACH command being issued, one is

assumed. This means that Selections Lists and data cannot be displayed at the terminal
but may be processed by commands such as COPY DSN or READ DSN. Note that
the DETACH need not be an explicit DETACH DSN. This permits the data set
process to be suspended over a pause and allows a future RPF program or primary
command to continue to access the data/Selection List.

A.8 Viewing Job Output
A.8 Viewing Job Output

Use the SET DISPLAY command to designate the length of the line to be printed (for
example, SET DISPLAY 1 80 causes the first 80 characters of the line to be printed).
If the device supports lines longer than 80 characters, you can set the appropriate line
length (for example SET DISPLAY 1 132). (The maximum line length you can
specify is 150.) If the line is longer than 132 characters, characters in excess of 132
are wrapped to the next line.
Use the ATTACH JOB command to begin printing the output. After the number of
lines specified by the BREAK command have printed, the carriage stops at the right
side of the device. To continue listing the job, enter:
ATTACH JOB *

A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities
A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities

The following commands are not executable at typewriter devices:
■ All line commands and SET DISPLAY NUMX.
■ INCL and EXCL. (SEARCH and OMIT may be used.)
■ SET
■ All SET-related commands used to control the 3270-type terminal display (for
example, SET AWSDSPLY and SET SCROLL).
The following facilities are not available at typewriter devices:

■ The split-screen facility
■ PF/PA key support
■ RPF panel facility

Index
> (Greater Than Sign)

Special Characters As Special Character 4-5
- (Reexecuting Last Command) 2-6
-INC Statement Expansion
Changing 6-16 Numerics
Using 28-7 3270-Type Devices
,, (Representing Last Line) 2-5 DELETE Key 16-7
:C (To Copy Screen) ERASE EOF Key
Using 15-9 Control Use Of 6-16, 16-6
:E (To End Split Screens) Screen Components
Using 8-11 Command Area 8-3
:L (To Lock Screen) Execution Area 8-6
Using 8-14 System Control Area 8-3—8-5
:P (To Print Screen) Screen Format
Using 7-2 Change 8-12
:S (To Split Screen) Full/Partial 8-7
Using 8-8 Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14
:SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 Signing Off 10-13
:TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 Signing On 10-2—10-3
:W (To Swap Split Screens)
Using 8-11
.SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 A
.TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 A (Destination) Line Command 15-4
< (Less Than Sign) With Move 21-4
As Special Character 4-5 Access Attribute, Library Member
* (Asterisk) Changing Default 6-17
As Reserved Character 2-6 AD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
Deferring Command Execution 2-6 With COPY 15-5
Representing Addmsg Function (BBS) 35-4
Name of Last FETCHed, SAVEd, UPDATEd AJOB Command
Member 23-5 Job Execution Status 29-2
& Job Facility
Change Command Delimiter 6-15 Menu 28-9
+INC Statement Expansion Selection List 28-13
Changing 6-17 Job Information 29-7
Using 28-6 ALLOCATE Command
+ (Plus Sign) Data Sets
As Reserved Character 2-7 Using 27-2, 27-3
Redisplaying Last Executed Command 2-13, 2-14 Under ETSO 38-4—38-5
Index X-1
Allocate Function Panel Attributes (continued)
Description Of 27-4 Job Output File (continued)
Using 27-3 Displaying 30-23—30-24
Allocate SMS Function Panel Library Member
Description Of 27-7 Changing Default Access 6-17
Using 27-3 Automatic
Allocating Files Indentation
Data Set Under ETSO 38-5 Controlling 6-15
Data Sets 27-2, 27-3 Using 18-15
Library Member 38-4 Line Insertion
Terminal 38-5 Controlling 6-15
ALTER Command Using 18-9
AWS Attributes 13-5 Signoff
Job File Attributes 30-17 Controlling 6-15
Library Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3 Site Defaults 6-12
Altering Terminal Lock
AWS Attributes 13-5 Controlling 6-17
Job File Attributes Site Defaults 6-12
Commands 30-17 AWS
Job Facility 30-18 Adding String To Line
Selection List 30-19 At Beginning 14-2
STATUS JOB Display 30-23—30-24 At End 14-2
Library Member Attributes Between Specific Columns 14-2
Command 34-2, 34-3 Attaching 13-3
Function Panel 34-15, 34-16 Bringing Data Into 13-4
Selection List 34-3, 34-4 Creating 13-6, 13-7
Arithmetic symbols (syntax diagrams) xxvi Deleting Contents
ATTACH Command Using Line Commands 16-4
AWS 13-3 Using Primary Commands (By Line
Controlling Pausing 6-15 Number) 16-2
Data Set Facility Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing
Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12 String) 16-3
Data Set 25-26, 25-27 Detaching 13-8
GDG 25-14 Discarding
LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-17 Change Attribute 13-5
LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2 Display/Change Attributes 17-5
Menu 24-2 Explicit 13-9
PDS Member 25-15—25-17 Display/Change Attributes 17-1—17-6
PDS Selection List 25-18, 25-19 Editing Data
Volume Selection List 25-28 Changed Line Indicator (Controlling) 6-16
Job Output 30-2—30-6 Controlling Column Boundaries 4-1—4-5
Library Facility Editing Data (Character Strings)
Member 32-10, 32-11 Tracking Changes 14-8—14-10
Menu 31-3—31-5 Using Line Commands 14-7
Selection List 32-2 Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7
VTOC Selection List 25-33—25-34 Editing Data (Characters)
Attributes Using Line Commands 14-5
Job Output File Using Primary Command 14-4
Change Using Command 30-17 Entering Data
Change Using Job Menu 30-18 Controlling Number of Inserted Lines 6-15
Change Using Selection List 30-19 From Command Area 18-14
Change Using STATUS JOB Using a Mask 18-11—18-12
Display 30-23—30-24
X-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

AWS (continued)
Entering Data (continued) B
Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9 B (Destination) Line Command 15-4
Using I and IB Line Commands 18-8 With Move 21-4
Using PF Key 18-13 BASIC Mode
Using Primary Commands 18-2—18-7 Character Translation/Recognition 3-3
Using TE Line Command 18-10 BB (Destination) Line Command 15-4
With Automatic Indentation 18-15 With Move 21-4
Fill Character, Trailing 6-16 BBD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
introduction 13-1 With COPY 15-5
Keyword on System Information Line 8-3 BBS
Locate/Display Data Overview 35-1, 35-2
All Occurrences (Modifiable Display) 20-6—20-9 BBSOpt Mode 35-13
All Occurrences (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, BBSSAV 35-13
20-8 BD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
By Occurrence, Line Commands 20-5 With COPY 15-5
By Occurrence, Primary Command 20-3 Boundaries
Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8 See Column Boundaries
Customizing Display 20-10 BOUNDS Line Command 4-5
Non-Matching Occurrence (Modifiable BulletinBoard System
Display) 20-6 Addmsg Function 35-8, 35-9
Non-Matching Occurrence (Non-Modifiable Create Message Threads 35-8, 35-9
Display) 20-8 Create Thread Entries 35-8, 35-9
Positioning Display deleting unwanted thread 35-16
By Pointer Position 13-10 Edit Mode 35-9, 35-10
Using Line Commands 13-12 Error/Status Line 35-3
Using Primary Command 13-11 GetMsgs Processing 35-23
Print Contents of 7-2 Locate CA-Roscoe Users 35-28
Reattaching 13-13 Message Display Description 35-24
Recovery Message Selection List 35-3
Change Attribute 13-5 News Announcements 35-2
Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Overview 35-1
Set Attributes 13-6 Print
Renaming 13-5 Message Thread 35-18, 35-19
Renumber Contents of Thread Entry 35-17
Any Time 22-1—22-3 Prune Profile 35-16
Reorder Contents 14-3 Reply/Insert Mode 35-8, 35-9
Save Contents of 23-2 Send Messages 9-5
Selecting 13-14 Sending Messages to CA-Roscoe Users
AWS Attributes Description 35-20
Change 13-5 Using ZMsg 35-25—35-27
Display/Change 17-1—17-6 Session parameters, Set 35-13
Establish 13-6, 13-7 Set Defaults
AWS Display Options (Utility) 35-13
Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Printer 35-14
Display/Change 17-1—17-6 Read Message Attribute 35-14
Sequence Number Display 5-6 Unread Message Attribute 35-14
Signing On 35-2
Suppress Message Processing 35-23
Utility (PF1/13) 35-11—35-19
View News Announcements 35-15
Index X-3
BulletinBoard System (continued) Catalog Selection List (continued)
Viewing Message Thread 35-5 Function Codes
Viewing Thread Entries 35-6, 35-7 List Of 25-9—25-12
ZMsg Function (PF12/24) 35-21—35-27 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11
ZMsg Mode 9-5 Search for String
All Occurrences 26-4
By Occurrence 26-3
C Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4
C Line Command 15-3 Selecting Different Level 25-38
CA-Librarian CB Line Command 15-4
-INC Statement Expansion CC Line Command 15-4
Controlling 6-16 CDSN Command 27-62
Attaching Module 25-15 Center Text
Attaching Selection List 25-2 Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4
Using EXPORT Command 27-60 Using Primary Command 19-2
CA-Panvalet CHAIN Command 34-7
EXPORT Command Character Set
Using 27-60 Description Of 2-5
CA-Roscoe Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-5
Controlling Info Messages 6-16 Language
Documentation, User 12-2 Changing 6-15
HELP Facility 12-3—12-5 Defining 3-2
Online Tutorial 12-6 Reserved Characters 2-5, 2-6
Sign On Translation Mode
From CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5 Changing 6-16
From CICS 10-6 Defining 3-3
From TSO 10-7 Character Translation
From VTAM 10-3 Display/Change 17-5
Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 Character, Replace
CA-SysView Interface (BBS) 35-28 Using Line Command 14-5
CALL Command 38-8 Using Primary Command 14-4
Cancel Function (BBS) 35-10 CICS
Cancel Job Signing On Via 10-6
Using Job Facility 30-30 COB Command 28-3
Using Selection List 30-31 COBOL Syntax Checker 28-3
Capitalize Text COLS
Initial Cap Field on System Information Line 8-6
Using Line Commands 19-6 Column Boundaries
Using Primary Command 19-5 Display/Change 6-2, 6-3
Lowercase All Using STATUS AWS 17-3
Using Line Commands 19-5 Session Change
Using Primary Command 19-5 Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5
Printing 7-3 Using SET BOUNDS 4-4
Uppercase All Using STATUS AWS 4-3
Using Line Commands 19-5 Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3
Using Primary Command 19-5 Temporary Change 4-2
CATALOG Command 27-11, 27-12 Comma
Catalog Selection List repeat symbol, use in xxix
Attaching 25-7, 25-8 Command Area
Description Of 25-9—25-12 Change Size of 6-15
Detaching 26-2 Description 8-3

Command Area (continued) Copying Data (continued)
Use To Enter AWS Data 18-14 Within AWS
Commands Description 15-2, 15-3
Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10 Using Line Commands 15-3, 15-4
Defaults, Site-defined 6-12, 6-13 Using Repeat Line Command 15-7
Deferring Command Execution 2-6 CopyMem Function 35-9
Delimiter COPYS Command
Changing 6-15 From Data Set Facility 27-13
Using 2-2 From Library Facility 34-6
Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9 Into AWS
Execution Hierarchy 2-9 From AWS 15-8—15-10
Redisplaying Executed From Screen 15-8—15-10
In Command Area 2-13, 2-14 COPYX Command
In Execution Area 2-13 From Data Set Facility 27-13
Reexecuting 2-6 From Library Facility 34-6
Types Of 2-2, 2-3 Into AWS
COMPRESS Command 27-21 From AWS 15-8—15-10
Compress PDS 27-21 From Screen 15-8—15-10
COPY Command Create AWS 13-6, 13-7
From Data Set Facility 27-13 CREATE Command 13-6
Into AWS CSR (SCRL Field Value) 8-5
From AWS 15-8—15-10 CT Line Command 15-4
From Job Output 30-20 Cursor Positioning
From Library Facility 34-5, 34-6 After Command Execution
From Screen 15-8—15-10 Changing 6-15
Specific Information 15-8—15-10 After Lines Inserted
Within AWS 15-2, 15-3 Changing 6-15
Copy Function Panel
Data Set Facility
Descripiton 27-16 D
Displaying 27-16 D
Library Facility Line Command 16-4
Description 34-8, 34-9 DASD Space, Release Unused 27-52
Displaying 34-8, 34-9 Data Set Display
Copying Data Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Between Screens Sequence Number Display 5-6
All or Range 15-12, 15-13 Data Set Facility
Based on String 15-13, 15-14 Attaching
Into AWS Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12
All or Range 15-8—15-10 Data Set 25-26, 25-27
Based on String 15-10, 15-11 GDG 25-14
From AWS 15-8—15-10 LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-17
From Data Set Facility (Commands) 27-13 LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2—25-6
From Data Set Facility (Function Panel) 27-16 Menu 24-2, 24-3
From Data Set Facility (Selection List) 27-20 PDS Member 25-15—25-17
From Job Output 30-20 PDS Selection List 25-18, 25-19
From Screen 15-8—15-10 Volume Selection List 25-28
Using :C 15-9 VTOC Selection List 25-33—25-34
Using Commands 34-5, 34-6 Cataloging 27-11, 27-12
Using Function Panel 34-8, 34-9 Define GDG
Using Selection List 34-9, 34-10 Function Panel 27-25
Index X-5
Data Set Facility (continued) Data Sets (continued)
Defining Alias 27-22 Printing (continued)
Detaching 26-2 Using Function Command 27-46
Function Panels 24-10 Using Selection List 27-51
Inquiring About Releasing Space 27-52
Data Set (Selection List) 27-36 Renaming
Volume 27-40 Using Command 27-53
Menu Description 24-3—24-7 Using Function Panel 27-54
Printing 27-44 Using Selection List 27-57
Releasing Space 27-52 Searching For String
Renaming 27-54 Lines Limit, Changing 6-16
Search for String Lines Limit, Site Default 6-13
All Occurrences 26-4 Uncataloging 27-58
By Occurrence 26-3 Writing To
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Controlling Directory Updates 6-17
Selecting Display 25-38 Description 27-59, 27-60
Selection Lists Using EDSN 27-61
Function Code Hierarchy 24-13 Using EXPORT 27-59
Overview 24-12 Date Format
Refreshing 24-15 Changing 6-15
Uncataloging 27-58 Display Current 6-14
Data Sets Site Defined 6-13
Allocating DB Line Command 16-4
Command 27-2, 27-3 DB2 and CA-Roscoe 36-1
Attaching 25-26, 25-27 DD Line Command 16-4
Cataloging 27-11, 27-12 Default values (syntax diagrams) xxix
COMPRESS Message Control DEFINE ALIAS Command 27-23
Changing 6-16 DEFINE GDG Command 27-25
Compressing PDS Defining
Description 27-21 Alias Function Panel
Copying Description 27-23
Using Command 27-13 Displaying 27-22
Using Function Panel 27-16 Using 27-22
Using Selection List 27-20 GDG Function Panel
Define Alias Description 27-25
Using Command 27-22 Displaying 27-25
Using Function Panel 27-23 DELETE Command
Define GDG AWS Contents 16-2
Using Command 27-25 Data Set Object 27-28, 27-29
Using Function Panel 27-25 Library Member 34-11
Deleting Delete Confirmation Panel
Using Command 27-28, 27-29 Data Set Facility 27-33
Using Function Panel 27-29 Library Facility
Using Selection List 27-33 Description Of 34-14
Display Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Detaching 34-14
DSCB Empty Control 6-16 Delete Function Panel
Editing 27-61 Data Set Facility 27-29
Function Panel 27-4 Library Facility 27-29
Inquiring About 27-36 DELETE Hardware Key 16-7
Migration Recall Control 6-16 DELETES Command 16-3
Printing
Using Command 27-44

DELETEX Command 16-3 Display Margins
Deleting Display/Change
AWS Contents Description 6-2, 6-3
Using ERASE EOF Key (Controlling Using SET DISPLAY 5-5
Extent) 6-16 Using STATUS AWS 17-4
Using Line Commands 16-4 Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4
Using Primary Commands (By Line Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4
Number) 16-2 Display Mode
Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4
String) 16-3 Displaying
Data Set/Member/Module Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8
Using Command 27-28, 27-29 DMF, Description Of 37-1
Using Function Panel 27-29 Documentation, Description of User 12-2
Using Selection List 27-33 DoPrint Mode (BBS) 35-17—35-19
Library Member DROP Command
Function Panel 34-12 With Data Set, Member, Module 26-9
Selection List 34-13 DS Line Command 16-5
Using Command 34-11 DSB Line Command 16-5
Print Request 7-13 DSN
Deleting thread entries 35-16 Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
Delimiter DST Line Command 16-5
Command 6-15 DT Line Command 16-4
PF/PA Keys 6-17 DU Line Command 16-5
String 2-8 DX Line Command 16-5
Delimiters DXB Line Command 16-5
syntax diagrams, use in xxvii DXT Line Command 16-5
DETACH Command
Job Output 30-7
Library Facility 33-2 E
Detaching E Line Command 14-7
AWS 13-8 EB Line Command 14-7
Data Set Facility 26-2 Edit Messages (BBS) 35-9, 35-10
Job Output EditAgain Function (BBS) 35-10
Using Commands 30-7 Editing Data
Using Job Facility 30-7 BulletinBoard System Messages 35-9, 35-10
Library Facility 33-2 Changing Indicator Option 6-16
Dialog Management Facility (DMF) Character
Description Of 37-1 Using Line Commands 14-5, 14-7
Discarding AWS Using Primary Command 14-4, 14-6, 14-7
Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Track Changes 14-8—14-10
Explicitly 13-9 EDSN Command 27-61
DISPLAY Command EE Line Command 14-7
Job Execution Status 29-2 Entering Data In AWS
Number of Jobs in Class 29-6 From Command Area 18-14
Status of Initiators 29-5 Using a Mask 18-11—18-12
Status of Jobs in Class 29-4 Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9
Display Format Using Line Commands
Display Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8 I and IB 18-8
Display Information About 6-2, 6-3 TE 18-10
Sequence Numbers Using PF Key 18-13
Display Margins 5-6 Using Primary Commands
INPUT Command 18-2—18-5
Index X-7
Entering Data In AWS (continued) FIRST Command (continued)
Using Primary Commands (continued) Library Facility 33-3, 33-4
INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-6, 18-7 FIRST Line Command 20-5
With Automatic Indentation 18-15 Firstnew Function (BBS) 35-4, 35-5
ERASE EOF Key Forced Signoff
Controlling Extent of Deletion 6-16 3270-Type Devices
Using to Delete (AWS Data) 16-6 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15
ET Line Command 14-7 Formatting
ETSO Data
Allocating Using Automatic Indentation 6-15
Data Sets 38-5 Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12
Files 38-4—38-5 Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11
Terminal 38-5 Using TAB Facility 18-16, 18-17
Applications FRAM (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
Executing 38-3 FREE Command 38-7
Change Escape Sequence 6-16 FULL (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
Determining Executable Applications 38-2
Executing
Applications 38-3, 38-8 G
TSO Procedures 38-10 Generation Data Group (GDG)
Freeing Files 38-7 See Data Set Facility
Overview 38-1 GetMsgs Processing (BBS) 35-23
Querying Files 38-7 GROUP CODE Field on Sign-on Screen 10-3
Release Allocated Files 38-7
Resume Application Execution 38-8
Suspend Application Execution 38-8
H
HALF (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
EXCL Command
HELP Command 12-3—12-5
AWS 20-6, 20-7
HELP Facility 12-3—12-5
Job Output 30-9
Hex
Library Facility 33-4
Locate String In 20-11, 20-12
EXCL Line Command 20-8, 20-9
Hexadecimal Display
Execution Area 8-6
Setting 5-7, 5-8
Exit Function (BBS) 35-2
Hierarchy
EXPLICIT
Command Evaluation 2-9
LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4
HLP Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
EXPORT Command 27-59, 27-60
Extended Time-Sharing Option
See ETSO I
I Line Command 18-8
IB Line Command 18-8
F Ignore! Function (BBS) 35-4
FETCH Command 34-7
IM Line Command 18-11
Fill Character
IMPLICIT
AWS 6-16
LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4
Display/Change 17-4
INCL Command
FILL Command 14-2
AWS 20-6, 20-7
FindUser Function (BBS) 35-28
Job Output 30-9
FIRST Command
Library Facility 33-4
AWS 20-3
INCL Line Command 20-8, 20-9
Job Output
Locate String 30-8
Position Within 30-12

Initial Cap Text Job Output
Using Line Commands 19-6 Attaching 30-2—30-6
Using Primary Command 19-5 Cancel Job
INPUT Command Using Commands 30-30
Entering Data 18-3—18-5 Using Job Facility 30-30, 30-31
Using Power Typing 18-6, 18-7 Copy to AWS
Insert Data In AWS Job Menu 30-20
From Command Area 18-14 Primary Commands 30-20
Using a Mask 18-11—18-12 Selection List 30-22
Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9 Description 30-5
Using Line Commands Detaching
I and IB 18-8 Using Commands 30-7
TE 18-10 Using Job Facility 30-7
Using PF Key 18-13 Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Using Primary Commands Displaying
INPUT Command 18-2—18-5 Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8
INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-6, 18-7 Execution Status 29-2
With Automatic Indentation 18-15 File Attributes 30-23—30-24
Internal Pointer Positioning Sequence Number Displaying 5-6
AWS 13-10 File Attributes
Change Using Command 30-17
Change Using Job Menu 30-18
J Change Using Modifiable Display 30-23—30-24
JCK Command 28-2, 28-3 Change Using Selection List 30-19
JCL Syntax Checker 28-2, 28-3 Positioning Display
JES Printers Between Files 30-12
Change Location To String 30-8
For Request 7-10 Printing Files
For Session 7-10 Using Commands 30-26
Displaying Locations 7-11 Using Job Menu 30-26
Print At 7-2 Using Job Section List 30-29
JOB Reattaching 30-15
Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 Searching For String
Job Facility All Occurrences 30-9
Alter Job Line Limit, Changing 6-16
Display Description 30-18 Lines Limit, Site Default 6-13
Using 30-18 Non-Matching Occurrences 30-9
Cancel Job 30-30 Specific Occurrence 30-8
Copy Job SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-5
Display Description 30-21 Job Selection List
Using 30-20 Alter Job 30-19
Detaching Job 30-7 Copy Job 30-22
Displaying Job Status 30-25
Menu 28-9 Print Job 30-29
Selection List 28-13 Join Lines
Operator Control 28-15 Using Line Commands 19-18
Print Job Using Primary Command 19-15, 19-16
Display Description 30-28
Using 30-26
Job Information
AJOB Command 29-7
Index X-9
Library Member
K Attaching 32-10, 32-11
KEY Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2 Copying
Keywords (syntax diagrams) xxvi Using Command 34-5, 34-6
Using Function Panel 34-8, 34-9
L Using Selection List 34-9, 34-10
Creating 23-2
Language Character Set
Deleting
Changing 6-15
Using Command 34-11
LAST Command
Using Function Panel 34-12
AWS 20-3
Using Selection List 34-13
Job Output
Display Format 5-7
Locate String 30-8
Displaying
Position Within 30-12
Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4
Format of Display 32-12
LAST Line Command 20-5
HEX display 5-7, 5-8
Lastread Function (BBS) 35-4
Inquiring About 34-15, 34-16
LC Line Command 19-5
Position Display
LCB Line Command 19-5
To Named Line 33-8
LCC Line Command 19-5
To Specific Line 33-8
LCT Line Command 19-5
Printing
LIB
Using Command 34-17
Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
LIBRARIAN Selection List
Detaching 26-2
Renaming
Reattaching 26-10, 26-11
Using 34-22
Search for String
Using Command 34-22
By Occurrence 26-3
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4
Save AWS Contents As 23-2
Selecting Different Level 25-38
Search for String
LIBRARY Command 31-3—31-5
Library Facility
Alter Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3
Specific Occurrence 33-3, 33-4
Attaching
Update Contents 23-5
Member 32-10, 32-11
Library Member Display
Selection List 32-2
Display Format 5-8
Copying 34-5, 34-6
Sequence Number Display 5-6
Deleting 34-11
Library System, Description 31-1
Detaching 33-2
Line Commands
Function Panels Description 31-6
Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10
Inquiring About Member 34-15, 34-16
Description of Use 2-3, 2-4
Library System 31-1
Display Format Description 2-2
Menu 31-3—31-5
Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9
Printing 34-17
Locate CA-Roscoe Users (BBS) 35-28
Locate/Display Data
Selection List
All Occurrences
Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9
In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8, 20-9
Refresh 31-10
In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8
Using 31-7
By Occurrence
Wildcard Characters 32-3
In AWS (Line Commands) 20-5
In AWS (Primary Command) 20-3

Locate/Display Data (continued) Manipulate Text (continued)
Change Search Boundaries (For Command) 4-2 Uppercase All
Change Search Boundaries (For Session) Using Line Commands 19-5
Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5 Using Primary Command 19-5
Using SET BOUNDS 4-4 Margins, Display
Using STATUS AWS 4-3 Change Using SET DISPLAY 5-5
Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3 Change Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4
Customizing Display 20-10 Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4
Non-Matching Occurrence MASK Line Command 18-11—18-12
In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6 MAX (SCRL Field Value) 8-5
In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8 MB Line Command 21-3
Position Display 20-13 MERGE Command 34-7
Qualify String 20-10 Message Selection List(BBS)
Translate Search String 20-10 Description 35-3
Using HEX String 20-11, 20-12 PFKey Functions 35-4
Logical Not (¬) Message Thread Entry (BBS)
Change Tab Character 17-5 Create 35-8, 35-9
LOWCASE Command 19-5 Description 35-6
Lowercase Data PFKey Functions 35-7
All Characters Message Thread Selection List(BBS)
Using Line Commands 19-5 Description 35-5
Using Primary Command 19-5 PFKey Functions 35-5
With Initial Cap Message Threads (BBS)
Using Line Commands 19-6 Create 35-8, 35-9
Using Primary Command 19-5 Description 35-3
LSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11 Print 35-18, 35-19
Viewing 35-5
Message Title (BBS), Create 35-10
M Messages
M Line Command 21-3 CA-Roscoe Info Messages 6-16
Manipulate Text Controlling Display
Center SEND Messages (Received) 9-2, 9-3
Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4 Submit Confirmation 28-4
Using Primary Command 19-2 Monitor Error Messages 6-16
Initial Cap Monitor Info Messages 6-16
Using Line Commands 19-6 PRINT Completion 7-8
Using Primary Command 19-5 Transmit Via BulletinBoard System 9-5
Join Lines Transmit Via SEND 9-4, 9-5
Using Line Commands 19-18 View Using BulletinBoard System 35-21—35-24
Using Primary Command 19-15, 19-16 MM Line Command 21-3
Lowercase All Monitor Commands
Using Line Commands 19-5 Controlling Messages
Using Primary Command 19-5 Error 6-16
Reformat Informational 6-16
Using Line Command 19-8—19-9 Deferring Command Execution 2-6
Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8 Reexecuting 2-6
Shift Lines MOVE Command 21-2
Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 Moving Lines Within AWS
Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Using Line Commands 21-3, 21-4
Split Line Using Primary Command 21-2
Using Line Commands 19-17
Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14
Index X-11
MT Line Command 21-3 OM Line Command 18-12
OMB Line Command 18-12
OMIT Command 20-7, 20-8
N OMT Line Command 18-12
Name OO (Destination/Overlay) Line Command
Field on System Information Line 8-3 With COPY 15-5
Print Request With Move 21-4
Assigning 7-6 Operator
Displaying 7-13 Job Facility 28-15
News Announcements (BBS) ORDER Command 14-3
Description 35-2 ORDER Operand, Library Facility 32-9
View 35-15 Ordering Library Selection List 32-9
NewThread Function (BBS) 35-10 OT (Destination/Overlay) Line Command
NEXT Command With COPY 15-5
AWS 20-3 With Move 21-4
Job Output Overlay Line Commands
Locate String 30-8 With COPY 15-6
Position Within 30-12 With Move 21-5
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4
NEXT Line Command 20-5
Nextnew Function (BBS) 35-6 P
NONUM Parentheses
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 syntax diagrams, use in xxvii
NOPRESERVE Mode Password
Character Translation 3-4 Changing User
NOTE Command During Session 10-8, 10-9
With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8, 26-9 When Signing On 10-3, 10-8
With Job Output 30-13 PASSWORD Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2
With Library Member 33-8, 33-9 PAU Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
Note Names PDS Member 25-15—25-17
Library Member 33-8, 33-9 PDS Selection List
Notification Messages Attaching 25-18, 25-19
PRINT Completion 7-8 Description Of 25-20
NUM Detaching 26-2
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 Function Code List 25-20—25-22
NUM2 Inquire About
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 Load Module 25-20—25-22
NUMX Source Module 25-23—25-25
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11
Search for String
O By Occurrence 26-3
O (Destination/Overlay/Drop) Line Command Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4
With COPY 15-4 Selecting Different Level 25-38
O (Destination/Overlay) Line Command PF/PA Keys
With COPY 15-4 BulletinBoard System 35-2
With Move 21-4 Changing Assignment
OB (Destination/Overlay) Line Command Description 11-8, 11-9
With COPY 15-5 Fixed Assignment 11-10, 11-11
With Move 21-4 Scroll Functions 11-13
Special Functions 11-15
Variable Assignment 11-11, 11-12

PF/PA Keys (continued) PRINT HOLD Command 7-14
Command Delimiter 11-11 PRINT LOCATION Command 7-11
Changing 6-17 Print Message Utility (BBS) 35-17—35-19
Default Assignments 11-2 PRINT RELEASE Command 7-14
Processing Hierarchy 11-7 PRINT ROUTE Command 7-14
Using 11-4 PRINT STATUS Command 7-13
PFv (SCRL Field Value) 8-5 Printing (At 328x/System Printer)
PGM Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 ANSI Controlled 7-4
Plus sign Cancelling Request 7-13
Redisplaying last executed command 2-13 Changing Priorities 7-14
POINT Command 13-11 Designating Location 7-10
Library Facility 33-4 Display Information About
With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8 Printers 7-12
With Job Output Printing Locations 7-10
Position Within 30-12 Request Status 7-13
To Noted Line 30-13 Formatting Request 7-3—7-5
Power Typing (Data Entry) Holding Requests 7-14
Using Line Command 18-10 Naming Requests 7-6
Using Primary Command 18-6, 18-7 Notification Messages, Requesting 7-8
PREFIX Command 14-2 Partial Requests 7-7
PRESERVE Mode Referencing Requests 7-6
Character Translation 3-4 Releasing Requests 7-14
PREV Command Requesting Copies 7-6
AWS 20-3 Rerouting Requests 7-14
Job Output System Printer Controls 7-9
Locate String 30-8 Using
Position Within 30-12 :P 7-2
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 PRINT Command 7-2
PREV Line Command 20-5 Printing Data
Prevnew Function (BBS) 35-5 Message Thread (BBS) 35-18, 35-19
Primary Commands Notification Messages
Controlling Info Messages 6-16 Setting Default 6-17
Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10 Thread Entry (BBS) 35-17
Deferring Command Execution 2-6 Using
Description of Use 2-2 Data Set Facility 27-46
Reexecuting 2-6 Printing Location
Using With Line Commands 2-2 Changing
PRINT CANCEL Command 7-13 For Request 7-10
PRINT Command For Session 7-10
Data Set 27-44 Displaying
Description 7-2 All 7-11
Job Output Current 6-4
Commands 30-26 Profile Cleanup (BBS) 35-16
Job Facility 30-26 Program Access Keys
Selection List 30-29 See PF/PA Keys
With Library Facility 34-17 Program Attention Keys
PRINT DEVICE Command 7-12 See PF/PA Keys
Print Function Panel Program Function Keys
Data Set Facility 27-46 See PF/PA Keys
Library Facility 34-17 Programs
comma
repeat symbol, use in xxix
Index X-13
Programs (continued) RESET Line Command 2-11
parentheses Response Line 8-3
syntax diagrams, use in xxvii RPF Programs
punctuation Description Of 39-1
syntax diagrams, use in xxvi Execution Library, Control Use Of 6-16
Prune Profile Utility (BBS) 35-16 Looping
Punctuation marks (syntax diagrams) xxvi Change Limit 6-17
PURGE Command Limit Defaults 6-13
Job Output 30-30 Write Limit
Change Setting 6-17
Site Defaults 6-13
R RR Line Command 15-7
R Line Command 15-7 RSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11
RBX Prefix 35-2
Read Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14
Reattaching S
AWS 13-13 SAVE Command
Data Set Object 26-10, 26-11 Assigning Attributes 23-4
Job Output 30-15 Assigning Description 23-4
Library Facility 33-10, 33-11 Creating Library Member 23-2
Reexecuting Last Command/RPF 2-6 Saving AWS Contents 23-2
Reformat Lines Scale Line 8-6
Using Line Command 19-8—19-9 Screen
Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8 Change
REFRESH Command Copy Destination 6-15
Data Set Facility 24-15 Size 8-12
Library Facility 31-10 Components of
Refresh Function (BBS) 35-4 Command Area 8-3
Refreshing Selection List Description 8-2
Data Set Facility 24-15 Execution Area 8-6
Library Facility 31-10 Response Line 8-3
RELEASE Command 27-52 Scale Line 8-6
RENAME Command System Control Area 8-3—8-5
AWS 13-5 System Information Line 8-3
Data Set Object 27-53 Copy 15-9
Library Member 34-22 Print 7-2
Rename Function Panel Split
Data Set Facility 27-54 Full 8-7—8-8
Renaming Overview 8-7
AWS Partial 8-9
Using Command 13-5 Resplit 8-10
Using STATUS AWS 17-3 Swap 8-10, 8-11
Data Set Object Terminate 8-11
Using Command 27-53 Types of
Using Function Panel 27-54 Full/Half 8-7
Using Selection List 27-57 Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14
Renumber AWS Contents SCREEN Command 8-12
Any Time 22-1—22-3 Screen Types of 10-2—10-3
RENUMBER Command 22-1—22-3 Sign-on 10-3
Reserved Sign-on' 10-2
Characters 2-5, 2-6

SDSN Command 27-62 Session Attributes (continued)
SEARCH Command 20-7, 20-8 Automatic (continued)
SELECT Command (CA-Roscoe) Line Insertion, Display/Change 6-15
With AWS 13-14 Signoff, Site Defaults 6-12
With Library Facility 32-13 Terminal Lock, Site Defaults 6-12
Selection Lists AWS
Copying From 27-20 Data Protection 6-15
Data Set Facility Edit Indicator 6-16
Catalog 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12 ERASE EOF Key Control 6-16
Data Set 25-26, 25-27 Fill Character (Trailing Blanks) 6-16
Function Code Hierarchy 24-13 Highlighting 6-15
LIBRARIAN 25-2—25-6 Recovery, Change 17-5
Overview 24-12 Selection, Change 17-5
PDS Load 25-20—25-22 Sequence Number Attribute, Change 17-6
PDS Source 25-23—25-25 Tab Character/Positions, Change 17-5
Printing From 27-51 CA-Librarian -INC Expansion
Refreshing 24-15 Changing 6-16
Source 25-23—25-25 Character Set
Volume 25-30—25-31 Changing 6-15
VTOC 25-35—25-37 Using 3-2
Library Facility Character Translation
Attach Member 32-11 Changing 6-16
Copy 34-9, 34-10 Using 3-3
Description 31-7, 32-2 Column Boundaries 6-15
Detaching 33-2 Command Area
Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9 Changing 6-15
Refreshing 31-10 Command Delimiter (CA-Roscoe)
Sorting Display (ORDER Command) 32-9 Changing 6-15
SEND Command Using 2-2
Controlling Message Display 6-17 Command Delimiter (PF/PA Key)
Receiving Messages 9-2, 9-3 Changing 6-17
Transmitting Messages 9-4, 9-5 Cursor Positioning 6-15, 6-16
Sequence Number Attributes Data Set Objects
AWS COMPRESS Message Control, Changing 6-16
Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4 Directory Update Setting 6-17
Change When Printing 7-3 DSCB Empty Setting 6-16
Change When Submitting 28-5 Migration Recall 6-16
Sequence Numbers Search Limits, Changing 6-16
Display 5-6 Date Format 6-15
Printing 7-3 Display
Renumbering 22-2 CA-Roscoe ID 6-17
SESSION List of All 6-4
duplicate commands User ID 6-17
saving 6-16 Display Format
Session Attributes Change All 6-15
:C (COPY) Destination Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Changing 6-15 Change Display Margins 5-5
+INC Statement Expansion Change Sequence Number Display 5-6
Changing 6-17 DSCB Setting, Change 6-16
ATTACH Pause Setting 6-15 ETSO Escape Sequence
Automatic Changing 6-16
Indentation, Display/Change 6-15
Index X-15
Session Attributes (continued) SET Command
Jobs STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15
-INC Expansion Control, Changing 6-16 SET COPYDEST Command
+INC Expansion Control 6-17 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15
Data Width Control 6-17 SET CURSOR Command 6-15
Search Limits, Changing 6-16 SET DATEFORM Command 6-15
List Of 6-4 SET DISPLAY Command
Messages, Controling Display Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8
From CA-Roscoe 6-16 Change Display Margins 5-5
From Monitor 6-16 Change Sequence Number Display 5-6
PRINT Completion Notification Changing 7-8 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15
Printing Destination SET DSNCMLST Command
Changing 6-17 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Printing Location SET DSNCNT Command
Establish 7-10 Site Default 6-13
Printing Notification STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Changing 6-17 SET DSNEMPTY Command 6-16
RPF SET DSNRECALL command 6-16
Control Execution Library Use 6-16 SET DUPCR command 6-16
Control Loop Limit 6-17 SET EDITCHNG Command
Control Write Limit 6-17 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Screen Copy Destination Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-10
Changing 6-15 SET EOF Command
Screen Positioning When String Located 6-17 Control ERASE EOF Use 16-6
SCRL Field Value STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Changing 6-17 SET ESCAPE Command
Search Column Boundaries STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Changing 6-15 SET EXECPFX command 6-16
Sequence Number Display 6-17 SET FILL Command
Signoff STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Changing Option 6-15 SET JOBCNT Command
SET ATTACH Command 6-15 Site Default 6-13
SET AUTOFF Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Site Defaults 6-12 SET MASTER Command
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
SET AUTOINDENT Command SET MODE Command
Inserting Lines 18-15 Control Character Recognition/Translation 3-3
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 Control Non-Displayable Character Translation 3-4
SET AUTOINSERT Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Insert Additional Lines 18-9 SET MONLEVEL command 6-16
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET MONTRAP command 6-16
SET AWSDSPLY Command 6-15 SET MSGLEVEL Command
SET BOUNDS Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Change Column Boundaries 4-4 With Job Submission 28-4
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 Set Options Utility (BBS) 35-13
SET CHARSET Command SET PFKDELIM Command
Changing Language Code 3-2 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET RPSDEST Command
SET CMDLINES Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-9
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET RPSNOTIFY Command
For PRINT Completion Notification 7-8

SET RPSNOTIFY Command (continued) SMS-Managed Data Set (continued)
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 Cataloging 27-11, 27-12
SET SAVEATTR Command SMS-Managed Data Sets
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 Allocating
SET SCROLL Command Using Command 27-2, 27-3
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 Special Characters
SET SEARCH Command 6-17 Asterisk (*) 2-6
SET SEND Command Double Comma (,,) 2-5
Controlling Display 9-2, 9-3 Minus Sign (-) 2-6
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 Plus Sign (+) 2-7
SET STATS Command 6-17 Wildcard Characters 2-5
SET STMTCNT Command 6-17 Split Line
Site Default 6-13 Using Line Commands 19-17
SET SUBMIT Command Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14
Controlling Sequence Numbers 28-5 Split Screen Facility
Expanding +INC Statements 28-7 Full 8-7—8-8
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 Overview 8-7
SET SYSID Command 6-17 Partial 8-9
SET TLOCK Command Resplitting 8-10
Activating Terminal Lock 8-13 Swapping 8-10, 8-11
Site Defaults 6-12 Terminating 8-11
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 Split screen setting 6-10
SET USERID Command 6-17 STA Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
SET WRITECNT Command 6-17 STANDARD Mode
SetOpts Function (ZMsg BBS) 35-27 Character Translation/Recognition 3-3
Shifting Data STATUS AWS Command 17-1—17-6
Description STATUS COMMAND Command 2-13
Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 STATUS DISPLAY Command
Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Changing
Using TAB Facility 18-16, 18-17 Column Boundaries 4-3
Show News Utility (BBS) 35-15 Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Sign On Sequence Number Display 5-6
BulletinBoard System 35-2 Description 6-2, 6-3
From CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5 STATUS SESSION Command 6-4
From CICS 10-6 STATUS SYSTEM Command 6-12, 6-13
From Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 String Handling
From TSO 10-7 Adding
Using VTAM 10-3 At Beginning 14-2
Sign-on Program At End 14-2
Creating 10-10, 10-11 Changing Character Within
Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 Using Line Commands 14-5
Signoff Using Primary Command 14-4
Automatic Changing String
Description 10-12 Tracking Changes 14-8—14-10
Site Defaults 6-12 Using Line Commands 14-7
Explicit 10-13 Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7
SKETCH Delimiter Characters 2-8
Description Of 40-1 HEX
SMS-Managed Data Set Display In 5-7, 5-8
Allocating Locate All Occurrences
Using Function Panel 27-7 In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8, 20-9
In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8
Index X-17
String Handling (continued) TEXTENTR (Operand of INPUT Command) 18-6, 18-7
Locate Non-Matching Occurrence TF Line Command 19-8—19-9
In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7, 20-8 Thread entries, deleting 35-16
In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8 Thread Entry (BBS)
Locating By Occurrence Create 35-8, 35-9
In AWS (Line Commands) 20-5 Print 35-17
In AWS (Primary Command) 20-3 View 35-6
Translate Thread Title (BBS), Create 35-10
On Input/Edit 3-3 TIME Command 6-14
With Command 3-3 Time, Display 6-14
SUBMIT Command 28-4 Title, Message/Thread (BBS) 35-10
Submitting Data TJ Line Command 19-18
Changing Defaults 6-17 TRACE Command 14-10
Description 28-4 Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-10
SUFFIX Command 14-2 Translation, Character
Suppress Message Processing (BBS) 35-23 Non-display 3-4
Syntax Checking When Entering/Editing Data 3-3
COBOL 28-3 When Searching For String 3-3
JCL 28-2, 28-3 When Specified with CA-Roscoe Commands 3-3
Syntax diagrams TS Line Command 19-17
reading (how to) xxvi—xxx TSO
SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-5 Command 38-10
System Control Area 8-3—8-5 Procedure Execution 38-10
System Information Line 8-3 Signing on to CA-Roscoe 10-7
System Printers TSO Command 38-10
Changing Locations TT (Destination) Line Command 15-4
For Request 7-10 With Move 21-4
For Session 7-10 TTD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
Displaying Locations 7-11 With COPY 15-5
Setting Parameters 7-9 TUTORIAL, CA-Roscoe
Using 7-2 Description 12-6
TXTCENT Command 19-2
TXTFLOW Command 19-7
T TXTJOIN Command 19-15, 19-16
Tab Character TXTLCASE Command 19-5
Change Via STATUS AWS 17-5 TXTSPLIT Command 19-13, 19-14
TAB Command 18-16, 18-17 Typewriter Devices
TC Line Command 19-3 Establishing Communications A-2
TCB Line Command 19-3 Non-Executable Commands A-12
TCC Line Command 19-3 Signing Off A-6
TCT Line Command 19-3 Signing On A-4
TE Line Command 18-10 Using The Data Set Facility A-10
Terminal Lock Facility Viewing Job Output A-11
Changing Options 6-17
Invoking 8-13, 8-14
Site Defaults 6-12 U
Terminating 8-13, 8-14 UC Line Command 19-5
Terminate UCB Line Command 19-5
Split Screens 8-11 UCC Line Command 19-5
Terminal Lock Screen 8-13 UCT Line Command 19-5

Uncataloging Data Set 27-58 Wildcard Characters (continued)
UNCATLG Command 27-58 With Library Facility 32-3
Unread Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14
UPCASE Command 19-5
UPDATE Command 23-5 X
Uppercase Data XCOPY Command
Using Line Commands 19-5 Between Screens 15-12—15-14
Using Primary Command 19-5 XCOPYS Command
Using PF/PA Keys Between Screens 15-12—15-14
Inserting Data In AWS 18-13 XCOPYX Command
Utility Function (BBS) 35-4, 35-12 Between Screens 15-12—15-14
Utility Menu (BBS) 35-12 XL Line Command 14-5
XLB Line Command 14-5
XLT Line Command 14-5
V XTENDED Mode
Variables (syntax diagrams) xxvi Character Translation/Recognition 3-3
Viewing Message Thread (BBS) 35-5 XTPM
Viewing Message Thread Entries (BBS) 35-6, 35-7 Signing On CA-Roscoe 10-4
Volume Selection List
Attaching 25-28
Description Of 25-30—25-31 Z
Detaching 26-2 ZAnn Mode (BBS) 35-15
Function Code List 25-30—25-31 ZMsg (BBS)
Reattaching 26-10, 26-11 Function 35-4
Search for String Mode, Using 35-21—35-27
All Occurrences 26-4 PFKey Functions 35-25
By Occurrence 26-3 Set Options 35-27
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 ZMsgOpts Display (BBS) 35-27
Selecting Different Level 25-38 ZZZZZMSG Member
Wildcard Characters 25-29 View Using BulletinBoard System 35-21—35-24
VTAM Sign-on
Initial 10-3
Signing Off 10-13
VTOC Selection List
Attaching 25-33—25-34
Description Of 25-35—25-37
Detaching 26-2
Function Code List 25-35—25-37
Search for String
By Occurrence 26-3
Selecting Different Level 25-38
Wildcard Characters 24-8, 25-33
W
Wildcard Characters
With Data Set Facility
For Catalog/VTOC Selection List 24-8
For LIBRARIAN/PDS/Volume Selection
List 24-9
Index X-19

CA Roscoe Ver6

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CA Roscoe Ver6

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CA-Roscoe

The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc.

 2001 Computer Associates International, Inc.

About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Part I. Getting Started (General Information)

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

iv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)

Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

vi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . . . 17-1

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . . 18-1

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . . 23-1

Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets)

viii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . . . 27-1

x CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data)

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . . 32-1

xii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . . 34-1

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

xiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

This CA-Roscoe User Guide provides a task-oriented description of CA-Roscoe. It

About This Guide xvii

xviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

About This Guide xix

xx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

About This Guide xxi

User Series Contents

xxii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

About This Guide xxiii

xxiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Licensing Management Program (LMP)

CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine product licensing